Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield

By Amy Porterfield: Entrepreneur, Social Media Marketing Strategist, and Online Marketer

Listen to a podcast, please open Podcast Republic app. Available on Google Play Store.


Category: Management & Marketing

Open in iTunes


Open RSS feed


Open Website


Rate for this podcast


Description

How do I start an online business? Grow my email list to thousands of subscribers? Sell more and grow faster? These are just some of the big questions that leading online marketing strategist, Amy Porterfield, digs into on the top-ranked Online Marketing Made Easy Podcast. Featuring insights from A-List online marketing experts (Russell Brunson, John Lee Dumas, Rick Mulready, Marie Forleo, etc.) as well as mini marketing masterclasses and step-by-step guides, each episode is designed to help you take immediate action on the most important strategies for starting, scaling and automating your online business. Amy’s specialty is getting into the online trenches with you. Thinking about creating an online course? Want to promote with webinars? Need help with your Facebook ads? Discover why hundreds of thousands of online business owners turn to Amy Porterfield to generate more profits and to make sense of the online marketing space, implement the strategies that really get results, and turn that side hustle into a business that lasts.

Episode Date
#224: A Behind the Scenes Chat with My Integrator, Chloe
40:19

On today’s show I brought on the Integrator on my team, Chloe Euse. The goal of this episode is to help you step into the Visionary role as the founding entrepreneur of your business so that you can do more of the things that you were created to do and that are in your zone of genius.

The deal is, in order to be able to fully step into that role, you will need to hire an Integrator (also known as a Project Manager) to work alongside you.

I’m taking you behind-the-scenes so you can see how a Visionary and Integrator work together. To give you a hint, you as the Visionary are responsible for deciding on the WHAT of the business, while your Integrator figures out the HOW to make your vision come true.

I really want you to take the time to tune in and listen today and hear directly from us, but here are the key areas we cover:

  • The skills that are vitally important for an Integrator to have
  • How specific Myers Briggs types may work better (or worse) together
  • The nitty-gritty of how a Visionary and Integrator work together (you two are going to work VERY closely together so you better like each other!)
  • Whether you should hire a local or virtual Integrator
  • How the Integrator executes on the Visionary’s vision (this is where the other members of your team and contractors come in!)
  • How tension between the Visionary and Integrator is actually a good thing
  • Why an Integrator is NOT an implementer. There is a very important distinction here!
  • What a day in the life of an Integrator looks like
  • Chloe’s TOP 3 tools that she couldn’t live without as an Integrator
  • Chloe gives you (the Visionary) some final words of wisdom for when you decide to take the leap and hire your Integrator (her insight here as an Integrator is GOLDEN!)

And to wrap this episode up with a big bow, we’ve got a couple fantastic freebies for you. Both are Google Doc templates that you can take and make your own.

  1. The exact Integrator job description I used when I hired Chloe.
  2. The pre-hire test-run assignment I used for my top Integrator candidates.

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.  

Aug 16, 2018
#223: How To Start Earning Affiliate Money With Pat Flynn
59:02

Raise your hand if you could use a little extra cash in your business right now!

In the first few years of building my business I certainly could have used some extra money, and had I known what I know today, I would have done something entirely different that would have brought in a nice flow of revenue during those tight times: affiliate marketing.  

If you don’t have affiliate marketing as a revenue generator in your business, I want that to change for you today.

My guest today, Pat Flynn, is going to share his proven system for earning money through affiliate marketing. Why did I choose Pat to be our guide today? Because he has earned three million dollars through affiliate marketing commissions since he started this business! He knows his stuff!    

AFFILIATE MARKETING IS A GAME-CHANGER!

If you’re new to the idea of affiliate marketing, Pat simply defines it as the process of earning a commission by promoting another person or another company’s product.

The great thing about affiliate marketing is that if you love a product or service and have a platform that you’re able to share why you love it with your audience, you can earn a commission from that recommendation at no cost to your audience.

Pat shared how he promoted one of his favorite products through a banner ad on his website and was being paid $1,000 per month, but he contacted them and asked about trying out an affiliate relationship instead. They did and he went from earning $1,000/month to $8,000 the next month!

PAT’S TOP TWO TIPS ON HOW TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN AFFILIATE MARKETING:
  • Be authentic. Don’t be an affiliate for a product you don’t believe in. Think about the things you would recommend to a friend, this is how you should think when you’re deciding what products to be an affiliate for.  
  • Treat the product you are promoting as if it were your own. Tell your audience why you love it, how it has helped you, and how it can help them. It’s extra helpful if you can take them behind-the-scenes and show how you use it.
TWO TYPES OF AFFILIATE MARKETING TO CONSIDER: PASSIVE & ACTIVE

An example of a PASSIVE way of affiliate marketing is when you include links to products on your website, like my Tools of the Trade page here. This is considered PASSIVE because once you set it up, it’s there and as people come to your website or are linked to it in an email, they can click on the links to make a purchase. Another example is by including a link just like this link right here in the show notes in which I’m sharing my affiliate link to Pat’s 123 Affiliate Marketing program.

An example of an ACTIVE format of affiliate marketing would be it Pat and I decided to do a special webinar with a launch sequence where we were actively promoting and selling the product to our audiences and we even offer a special deal that’s only available during a specified time period.

A prime example of this is when I promote B-School each year in February. I go all out in promoting Marie’s program because I 1000% stand behind her program, and because of this I promote the program as if it were my own. Being an affiliate for this program has been a game-changer for my business and I definitely use the strategies that Pat teaches in his program.

Either way, always be upfront with your audience that you are an affiliate. This is being transparent with your audience, but also protects you legally.

JUST GETTING STARTED IN AFFILIATE MARKETING?

Pat is clear that you do need to have an audience to be successful in affiliate marketing, otherwise who would use your links or join your webinars? However, I love that he talks about planting seeds now for people that may come across your content down the road. You may not make much money when your audience is small, but everything will be in place for you to earn affiliate commissions as you grow.

This is also a great way to begin monetizing because that trust you gain by recommending other people’s products can then lead to you selling your own products down the road.  

HOW TO AUDIT YOUR EXISTING AFFILIATE MARKETING STRATEGY

Maybe you’re already an affiliate, but you want to do an audit to see what’s working and what’s not, Pat suggests looking at your Google Analytics and see what’s doing well and optimize for those. Here are a few of the optimizing ideas he shared:

  • Include more links in your blog archive
  • Interview the founder on your show or on your blog
  • Create a demo video for the product you are recommending
  • After you’ve generated lots of leads for an affiliate you are then in a good position to contact the company to discuss other ways to promote your affiliate link beyond the traditional methods (Pat gives some good personal examples in the episode)
  • Create offers or bonuses as an incentive to go through your affiliate link
  • Add links to your resource page
  • Do a review of the product
PAT’S #1 NINJA AFFILIATE MARKETING TRICK!

Create a demo video!

Pat says creating a demo video is one of the most underused but HIGHLY effective techniques to take your affiliate marketing to a whole new level.

Pat includes the in-depth how-to create a killer demo video that converts as a bonus to my audience if you purchase his 123 Affiliate Marketing program through my affiliate link, but he also shares a few tips right here!

  • You don’t need to share every little feature or process for the product you’re recommending. Your demo video should show just enough to excite someone, but not bore them. It’s not a tutorial, it should be a overview that shows the viewer what the product is and how it can help them.
  • Pick three features to share in your demo video, but make sure to understand how to share why these features exist and why this product is unique.
  • Show your viewer how easy it is to use the product. If you do, they will want to get started using the product right away!  
TOP MISTAKES TO AVOID IN AFFILIATE MARKETING
  1. Promoting the wrong product. Make sure your are promoting relevant products that you have experience with and that WILL help your audience.
  2. Not pushing hard enough. Of course you don’t want to be annoying or too pushy, but when you know you’ve got a product that will solve that person’s problem or help them to achieve a certain goal they have, then you can and should push harder.

Alright, you’ve got ninja tricks, some mistakes to avoid, and hopefully a plan to either begin earning money through affiliate marketing, or a plan to give your existing affiliate strategy a boost

Take a listen to this short one-minute video where Pat tells you a little bit more about how you can earn money through affiliate marketing.  

Aug 09, 2018
#222: How to Create Your "Total Immersion Weekend Retreat" to Clean Up Your Messy Business
33:10

I just got back from a total immersion weekend retreat in Palm Springs with my Integrator Chloe and in today’s episode I share all the details of what went down! Unlike a typical team retreat we weren’t brainstorming ideas, we were actually cleaning up the messy stuff in our business.

Yep, I’ve got messes to clean up just like anyone else. I must say, I do believe my team and I are a gold standard when it comes to setting up systems and processes, but I think no matter how well the backend of your online business looks every single one of us has room to do a little cleaning, don’t you think?

Let me share a little bit about the weekend...

WHAT IS A TOTAL IMMERSION RETREAT WEEKEND?

First things first, this is NOT a team retreat and it is NOT a big brain-storming weekend where you come up with new ideas for the future. This is dedicated time to spend looking at the messy parts in your business and cleaning them up. The types of things you’ll be looking at cleaning up, fixing, or eliminating are areas that will ultimately impact the financial bottom line in your business.

WHO SHOULD GO ON A TOTAL IMMERSION RETREAT?

This is time best spent either on your own, or in the company of the right-hand person in your business. I took Chloe, my Integrator, because she is such an integral part of my business. . (Side note: Don’t miss upcoming episode #224 where I bring Chloe on the show and we talk about her role as an Integrator (aka Project Manager). We get into what she does, how she does it, who she manages, how we work together, her fave tools and lots more!)

FIVE QUESTIONS YOU SHOULD ASK YOURSELF BEFORE YOUR TOTAL IMMERSION WEEKEND RETREAT

Answering the following five key questions will help you to set a focus and make sure you’re on the same page (if you will be with someone from your team):

  1. What’s your #1 pain point in your business right now?
  2. What feels messy, broken, or painfully slow?
  3. What needs to be fixed before you can grow?
  4. Where are you losing money? Do you have any current leaks in your funnels, or in any system that you’re using to make money right now?
  5. What have you been putting off for way too long? What are the important things you’ve been wanting to get to but you know there are just not enough hours in the day?

I want you to answer these questions when you take your total immersion retreat weekend, too. Yes, I want you to take time away to clean up the messes in your own business. You will not regret it, I promise you!

TIP for answering the five questions: When answering these questions for yourself, think about team, systems, processes, and funnels (for my beginners, don’t let the word funnel throw you off...this just means the different systems and strategies that you have in place to get people to buy or join your email list).

I go into much more detail in today’s episode, but I’ve included a snapshot here for you to see how our weekend progressed. Now remember, this is going to look different for everyone, but I thought the examples from my business might be helpful to get you thinking about areas in your own business that might need some cleaning up.

FRIDAY AFTERNOON/EVENING

  • Agenda
    We worked on our agenda during the 2-hour drive to Palm Springs. It’s important to have a clear game-plan before you arrive at your destination, so you can get right to work. While we laid our agenda out in detail, we allowed ourselves the flexibility to change and pivot as necessary throughout the weekend.
  • Calendars
    We cleaned up my calendar bigtime! I’m a big fan of the “no train” but for some reason I lost my way over the last few months and had said “yes” to too much. Because of this, I was missing important deadlines in my business because my calendar was too full. This also meant that I was working nights and weekends and that is something I am trying not to do.

SATURDAY MORNING

Fresh and ready for a new day, we cleaned up our elaborate evergreen funnel system inside InfusionSoft. Because we’ve been at this for awhile, parts of our funnels were broken. Let me just tell you that this part was NOT fun!! But, you know what, I’m glad we knocked it out early in the weekend. : )

SATURDAY AFTERNOON - THIS WAS THE FUN PART FOR ME!!

  • We talked about the projects we were going to work on moving forward and who was going to work on what.
  • We also talked about what projects we needed to put on the back burner or eliminate completely. In this episode I talk about a big decision we made in switching up something that one of my team members was working on.

SUNDAY MORNING

  • Wrapped up any loose ends and headed back home. (I didn’t do it this time, but next time I’m definitely scheduling massages for me and Chloe to enjoy before we leave.)

MY TOP TOTAL IMMERSION WEEKEND TIPS

I believe a total immersion weekend retreat like this is critical to the success of your business. Step away from your everyday distractions and you won’t regret it! Here are some tips for you to consider when you go on your retreat:

  • Choose a destination you enjoy and that inspires you. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, but if you’re at a place in your business where you can splurge a little, go for it!
  • Just know that your days are going to be long. We worked hard, but it was so worth it!
  • Change up your environment so you don’t go stir crazy. We found fun little places around the hotel property to work throughout the weekend: the beautiful lobby, our hotel room, and we even knocked out a couple of hours of work from the bar while sipping on a refreshing margarita!
  • Take time to eat, drink lots of water, get some fresh air, take walks, and get 7-8 hours of sleep each night.
  • Let your family know that this time away will be focused on work and that you will not be available much throughout the weekend. It’s very important to limit distractions in order to make the most of your time away, and by stating this up front you will make sure no one at home is feeling neglected!
  • Keep a Google Doc noting the big decisions that you’ve made over the weekend and any team communication you want to relay when you return.
  • Get all those action items moved into your project management tool. Chloe always says, “If it’s not in Asana, it’s not happening!”
  • Don’t forget to have a little fun, too! You’re going to be working really hard, so I suggest you treat yourself to a massage or some sort of simple pleasure at the end of your weekend.
  • Upon your return, have a meeting with your team or individual team members to fill them in on some of the decisions you made or changes that may be coming down the pipeline.
  • Repeat your total immersion retreat weekend on a quarterly basis!

So what do you think? Are you ready to book a total immersion weekend retreat to clean up the messy parts in your business? I hope you said “yes!” because this is an investment that you won’t regret! If you’ve decided to go for it, pick where you’ll go and book it in the next 48 hours, and when you do, head over to Instagram and DM me to let me know when and where you’re going!

This episode is brought to you by Audible where you too can listen to the book I mentioned that I’m loving right now: High Performance Habits by Brendon Burchard, for FREE! Members of my audience get a FREE audiobook download and 30-day free trial at www.audibletrial.com/OMME

Aug 02, 2018
Million Dollar Club Student Spotlight with Anna Digilio
26:19
HOW WEBINARS, CREATING A COURSE, AND A MEMBERSHIP SITE CHANGED THIS TEACHER’S LIFE IN A HUGE WAY!

I'm always in awe when one of my students shares with me how they’ve built their million dollar businesses. Anna’s story is one of my favorites and I wanted her to share it with you as well!

Anna spent 23 years as a second grade teacher but decided she wanted to make an impact on the education community in a bigger way. This decision to shift her focus led her to my programs and she dove right in, taking action after action until things clicked! She made $10k on her very FIRST webinar and she's NEVER TURNED BACK.

You won’t want to miss Anna’s incredible story as she shares her journey to success. She shares the specific steps (and consistent action) she took from making that first $10k selling 2nd grade course curriculum, to creating a membership site for teachers that brings in almost $60k per month, to her latest venture, a course that teaches teachers how to teach guided-math, which at the time of this recording had only been live three weeks and she’d already made $35,000! That’s an entire year’s earnings for some teachers!

TWO MISTAKES TO AVOID WHEN GROWING YOUR ONLINE BUSINESS

And to wrap it up, Anna shares the two things she would do differently had she known back then what she knows now. I 100% agree with both, so do yourself a favor and take what she says and don’t let those mistakes slow you down from the impact you are destined to make!

Alright, if you’ve gotten this far and haven’t listened in to the podcast yet, what are you waiting for? : ) I promise you, you’ll be inspired by Anna’s story and fall in love with her just like I did!

If you’d prefer to watch the interview, enjoy that right here...

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you.

Jul 31, 2018
#221: How to Create a 3-Month SEO Plan with Neil Patel
54:48

Neil Patel, master marketer and SEO genius, joined me on my show today to dive into the the nuts-and-bolts of some simple SEO strategies that will bring you more traffic, conversions, and revenue! He walks us through a 3-month plan that I’ve broken down for you in a free guide that you can grab right here.

I have to admit, I haven’t spent as much time or attention as I should on SEO strategies, but that’s all changed this year...my team and I are being intentional about learning more about SEO and we’re going to implement the plan that Neil shared with us today, too!

IT’S NOT ROCKET SCIENCE

One thing that Neil dispelled immediately is the fear that so many of us have around the idea of SEO strategy, and that is, that SEO is too complicated and we’ll never understand what exactly to do!

Here’s what he had to say about that:

“SEO is not rocket science...it’s not hard, and as long as you follow this plan, which is broken down into three main steps, you should get results.”

And let me tell you the plan is not complicated...it’s very doable and this guide is going to help!

WHAT IS SEO AND WHY SHOULD I HAVE AN SEO STRATEGY?

SEO stands for Search Engine Optimization and Neil explained that it’s really all about making your site compatible for search engines. Now of course we create our content for our audience to enjoy and find useful, but we need to understand the importance of making our content compatible for BOTH users AND search engines.

HOW SEO WILL INCREASE TRAFFIC, CONVERSIONS AND REVENUE

As an entrepreneur, you likely have a strong “why” behind what you’re doing online, but the bottom-line is that you want more people to see or listen to your content, you want to turn followers into customers, and you want to earn a living doing what you love to do. One way to accomplish this is to develop an SEO plan that has the ability to give you these tangible results.

And that’s exactly what Neil shared in today’s show! He broke down exactly what you need to do in order to get a really good, simple SEO strategy running on your website.

THE 3-MONTH SEO PLAN

I’ve outlined some of the key points Neil made in the interview here, but for the step-by-step plan download your free 3-Month SEO Guide here.

MONTH 1 - Research & Competitor Analysis

With SEO you may not see results for several months so you want to make sure you are going after the right keywords. Neil explained that if you’re not figuring out what keywords you should be using in your content, you might be getting traffic, but it’s NOT traffic that will turn into customers.

I’ve linked up to the keyword research tools that Neil recommends (below), but you’re going to want to listen in to today’s show for the JUICY hack he shared about using SEMrush to look up your competitor’s keywords as a guide in your research...it’s like he handed us a little piece of gold!!

MONTH 2 - Optimize Your On Page Code and Building Content

So, you’re probably wondering what “on page” means! I was too. : )

In simple terms, Google reads source codes (not the language you and I speak or read!) so it’s our job to make sure Google can read our websites so that we can rank in its searches.

The good news is that if you have a Wordpress website with the free Yoast SEO plugin installed it will handle most of the on-page SEO stuff for you. It basically walks you through the steps (in a very user friendly way) to make sure Google can read your pages.

Neil also discussed the importance of building quality content on a consistent basis on your blog. You’ve gotta have a place to use that keyword research from month-one research, right? Here are a few pointers Neil suggests you implement when you write your blog posts/articles:

  • Write in a conversational tone
  • Create thorough content (NOT short)
  • Use sub-headings
  • Keep paragraphs short
  • Use images
  • Wrap up your blog posts with a summary conclusion
  • End your conclusion with a question

MONTH 3 - Building Links and Getting Social Shares

Links from other people’s sites to yours (backlinks) can be a big SEO boost. Google loves seeing links, but not just any links! Google is so smart that it knows the authority and relevance of where those links are coming from. I know! It’s scary how smart Google is!

Anyway, obviously if you are linked to from a very well-known authority in your field, versus someone who themselves doesn’t have much authority or who doesn’t have much to do with your field, then who is Google going to give more credibility to? The well-known authority who is sharing relevant content with their audience via a link to your content, of course!

Part of Neil’s three-month plan also includes a great strategy for gaining social shares to your content. While social sharing will not directly affect your SEO, it sure will indirectly. Social sharing builds social proof, which ultimately builds awareness and your authority.

Make sure to grab your free 3-Month SEO Guide right here, to learn all about Neil’s technique for getting social shares through Buzzsumo.

I hope you listened to the episode because Neil broke all of this down in such an easy to understand and doable fashion. But let’s not leave it at that...I want you to put this plan in action. Here what I’d love for you to do right now:

  • Print out the 3-Month SEO Guide
  • Schedule time in your calendar to implement the steps in the plan. Remember to be non-negotiable with the time you block out.
  • Join my OMME Podcast Facebook group so that we can share our SEO successes in a few months. See you there!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Jul 26, 2018
#220: Your Summer Listening Playlist (Strategy, Inspiration and Biz Insights!)
29:10

One thing I love about summer is having a little bit more downtime. This allows me to do some things that I might not always have time for at other times of the year like binge listening to my favorite podcasts.

That usually only happens while on vacation. As a matter of fact, I’m just back from a family vacation in Hawaii and I totally binge listened to a couple of my fave podcasts, The Life Coach School with Brooke Castillo and Oprah’s Super Soul Conversations. They are both soooo good!  

So if you too find the opportunity for a little binge listening, I thought it would be fun to compile a Summer Listening Playlist for you as it relates to my favorite past Online Marketing Made Easy episodes.

What made this episode extra special for me was to have some of my listeners submit their favorite episodes as well. (I’ve included audio messages from them directly in today’s show!) Let’s dive in!

YOUR ONLINE MARKETING MADE EASY SUMMER LISTENING PLAYLIST
TOP FIVE LISTENER FAVORITES
  1. Both Michelle from Canada and Sarah from Denmark are fellow megabatching lovers and they recommend episode #182: How To Mega-Batch Your Content. My productivity has skyrocketed since I began mega-batching in my business.  
  2. Lyndsey from Asheville, NC (hello Blue Ridge Mountains!) recommends you listen to an episode that helped her to grow her email subscriber list to 50,000 in just one year: Episode #99: How to Build a List-Building Blitz Campaign. Make sure to listen to her audio message in today’s show, she has some great insight on the one thing in episode #99 that made all the difference in her list growth!  
  3. Molly from Oregon actually has three favorites to share:
    Episode #149: Your 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint (she really loved the freebie in this episode and if you like a detailed blueprint, so will you!)
    Episode #150: [Case Study] How to Turn a Pre-Launch Strategy Into a Wildly Profitable Online Launch (This episode is a follow up to episode 149 and will show you what the pre-launch strategy looks like in the real world.)
    Episode #209: The Surprising Journey of Launching a Physical Product with Lara Casey - I love hearing that Molly learned about a resource in this episode that saved her TONS of money in the production of her own physical product!
  4. Gregory from Nashville, TN (you’ve got to tune in to hear his awesome southern accent!) is a fan of the DIY approach and recommends you listen to episode #171: DIYing Your Business: 5 Areas to Focus On When You’re Just Starting Out - I was so happy to hear that Gregory said that this episode really gave him clarity to begin to build his brand and his online business. I’m definitely specific in this episode about what you should and should not be delegating in your business when you’re first starting out.
  5. For the 5th spot of my listener favorites list, I had to include a double-whammy because both of the recommendations are so good! Also, I just love how so many parts of the world are represented in the show today!
  • All the way from Perth in Western Australia, Neda shares her favorite episode #201: 5 Ways to Make Money (Without Using Webinars). - I love how Neda said this helped her combine her previous experience with what she’s doing now to make more money in her business.
  • And finally, from May in Oslo, Norway! May loves how episode #206: Post-it Note Content Creation Mini-Training contains a content creation process that’s easy to take action on! May, you are not alone...I had so much great feedback (and pictures of people’s Post-it Note creations) from this episode!  

I absolutely LOVED hearing from so many of my listeners and how their favorite episodes of Online Marketing Made Easy have helped move their businesses forward!  

Moving on to my own personal recommendations for your Summer Listening Playlist...

AMY’S TOP FIVE FAVORITES
  1. I absolutely loved episode #147 with Marie Forleo: How to Ask Better Questions and Get Better Business Results. Limiting beliefs and negative self-talk are a HUGE problem in the entrepreneurial field, and may be holding you back from achieving the success you want and deserve. This episode will help you to move forward with confidence!   
  2. Next up is episode #203: How to Get Noticed When You’re Just Starting Out. Are you seeing a theme here? My next recommendation is another on mindset! The online world can be a noisy place, but it’s the way you think that will really set you apart. I’m all about helping you reset your mindset around business and being an entrepreneur, and this episode will do just that!
  3. My next pick is a super strategic one: Episode #164: Free Content vs. Paid Content (What’s the Difference?) In this episode I talk about the #1 question I get ALL the time. I actually created this episode so I could have a place to direct people when I get asked this question and it’s one of my most downloaded episodes to date!
  4. Did you think I wouldn’t mention the first time my sweet husband Hobie joined me on the mic? In #161: Love & Business: How to Make it Work. Being an entrepreneur can be tough, but how about being married to one? This is an excellent listen for all those couples out there. P.S. Since then I recorded another episode with Hobie (#207: 20 Questions (Rapid Fire Style!) with Special Guest Interviewer, Hobie Porterfield which was super fun, too!
  5. The last episode that I’m going to recommend for you is one that is actually airing a couple weeks after this episode, so you’ll have to wait for it if you’re reading this before August 2, 2018. In episode #222: How to Create A "Total Immersion Weekend Retreat" to Clean Up Your Messy Business I talk about a weekend retreat I took recently with my Integrator, Chloe, in which we focused on cleaning up the messy stuff in our business. I want you to listen to this episode so you can get a behind-the-scenes peek at something that can be a complete game-changer for your business.   

So there you have it - you’ve got a nice summer playlist to tune into! I’m guessing there may have been one or two recommendations that really resonated with you and I want you to commit to listening to those in the next 24 hours.

If your favorite episode wasn’t mentioned here today, I’d love to hear from you! Head over to Instagram and DM me what your favorite is and why.  

This episode is brought to you by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan” -- My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

Jul 19, 2018
#219: How to Use Instagram Stories to Grow Your Email List with Tyler McCall
57:21

Today you’re going to learn how to use one of the fastest growing social platforms, Instagram Stories, to build your email list, without using the Swipe Up feature.  

I don't know about you, but Instagram is by far my favorite social media platform. Mostly because I love Instagram Stories but also because I think the connections on Instagram feel more real than any other social platform.

If you are on Instagram then you've probably either recorded an Instagram story yourself, viewed one--or several (they are completely addictive), or you've heard someone else talk about Instagram Stories and you weren't really sure what the heck they were talking about.

Wherever you fall in this equation, there's one thing that is certain...you as a business owner, should be using Instagram Stories to create more solid, real connections that will, if you do it right, go far beyond just chatting on social media.

I had the pleasure of interviewing Tyler J. McCall, an Instagram Marketing Strategist, who has found great success in growing his email list through Instagram Stories. He shared tons of valuable insight, tips and strategies that you will be able to implement starting today!  And, don’t worry, as I mentioned earlier this strategy has nothing to do with the Swipe Up feature, which requires you have 10,000 followers to use.

So whether you’re familiar with Instagram Stories or not, we’ve got you covered here! Let’s first dive into the basics around Instagram Stories and then we’ll go ALL in on strategies to grow your email list via this platform!  

WHAT IS AN INSTAGRAM STORY?

An Instagram Story is content that is shared in Instagram itself, typically photos and videos, but you can also share text-based images. Your photos or graphics last six seconds while your videos can be up to 15 seconds long. You create the Story content using Instagram (the creation and editing tools are built right in), or you can create them externally and upload them to your Instagram account.  

How Stories are different than a post in your regular Instagram feed is that the content goes away after 24 hours unless you add it as an Instagram Story highlight in your profile, which is a whole different episode!

WHY YOU SHOULD BE USING INSTAGRAM STORIES IN YOUR BUSINESS:

Instagram now has over 800 million users. Of those, 500 million are on the app every day. And of those 500 million, 300 million are on Instagram Stories every day. Need I say more?!?

Tyler tells us that Instagram Stories are taking over as the content of choice, and Instagram likes this, because it gives them another place to run ads.  And as business owners, Instagram ads are a very powerful tool, as well. And let me tell you, Instagram Story ads are converting really well for my business right now!

“There are now millions of people every single day waiting for the right content to show up for them on Instagram Stories” - Tyler J. McCall

How to Create High Quality Instagram Stories

In order to grow your email list through Instagram Stories (we’ll get to that strategy in a minute), you first need to know how to create high quality Instagram Stories that people want to watch. Here’s a quick rundown, but make sure to tune in to the episode for all the details!

  1. Create your Stories with purpose and intention
  2. Use a good mix of personal and business (Tyler shares information about his business in his Stories, but he also shares his shopping trips to Target! Yes, he loves to walk the aisles and point out some of his favorite products!)
  3. Utilize a beginning, middle, and an end to your Story. Just like your elementary school teacher taught you! Download this great 2-page worksheet “The Story Arc Method” to work through an exercise Tyler put together for you to up your Instagram Story game!
  4. “Never let the dashes turn into dots!” I love how Tyler put this, regarding being careful to not create painfully long Stories.  
  5. I asked Tyler how he always has AMAZING light for his Stories and he shared two tips that money can’t buy!!
  6. Use captioning in your Stories for people who want to consume your content but don’t use audio. Tyler said that this technique will help keep retention high, too.
  7. Drive interaction with Instagram features like polls and DM conversations. Engage with your followers!
How to Grow Your Email List Using Instagram Stories Without Using the Swipe Up Feature

Ok, now that you have a plan to create high quality Instagram Stories, Tyler shared some really great insight as to how to grow your email list through a Direct Messaging strategy. Since Tyler has over 10,000 followers he is able to utilize the Swipe Up feature available in Stories, but he admits he doesn’t use it much because he thinks it’s a bit lazy and too passive!

Growing your email list through Instagram is all about Instagram Story Direct Messaging!

It’s through this DMing that he’s able to directly communicate with his followers, build relationships, hear pain points directly from his potential customers mouth, and engage in an authentic way.

Here are a few of the important habits Tyler suggests you build around Instagram Story DM engagement in order to be in a position where you can actually grow your email list:

  • Show up consistently
  • Make sure your content is high quality
  • Use calls to action in your Stories (from asking your followers to answer simple questions, respond to polls, and finally to respond to your invitation for them to learn more about what you’re doing or to gain access to an opt-in offering.)
  • Once you’ve engaged them, keep the conversation going,...see how you can help them
  • Post in the regular feed less often, so you can spend more time in Stories (you saw the stats, this is where the people are!)

Do these things and the opt-in opportunities that you offer your followers (the ones that keep coming back to watch your Stories) will put you in a prime position to grow your email list. Tyler’s DM conversions are huge!  

Listen in as Tyler shares a system which he calls -- An Instagram Story Opt-In Sandwich -- in which you guide your Story viewers through a journey that ultimately leads them to your lead magnet, content upgrade, or webinar via DM conversations.

I, too, have recently using my DMs to engage with my followers, and it is powerful! The only problem is that it can be time-consuming --- time well spent, but time-consuming, nonetheless.

Since Tyler gets A LOT of DMs, I asked him how he manages it all and one of the top tips he shared is to get in there a few times throughout the day so you are responding pretty quickly, and also so the DMs don’t pile up and become too overwhelming for you to respond to.

I’ve found that it’s helpful for me to actually create a task in Asana (my project management tool), to check my DMs daily, and that’s working well at this point.

So here’s what I want you to do, download and work through this 2-page worksheet that Tyler created for you and don’t spend another minute on Instagram without intention and purpose.

A great big thank you to Tyler for providing such great step-by-step teaching in this interview!

Tyler and I would both love to hear from you in our DMs! I’m @amyporterfield and he’s @tylerjmccall.

All my best,

Amy

This episode is brought to you by: LBL

Links to things I think you might be interested in that were mentioned in these show notes and on the podcast episode:

 

Jul 12, 2018
#218: 7 Steps to Pre-Selling Your Course
32:20

As an entrepreneur, your business is constantly changing—that’s the beauty of being an entrepreneur.  

And here’s the thing: YOU change too. You change your mind about things you used to be adamant about.

I’ve experienced this myself. For example, when it came to creating courses, five years ago I would have said: Concentrate on building your course, don’t worry about the selling.

But since then I have had a change of heart.

I’ve watched my students inside of my training program Courses That Convert, and I’ve seen a need that I did not see years ago. That need is around launching their course before they have 100% completed it.

Now I talk about the benefits of pre-selling your course, or selling it in advance of the course being done, then delivering your content each week via a LIVE workshop to a group of founding members who have already paid.

So this episode is going to walk you through the exact steps that go into pre-selling a course. I am going to walk you through the pieces you’ll need to make your offer, get your first students through the door, and deliver your content.

There are a few reasons I like this strategy:

 

  • #1: Pre-selling is a big validator of your course idea.

 

  • #2: Pre-selling helps you build confidence about your training. Nothing builds confidence more than getting a few PAYING students through the door.
  • #3: Pre-selling helps with cash flow! I know that building a course and getting your online course up and running can sometimes be a bit of a pinch on your finances. That’s why pre-selling is great—to bring in a bit of money to help you pay for some of those expenses.
  • #4: Pre-selling helps you build momentum and accountability. By selling before your content has been created, you have no choice but to deliver! This helps you avoid the “it’s been a year and my course is still languishing” syndrome!
  • #5: Lastly, you get immediate feedback from actual students when you pre-sell. Since it’s more of a live interaction, you can tweak your content based on the feedback before you launch again.

By the way, this episode was brought to you by Courses that Convert…I teach a much more robust version of this process in that course, with step-by-step plans and templates. Learn more by attending my free masterclass “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.

So if you’re as excited as I am about pre-selling your course, here are seven steps to get you started.

The 7 Steps to Pre-Selling Your Course

Step 1: Determine Your Course Offer

First, you will determine your pricing and what kind of “course package” you’ll be offering.

Step 2: Set Up Your Early Interest Page

Once you figure out your offer, it’s time to set a page where you can capture interest about your course. You’ll need to create an opt-in to collect first names and email addresses, and include a teaser about what they can expect. You’ll also want to create a follow-up email for everyone who opted in.

Step 3: Create Your 30-Day Content Blitz

Come up with content ideas for your blog, podcast, Facebook Lives, etc., and then schedule your content so you’re releasing something new every week for 30 days. Remember to include a call to action at the end of your content, asking your audience to sign up for the course if they want to learn more. (All traffic from this content will go to your Early Interest Page.)

Step 4: Set Up Your Checkout Page

This page should include information about your course such as the benefits and the features.

Step 5: Set Up Your Live Workshop Components

In this step you will want to create the shell of your member’s site so when you start delivering your content you have a place to load it.

You’ll also need to determine the details of your training and decide on the platform you’ll be delivering it.

Set up all the components you’ll need to ultimately deliver your live content—links, welcome emails, a VA, etc.—so that you’re ready to go. As you deliver your live content, you will load up your recordings into your course platform for your paying members to access.

Step 6: Promote a 48-Hour Flash Sale Offer

Your 48-hour flash sale offer will include two emails:

  1. The first is sent to your Early Interest list and informs them of your limited time offer, what’s included in the program, the number of spots available, and a link to your checkout page.
  2. Your second email gives them one more chance to sign up.

In this step, you also have the option to include a webinar training as part of your pre-sell strategy.

Step 7: Deliver Your Content

You’re now done with the selling portion of your pre-sell offer. All that’s left is delivering your content!

Remember to create your slide decks, prepare any cheat sheets or other bonuses, remind your students before each new training, and then upload your content to your member’s site once you’re done delivering it.

Links mentioned in this episode:

Course Creation Resources:

Episode #49: How to Know if Your Idea is Profitable
Episode #107: How Do I Price My Online Course?
Episode #133: How to Get Unstuck in Your Course Creation Process
Episode #206: The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training

Webinar Resources:

Episode #130: How to Sell on a Webinar (Without Being Overly Salesy)
Episode #145: 13 Questions to Nail Down Your Winning Webinar Topic and Title
Episode #211: 5 Things I Said Yes to In The Early Years (But Say No to Now)



Jul 05, 2018
#217: Why You Aren’t Taking Action with Brooke Castillo
41:38

Today we’re going to discover something that has the power to majorly change the trajectory of your business! We’re going to uncover the three main roadblocks that sideline many entrepreneurs (and people in general) and cause them to get stuck in inaction. You will learn specific ways to take massive action, get more done, and get those big results you desire.

“Taking action...” seems easy enough, right?  “Just do something!” As you and I both know, it’s not as easy as it sounds!

If right now what you’re doing in your business is not leading you to the results you desire, then this episode is for you!

To shed some light on WHY we’re not taking action and to help us understand how to turn that around and become massive action takers, I had the pleasure of interviewing Brooke Castillo. Brooke is a Life Coach—I actually call her a Life Coach Extraordinaire— who has worked with thousands of people (including yours truly) who have been stuck, are not reaching the goals they’ve envisioned for themselves, or ultimately just need a coach to shine some light on a path that can lead them to the promised land of getting a lot done and achieving big results.

Quick note before we move on: I mention that I’ve worked with Brooke personally; I get more into it on the podcast, but in case you were wondering, I’m part of her Self-Coaching Scholars program. You know I’m on a mission to up-level my life, including my health and my weight, but I’m also on a mission to up-level my mind, and Brooke really gets into this in her program. I know that focusing on how I think about things will change both my personal and business life, and I believe it could do the same for you. Because I stand behind what Brooke does, I have become an affiliate for the program, so if you are interested in joining her program, too, click here, and let Brooke know I sent you!

MANAGING YOUR MIND

Brooke began with the idea that so much of starting and building a business is about managing your mind.  She said, “There's no way around it, because you can understand how to do everything, you can study all the material, but until you understand that what you think about is going to create the emotion that either drives the action or the inaction, you're never gonna take the action.”

Did you get that? This is important: What you think about creates the emotion that drives the action or inaction.  If stress, fear and panic are fueling the action, you’re not going to be able to produce results at the level you want to produce.

Brooke shared three entrepreneurial roadblocks—things that are keeping you from taking massive action.   

Reason #1: YOU’RE STUCK IN THE BUSY HUSTLE

I can remember times, back when I was first starting out, when I was hustling my butt off. I was all over the place, connecting with different people, working with all kinds of clients, seemingly very successful—but the problem was, I wasn’t taking action on the things that could actually take me to a place where I could grow and scale my business. I was hustling. I was tired. But, to some degree, I was really just chasing my tail.

This is what Brooke refers to as “The Busy Hustle”—a tiring hustle that’s produced by negative emotion: stress, fear, panic…[Insert your own word here!].  

You want to avoid getting into a state of busy hustle, where you may be working hard yet aren’t producing anything. Instead your goal should be to get to a place of a productive hustle, where results are consistently produced.

Brooke suggested if you want to produce something, don’t just sit down to “work on something.” Sit down to produce something!

It’s important to change our language around this. Let’s stop saying, “I’m working on so and so,” and instead say, “I’m producing xyz,” or “I’m recording a podcast.” See the difference?!  

Reason #2: YOU’RE GIVING YOURSELF TOO MUCH TIME TO GET SOMETHING DONE

Brooke believes that many people, especially those who are newer to business, give themselves too much time to produce a result. In the beginning you have more time than customers or clients, so you just expand the time you are “working” in your business. Yet while you may  have the time, what you actually produce doesn’t line up with the many hours you’re working.

Brooke suggests we take a look at the projects we need to get done, and assign a time frame in which we will get it done. For example: instead of my saying, “I’ll get the podcast recorded and uploaded to Dropbox by Wednesday”, Brooke would say, “I will have the podcast recorded and uploaded to Dropbox in one hour. I’ll sit down and get it done in that hour.”  

Of course you need to be realistic about time frames….some things are going to naturally take longer than others.    

And what sort of results will be produced if we go this route? Brooke says, “When you decide how long something will take and you stick to that, that’s when your production gets huge momentum.”  

Now for my fellow perfectionists out there: this can be tough, because you’re going to have to embrace the fact that you might produce some B-minus work. I know that’s hard to stomach! Brooke had to give me a little life-coaching during the episode, because I am not someone who got Bs in school!

Brooke’s argument for producing B-minus work is this: “B-minus work can change people’s lives. Work that you don’t produce at all, does nothing in the world.”  

Brooke told a great story about producing B-minus work on a book she wrote, about how she got some negative feedback which caused her some real shame and embarrassment; but a letter she received from someone whose life was changed because of that B-minus book made her realize that had she declined to put out that work in favor of striving for an A-plus, that woman’s life would never have been affected. That was when Brooke decided that she was ok with B-minus work—because she knew it would still produce results.

You’ll have to decide for yourself as to what level work you are ok with; but for Brooke, making this decision made a HUGE difference in her business, and because of that decision, she has reached epic levels of success.

Reason #3: YOU’RE AVOIDING FAILURE AND DISCOMFORT

Of course, no one loves failure and discomfort; but the truth is, if we’re going to learn and grow, there are going to be moments of failure and times where we will need to step outside of our comfort zone.

Brooke explained that our brains are literally wired to avoid any kind of failure, and the only way to produce a successful business is to fail repeatedly. So what do we do?!

We have to show our brains that we are not going to die because of discomfort and failure. We need to learn the process to move into discomfort, and then get comfortable with that discomfort.

“Discomfort is the currency to your dreams.” - Brooke Castillo

But discomfort is only part of the road to success for business owners. I love that Brooke shared that she schedules “Comfort-Time” in her week! This time is non-negotiable, and she schedules it in her calendar before anything else. Her comfort-time is comprised of walking her dogs, enjoying coffee and reading in the morning, and spending time with family.  

What would be the activities or non-activities that you’d have in your comfort-time? Schedule it in!  And remember: this time is non-negotiable. Agreed? Work hard, play hard! : )

If you’re reading this and have not listened to the episode yet, I highly recommend you do. Brooke gives some great examples, insights, and encouragement that you’ll only hear by tuning in. Plus, Brooke is so fun! I guarantee you’ll not only learn a ton, but will enjoy a few laughs while listening to this episode, too!

Thanks for spending time with me today!

All my best,

Amy

Links to things I think you might be interested in that were mentioned in these show notes and on the podcast episode:


Jun 28, 2018
#216: Why Courses Flop, And How To Turn “Failure” Into Opportunity
27:57

 

I’m the first person to admit when I’ve made a mistake.

But I can promise you this, when it happens: I learn something new every time.

Inside my private Facebook group for all of my students, my students often ask me to troubleshoot their challenges with launching their courses. Our FB Live chats and their questions inspired me to create this specific podcast episode for all of you. Based on my experiences with thousands of students, I’ve uncovered five core reasons why most online courses fail. My goal is to help make sure you don’t make these mistakes, and if you do, I want you to be able to learn from them and turn them into opportunities.

In this episode I also talk about the importance of a validation blitz, and knowing all about your potential student’s hopes and fears, and what may be holding them back. I go into step-by-step detail about how to conduct a validation blitz in my Courses That Convert Program. You can learn more about that program and how to get started with an online course with my free Masterclass—“How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.” It’s a fun and comprehensive training that will help you get well on your way to creating your first training!

Also: if you've experienced any of these mistakes or if you've made a big mistake that I haven't mentioned here, I want you to come over to Instagram and DM me.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why your ideal customer avatar needs to be top of mind at all times. [3:48]
  • I changed my mind on pre-selling, and you need to also. [8:25]
  • The four things to do to make sure you get to the finish line with your course. [12:43]
  • What to consider instead of signature courses. [14:42]
  • How I had to enlist a colleague to keep me in check and keep out the fluff. [17:34]
  • The best online courses are taught by the best teachers. What you need to do to become an engaging teacher. [20:40]

Links mentioned in this episode:

Episode #206: “The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training”

 

 

Jun 21, 2018
#215: Creating Multiple Streams of Revenue in Your Business with Jennifer Allwood
41:34

As entrepreneurs, creating multiple streams of revenue should be our goal. After being laid off from a software development company in the year 2000, today’s guest, Jennifer Allwood,  discovered firsthand how using her creativity and passion could create not one, but six different revenue streams in her business.

One of the things I love most about being an entrepreneur is how we are able to use our passions and creativity to build a business that has many layers to it—and Jennifer has done just that!

So whether you are just starting out building your online business or are already doing amazing things but looking to up-level, you’re going to find lots of inspiration and actionable tips in this interview!

Never Say Never

Jennifer’s first foray into an online business revenue stream was through creating and selling a handful of short videos teaching people how to do fun DIY painting techniques on cabinets and furniture. After just a year, she had earned six figures...from simple painting videos!  

Jennifer was at first confounded to discover she could sell stuff that could be easily found online for free via YouTube videos; yet she also came to understand that people will pay for shortcuts, and they prefer to pay for something from someone they know, like and trust, rather than go searching for something on their own.

That was the beginning of her online business journey. In the years since, she has launched a couple membership sites, teaches others how to run their online businesses, is writing a book, and is enjoying engaging with her nearly half-million online social media followers.

Jennifer admits that even just five years ago she would never have dreamed she would be where she is today! Let this be a lesson to all of us!   

It’s Not About Working Harder: It’s Working Smarter That Makes The Difference

Jennifer works mostly with creatives: painters, artists, makers, DIYers, and repurposers. She says these type of entrepreneurs have a hard time getting past the idea that they don’t always have to trade time for dollars; yet Jennifer teaches them they can share their gifts in a new way by adding revenue streams to their business. The opportunities she identified (which can work for anyone with an online business) are:

  • Info products – ebooks, ecourses, webinars, etc.
  • Affiliate income
  • Sponsored content
  • Membership site
  • Ad revenue
  • Brand ambassadorship
  • Consulting
  • Speaking

Where to Start?

If you are just beginning your online journey, Jennifer suggests you begin with something on the simpler side. Test the waters first, to see what you enjoy doing and what works. She highlighted some great examples from the list above that I hope will inspire you with some new ideas!

What I loved about talking to Jennifer was seeing how strategic she was—even from the beginning, when she didn’t even realize she was being strategic!

If you tuned in and listened to today’s episode, I hope you were as inspired by Jennifer’s story as I was. She was following her passion. She was hustling. She was doing what she needed to do to make things work, and look how it came together for her! I hope the same for you!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Jun 14, 2018
#214: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Right Lead Magnet for Your Audience
31:31

Most of you already know I’m all about list building.

In fact, one of my favorite mottos is “always be list building.” But not everyone knows that an indispensable element of any successful list-building effort is an effective lead magnet—a freebie—that’ll stand front and center and draw crowds to opt-in.

But then the question becomes:

How do I know which type of lead magnet to create?

That’s why you can’t miss today’s episode! I’m sharing the ultimate guide to choosing the right lead magnet for your audience, covering the seven types of lead magnets I think are working best right now.

And what I’m sharing is not only from my experience. I’ve prepared a bunch of examples of lead magnets from some of my good friends and peers—all of them list building pros—and I’m also covering the pros and cons of each, to help you decide which lead magnets are right for you and your audience.

To make it even easier for you, I’ve prepared a freebie with every one of the examples of lead magnets I’m going to discuss in the episode, so you can hear about them, but also see what I’m talking about as clearly as possible.

This episode is brought to you by:

My free Masterclass, The Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan. If you are struggling to get started with list building or if you're not attracting new subscribers to your email list every single day, this is the free masterclass for you!

Check out these highlights:

  • Why it’s only worth it to look at your conversion rate numbers and not anyone else’s. [3:48]
  • The one lead magnet that’s sure to help your audience get to the finish line easily. [6:08]
  • The type of freebie that’ll get your audience saying, “I can’t believe this is free—I would’ve paid for this.” [10:55]
  • Is there a place for video or audio freebies? [13:33]
  • How about challenges? (You know you want to know how to make these lead magnets work—they’re fun!) [16:49]
  • The quick, easy (for audiences to process) and increasingly popular quiz. [20:17]
  • What kind of free courses you can do and how to get them to work as lead magnets. [24:41]
Jun 07, 2018
#213: 10 Things I'm Embarrassed to Tell You
32:31

My podcast space has always, with a couple exceptions, been a place where I share online marketing tips and strategies...100% my comfort zone! And don’t worry, that’s still my plan for the future episodes, but this year, I’ve made an intentional decision to step out of my comfort zone (or actually maybe a lot with today’s topic!) and let you in on some more behind-the-curtain type personal things. If you listened to episode 210, my 5 Lessons I Learned From Shonda Rhimes, just a few weeks ago, you’ll see where some of the inspiration for this week’s episode came from. For example, speaking my truth was something that I was really inspired to do based on what I learned from Shonda Rhimes, one of my favorite mentors.

Several years ago a well-known podcaster that I love, Jess Lively, shared an episode with her audience with this type of format (I think she called it Things I’m Afraid To Tell You) and the honest and raw truth from that post really hit a chord with her listeners, and I believe that even back then, it created a bit of an “online honesty” movement. She still does these episodes and they’re priceless.

In my opinion, there are far too many people in the online world that have created these “everything is awesome” online personas and it really casts a false light on what’s actually going on behind-the-scenes.

I, for one, don’t want to be looked at by those that follow me as this person that has it all figured out, doesn’t have bad days, doesn’t struggle in both my personal and business life (that’s so far from the truth, it’s laughable.) So, I titled this, “10 Things I’m Embarrassed To Tell You” - and I know I shouldn’t be embarrassed by this stuff, it’s just life stuff -- the real stuff, but when I look at social media, I feel embarrassed because it’s not my highlight reel. Although, as an entrepreneur, I believe that what’s personal is business, and what’s business is personal, and I see my business as my baby. This means the personal and business are bound to blend together, especially with a personal brand, and I wouldn’t be being honest and transparent if I were to just show the highlight reel.

I bet you’d be surprised at how much we have in common when it comes to the types of things that make us feel embarrassed, ashamed, or stupid, but we wouldn’t know it unless we talk about it, right?

Here we go:

1. Sometimes I wonder if Hobie and I made the right decision to not have kids together.

I got married when I was 31 and we thought we would have babies. At that time I had just started building my business and I was incredibly focused. We had a 4-year-old already - Cade (my step-son) was in our life daily - so it felt like I already had a little one. Time flew by, and we just never took the leap and about 3 years ago Hobie got a vasectomy. On the way home from the doctor, I cried -- a lot! But I was just crying because it felt final - I knew I didn’t want to have biological children...so it was just an emotional closing to that piece of our life. I THINK we made the right decision, but sometimes (once in a while) I wish we just took the leap 7 or 8 years ago and went for it. But then at the same moment, I think we made the right decision and that feels fine to me.

2. I work well under pressure so sometimes I let myself wait to the very last minute to finish something, because I know I’ll get it done, however, this causes tremendous stress for my team AND I am not so nice to Hobie in those moments and I hate myself for it.

So, for example, when I’m late getting my slides done for a webinar, and a huge launch is looming over my head, I am super snappy with Hobie. It’s like he can’t even look at me without me saying something that I would regret. It’s the tiny things that set me off because I am stressed and tired. Hobie is a complete champ about it, too, but it’s not fair to him. The reason I’m so embarrassed about this is because I teach people to get stuff done in advance! I’d say 80% of the time I walk the talk, but that other 20% can be NOT fun. Lately, I’ve really been working on not letting anything go until the last minute.

3. I worry about aging because of my online presence.

I hate talking about this one. I am 41 years old...and I see photos of myself when I first started my online business, and I look like a baby compared to now. It’s hard to get older on video...especially when all the old photos never go away online! I wish I subscribed to the “age gracefully” model of thinking, but I don’t. Maybe over time I will, but for now, I am going to fight the battle! So, I pay close attention to my skin: I’m obsessed with LED light and Multi-Wave technology to help stimulate collagen in your skin. Yeah, I do that! Don’t laugh, but it works! I never do this, but I’m going to post links to some of my favorite skincare products below. The ones that I use daily, that I swear by, and that I know are working for anti-aging. I take this stuff seriously! : )

4. I sometimes don't like to tell you that I use a copywriter.

If I do, I’m afraid you’ll feel that you’re not hearing from me directly and then you’ll not feel connected to me. The truth is that I work closely with my copywriters - I have two, Ry and Tarzan, and they’re both really good friends. We text each other a lot, we laugh a lot together, they just get me. They know how I talk, they know how I think, they know my little quirks, and that all comes out in the writing. They actually write like I would write to you if I was really talented in my writing skills. So, yes, I use a copywriter, but it’s still me -- they’re basically an extension of me.

5. I don't always love being the one in the relationship that makes the most money.

It’s too much pressure and creates a weird shift in the relationship. Hobie and I talked about this in episode 161 - Love and Business: How to Make it Work, and he said that he doesn’t like it either. I grew up in a household where the dad went to work and controlled the finances, while the mom stayed home and did the homemaking type stuff...I thought that was how marriage worked. Since my marriage is very different than that model, some of those old beliefs creep in at times and mess with my head.

Also, I sometimes wish Hobie made more money so that if I wanted to take a break, I would have the option to. It’s silly, I know...I really want to make the money and doubt I’d ever actually want to take a big break, but I don’t want to HAVE TO make the money.

6. I’m a fierce competitor and want to be at the top of the charts with my podcast and the #1 affiliate in launches that I do.

I want to win and I really push myself and my team to be on top. The downside of this is that I find myself comparing myself to others that are also in the so-called race and that’s not a good thing to do -- it slows me down and messes up my mental game. Lately, I’ve been asking myself “why?” - why do I want to be at the top? And if I’m honest, it’s my ego more than anything - and that ain't good. So, I’m really examining this area of my mindset and am remembering what I learned from Oprah in the “Making Oprah” podcast: Put blinders on and RUN YOUR OWN RACE!

7. Ok, this next one is super personal …. Growing up I was always afraid of my dad.

He was strict and stern and expected more out of me than I thought was fair. I love him dearly, but he was hard on me. My childhood experiences put some distance between us as I got older. I still have hard feeling about some of my childhood experiences with my dad and I’ve even gone through an EMDR intensive to move past it. (If you don’t know what EMDR therapy is, I’ve linked to it below - it’s incredible and I loved the doctor I did it with, Dr. Mcayla, who I also link to below.)

But beyond my dad and me - here’s the current day truth: Sometimes I see myself being too hard on Cade and I have to pull back because I never want distance between us and I don’t want to make him feel the way I did with my dad.

8. I am embarrassed about my weight and I don’t like to do video because of it.

I talked all about this a few months ago in a 9-minute podcast episode, #179. If you’ve not heard that one, and you like this type of episode, I think you should listen to that one next. I’m bringing up the weight issue here because ever since I did that podcast episode, the feedback from listeners has been amazing. It spoke to so many of you, both men and women, and I’m glad I put aside my embarrassment of talking about it and was honest with you. As for my weight loss journey, things are going well -- slow and steady. I’m making great progress and feeling good and when I have some solid success, I will share the details with you.

9. When I have a big success (like a million dollar launch) I have this weird tinge of guilt thinking I don't totally deserve it - or I struggle with thoughts that it will all go away.

I know it’s about not feeling like I am enough, and let me tell you, it used to be a whole lot worse, but I’m really working on this one because I hate feeling that way. Recently we had an amazingly successful B-School launch and that weird guilt feeling came up for me, but I was able to kill the flame quickly by reminding myself I did deserve it and I am worthy of success. Progress, not perfection, right?!

10. I struggle with letting go, even though I have an awesome team.

I still review every single email before it goes out and I know I need to, and can trust my team, to let go. As I talked about in episode 208, I have an awesome team, and I want them to feel empowered -- they deserve to move things forward without my eye on everything. And if mistakes are made, I need to give grace, because I know that’s how we learn and grow. But man, it’s hard to let go! Especially when everything is in your voice - I am the brand - so I think I hold on a little tighter due to that! But I am working on this one -- baby steps!

So there you have it...a bit of me baring my soul.
The point of this week’s episode was, as I said, for me to be honest about parts of my personal and business life that you might not know about me yet - I really want you to know me. So when you see me out and about in real life, or better yet, come to one of my events in San Diego, you don’t just know the shiny, social media approved side of me. I want you to know all of me - and know that I am just like you in so many ways. That’s when true connections happen… I also really hope that maybe something I said will help you to not feel so alone in what you’re going through, or maybe even encourage you to be more honest and real with your own online community.

And can I just say, Thank you! Thank you for allowing me to feel safe enough to share these types of things here today. I truly love my community -- you all are such a source of encouragement to me!

Have a great day!

May 31, 2018
#212: How to Hit $1M with a List Under 20K with Rick Mulready
58:06

 

Today I’m bringing back one of my favorites, Facebook ads guru, Rick Mulready.

The difference is today I’ve got him nervous—because he’s here to share with you what he’s NEVER shared before…he’s taking you behind the scenes and letting you in on his process of how he got to a million dollars in just one year (!). He’s also talking about how he reached that number with a decent (but not monster-sized) list of 17,000 (which once upon a time was 30,000).

You know I love to talk tips, tricks, and strategies, but I also think it’s important to look at how you are thinking, how you are feeling, what motivates you to make certain decisions and how they actually work for you… which is what Rick is sharing today.

Tips and tricks will only get you so far unless you learn to get your head on straight around everything you’re working on in your business. And Rick is ready to get raw and honest and show you the shifts he made during 2017 and the results these changes had on his life and business. Let’s get all of the scoop.

Check out these highlights:

  • Random moment of the episode: my new sauna (I didn’t bring this up myself, but it’s a fun tidbit to hear). [4:40]
  • The offers Rick made in 2017 to get to a million bucks. [8:20]
  • The issue of quantity vs. quality for your business model. [10:46]
  • How Rick changed the way he was thinking about his own email list size. [13:38]
  • Shifting your mindset from a lack to abundance as it relates to your team. [27:55]
  • Let’s get honest: Are you not growing your team because you’re scared to spend money? [32:29]
  • At some point, you might not make it without a team… [37:55]
  • Rick’s awesome email list re-engagement campaign. [42:07]

Random moment of the episode: my new sauna (I didn’t bring this up myself, but it’s a fun tidbit to hear). [4:40]
The offers Rick made in 2017 to get to a million bucks. [8:20]
The issue of quantity vs. quality for your business model. [10:46]
How Rick changed the way he was thinking about his own email list size. [13:38]
Shifting your mindset from a lack to abundance as it relates to your team. [27:55]
Let’s get honest: Are you not growing your team because you’re scared to spend money? [32:29]
At some point, you might not make it without a team… [37:55]
Rick’s awesome email list re-engagement campaign. [42:07]

May 24, 2018
#211: 5 Things I Said "Yes" To In The Early Years (But Say "No" to Now)
26:46

Today I’m taking a trip down memory lane to my early days—

the first few years when nothing seemed to go as planned and everything that came my way felt like a BIG deal…I’m getting personal and raw and sharing with you what my business looked like when I first started out, the decisions I made to get where I am, and the most significant challenges along the way. (You asked, and I answered!)
More specifically, I’m sharing those things I said “yes” to in the early days—the yeses that got me where I am today, in a multimillion-dollar business with an incredible and engaged audience.

Wherever you are in your own business, you need to know:

The business you have today will look dramatically different a few years from now… but it is the choices you make today—the things you say yes or no to—that will lead you towards where you’ll be tomorrow. And then tomorrow you’ll be able to make different choices, but because you and your business will be in a different place. So here’s a little help to get you to (hopefully) make better decisions...

This episode is brought to you by:
My free Masterclass—“How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.” If you’re thinking about creating your online course or have been for a while and don’t know how to get started, this free masterclass is for you!

Check out these highlights:

  • The most important question I ask myself every time my business hits a milestone or pivots in some way or another. [2:53]
  • Speaking opportunities—yay or nay? [4:55]
  • The time for sacrifices. [7:06]
  • Trading knowledge and experience. [8:49]
  • What to say to coffee chat invites. [11:58]
  • And how they’re completely different than “Can I Pick Your Brain” invites. [13:13]
  • The right way to collaborate with other people. [17:33]
  • And the right way to have other people collaborate with you! [20:14]
May 16, 2018
#210: 5 Lessons I Learned From Shonda Rhimes
44:08

Shonda Rhimes, the creative powerhouse behind Grey's Anatomy, Scandal, and How to Get Away with Murder, wrote a book a few years ago called Year of Yes that really resonated with me. I’m sharing five takeaway lessons that have impacted my personal and business life in a pretty major way.

First, let me set the scene for you as to why Shonda even wrote this book. Shonda and her sister were in the kitchen getting ready for Thanksgiving dinner way back in 2013, and Shonda was telling her sister about some parties, talk shows, and conferences that she'd been recently invited to, you know, the Hollywood type stuff. She was talking about how she was too busy to do any of it, and without blinking an eye, her sister said something to her that day that became the wake-up call that Shonda needed to transform her “busy life”, and those words were:

Her sister knew that Shonda was hiding behind being too busy to avoid doing things that scared her and would take her out of her comfort zone. Her sister also knew that Shonda had ZERO balance in her life and she was actually miserable. Now, would the outside world have known that she was miserable? No. However, Shonda knew that her sister was telling the truth. She’d been called out and it was the truth.

This brought on an epiphany that something major had to change in her life. She wrote in her book: "This could not possibly be what having it all was supposed to feel like, could it? Because if it was, if this is what I spent all this time and energy working so hard for, if this is what the promised land looked like, what was success ... was what success felt like, was what I sacrificed for ... " And then she trailed off, telling the reader she didn't even wanna go there.

This was her aha moment! And the reason I bring it up here is because I think many of us are working our tails off, hustling to the core, and if we're not careful, we're gonna work ourselves into the ground, and then one day we're gonna pop up and say, "Wait. Was this what I was working so hard for, to feel burned out and overworked and tired?” We’ve got to be really mindful of this. I know we're creating businesses we absolutely love, but just don’t work yourself into the ground, okay?

Before we get into the lessons, I want to ask you two questions:

  • 1. Are you at a place in your life where you’re wondering if all the hard work you’re putting into growing your business is even worth it? Now, hard work is one thing, but being miserable is another. Who wants to bust their butt only to be miserable??
  • 2. Are you ready to make some changes in your life so that you can embrace things that scare you or take you outside your comfort zone? You know, those things that deep down you know would probably make you a happier or more successful person.

With your answer to those questions in mind, let’s dig into the five lessons I learned from Shonda’s book, Year of Yes.

Lesson 1:

In Shonda’s book, she told a story about when she gave a commencement speech a few years ago at her alma mater, Dartmouth. (I’ve included the video for you here, but save that for later when you’re in your pjs and can settle in for 25 minutes.) In her speech she was encouraging the graduating class to be DOers, NOT dreamers. She would say things to them like, “You want to be a writer? Guess what? A writer writes everyday. Start writing.” “You want to travel? Sell your crappy car and buy a ticket and go to Bangkok.”

https://youtu.be/EuHQ6TH60_I

I love this! It’s not that she’s bashing on having dreams, it’s good to dream and have big goals, but if you keep your head up in the clouds, you're going to get nowhere.

Shonda talked about dreaming of being author and Pulitzer Prize winner, Toni Morrison. She said she did a whole lot of dreaming...from her parents’ couch! She then realized, “Wait a minute! Toni Morrison already had that job and she wasn’t interested in giving it up!”

Can you relate?

Have you ever dreamed of being so and so, or having so and so's business? You look at someone else's business online and you think, "I want to be them. I wanna have what they have." It reminds me of that quote, "Be yourself. Everyone else is already taken." Words to live by, right? You've gotta do you!

Now, I've always pretty much been a person that digs in and gets stuff done. I'm definitely a doer. But this lesson about doing instead of just dreaming does keep me motivated and on track in my business. Every single day I take action toward my goals. And if at any time I feel like my head is in the clouds, I've gotta pull it back down and say, "Okay, where's the plan?" And to get really specific, I’d ask myself: Where are the action items for my plan inside Asana?”, the project management tool I use. If I don’t put it in Asana, then I'm just dreaming it.

Where are your action items written down? Your notebook? Your project management tool? Just make sure to get it written down.

Speaking of being actionable and writing stuff down, I’ve got an awesome freebie for you today. There’s an exercise in there that's going to help you take some of these ideas in your head, get them on paper and make them more actionable so that you do more and dream a little bit less.

Lesson 2:

For the record, I'm not going to tell you to find more balance in your life...I feel like that's a cliché. Way easier said than done! But Shonda explains this in a very practical way. In her book, she talks a lot about finding a good personal and professional balance. And when she's talking about it, she not only had a super important big job, but she also had three little ones, and I mean little, at home. I've only got one teenage son, a dog, and a husband, and sometimes I don't even know how I get through it all!

Achieving a perfect balance between work, social, and family is impossible. We all know that right? So perfect should never be your goal. In her book, Shonda dropped a nice little truth bomb when she said, "Whenever you see me somewhere succeeding in one area of my life, that almost certainly means that I am failing in another area of my life." The reason I love this woman so much is because she tells the truth!

What Does Real Life Balance Look Like?

If you’re a Grey's Anatomy fan, then you will never forget Sandra Oh's last scene. It was epic! (Sandra Oh is Christina in Grey's Anatomy.) Anyway, watching that last scene LIVE was of huge importance to Shonda because, for 10 years, she had put her heart and soul into that character, to develop her and to make her the person that she was. So, it was the last hurrah -- this would be Christina’s last scene before going off the show.

SPOILER ALERT: Shonda wasn't there to witness the last scene!

Why? Because guess what else was important at the time? Her kid's school musical that was going on at the same time. She chose her daughter's school musical that day over something incredibly important at work. Now, this is what real life balance looks like. There's not going to be a perfectly easy solution every single time.

She also admitted that if she was working late on a script for one of her shows like Scandal, she'd probably end up missing bath and story time at home, which if you’re a parent, you know that is an important time. So you see, Shonda doesn't always give up the work stuff for the family stuff, she flip-flops back and forth. She found her own sense of balance, and obviously, the choices were not always easy.

As entrepreneurs, we are no doubt living full lives. And to achieve some sort of balance, there's gotta be some give and take. Yes, there will be hard decisions to make, but it's up to us to make daily choices through a balance type of lens that each of us is going to have to individually define. Your balance only needs to make sense in your world. Even if that looks or feels something like you hopping from one foot to the other to maintain that sense of balance, that's okay.

People always ask me how I keep everything in balance and I got a lot of those types of questions when I recently recorded the 20 questions episode with my husband, Hobie. Well, the truth is, I don't do it very well. My goal is to have that balance, but then I also know it's never going to be perfect, and I need to be okay with that. I have to remind myself that I am the only one that defines my balance. I talk about a couple of examples of this with my son and my husband in today’s episode.

Let’s agree that even though we may be a work in progress, we are making progress in this area. I’ve got a good exercise for you in the freebie I mentioned earlier in regards to defining your own balance. I think you’ll find it an empowering exercise!

Lesson 3:

I could've lumped this lesson into the whole lesson about balance, but I'm not going to, because without clearly defining boundaries for yourself, or sometimes for others in your life, you're going to have a hard time creating any sort of balance that truly benefits you. Think of it this way: boundaries are the framework for your very own definition of balance. Boundaries are just the rules or guidelines to what you will or won't do, and what you will or won't allow.

In Shonda’s book, she talks about some of the most important boundaries she put in place during her “year of yes” and I think these may be some of the very boundaries that you, my dear reader, might need to put into place too. I know I’ve had to!

  • No checking or sending emails after 7:00 p.m. Period. Notice she doesn't say 5:00? She's reasonable. She's an entrepreneur.
  • No working on Saturday or Sunday unless there was some sort of emergency or filming where she really needed to be there.
  • Home by 6:00 p.m. for dinner, so she could eat with her kids.
  • She decided that “no” would be a complete sentence. She wasn't going to feel like she had to give excuses for saying no to stuff.
    ****Oh, my goodness, I am notorious for this one! If I say no, then I feel guilty because I'm a people pleaser. This is definitely a boundary I’m working on getting better at.
  • No hot glue gun or no home-baked cookies.

There's a great part in the book about Shonda attending some school meeting, and a room-mom was telling everyone to bring cookies to some event, and that they had to be homemade. Well, Shonda about lost her mind when that came up. She actually blurted out a profanity in voicing her disbelief. Can you imagine? I would kind of die! No one was going to tell her that she couldn't bring Costco cookies. Let's be honest...we all know that Costco cookies are kind of amazing!

Notice that she wasn't saying that she wouldn't bring cookies to the school event. She just wasn't going to stay up late into the night baking. That didn't work for her. And the other scenario of going to buy the cookies, showing up and being there for her kid, that worked.

Believe it or not, when I read some of the boundaries that Shonda had put into place, I actually felt a sense of permission to do the same in my life. Besides working on “no” being a complete sentence, I’ve also decided to try and take Fridays off and not work on the weekends. Some weeks are better than others, but I would say I get it right about 60% of the time. It helps that my team knows this is my intention, too, so they don’t schedule anything for me on Fridays. My task management tool, Asana, that I mentioned earlier, and my Google calendar are real lifesavers in the areas of boundaries, too, because I schedule work and personal and if it’s not in there, I’m not doing it.
I hope that reading some of Shonda’s and my boundaries will help you to feel a sense of permission, or give you some good ideas, too.
Again, my freebie today has a good exercise for you to complete on setting healthy boundaries, as well as taking down those boundaries you may have in place, but that are not serving you well.

Lesson 4:

I know! This totally sounds like an oxymoron, doesn’t it!?

Hold on now, just listen to this nugget of wisdom that Shonda shares about having difficult conversations: “No matter how hard a conversation is, I know that on the other side of that difficult conversation lies peace. Knowledge. An answer delivered. Character is revealed. Truces are formed. Misunderstandings are resolved. Freedom lies across the field of the difficult conversation. And the more difficult the conversation, the greater the freedom.”

Ahhhh….Peace, knowledge, answers, freedom. Can I get an AMEN on having a little more of these in our lives!!

You may be thinking, “Sounds good, Amy, but I hate having difficult conversations and I’d just rather avoid them at all costs!” Believe me, I don’t love having them either! AND, I actually think that as women we struggle with them more than men. Ladies, can we just resolve to fix that?!
The main reason I don’t like to have difficult conversations is that I NEVER, EVER want to hurt someone’s feelings. Yep, I’m a people-pleaser, but I know that’s not healthy, so I’m a bit of a work-in-progress over here! : )

One thing I’ve found is that if I can sort of have a loose “canned plan” in place in the event I end up getting into a difficult conversation. In her book, Shonda gives some really great examples of these type of statements that we can equip ourselves with. These are ones that you’d use these when it looks like you need to just draw the line and shut the conversation down, instead of rambling or giving in. So, you might say:

  • “That doesn’t work for me.”
  • “I’m done.”
  • “This isn’t worth it.”
  • “You aren’t worth it.” (Now, this one may just be something you say in your head to give yourself permission to end the conversation.)
  • “No.” (Remember, Shonda says we can use this as a complete sentence!)

It might take some practice, but you’d be surprised at how empowering it can be to break out one of these statements at just the right time!

And, guess what? There’s a silver lining here! The more we engage in difficult conversations, the easier they get.

Lesson 5:

I really struggle with this one! I tell a story in today’s podcast about that struggle. What I love about Shonda is she decided to start taking the compliments that she was getting, like a boss. In her book, she wrote:

"I'm going to say yes to accepting any and all acknowledgments of personal fabulous awesomeness with a clear, calm, 'Thank you,' and a confident smile, and nothing more."

Fabulous awesomeness. I love how she says that. But for myself, I can't even imagine if someone were to give me a compliment and just saying, "Thank you," with a smile. That feels very awkward to me, but in an effort to take a compliment like a boss, I’m going to try and do it going forward, too.

How about you? You on board with me?

Lessons Recapped:

Lesson 1: Don't just dream it, Do it!
Lesson 2: Find your own balance.
Lesson 3: Create boundaries that help you thrive.
Lesson 4: It's good to have difficult conversations.
Lesson 5: Learn to take a compliment like a boss.

So, there you have it! I hope these five lessons I learned from my mentor, Shonda Rhimes, have given you a new perspective on how to live a more fulfilling life and to run your business from a place of empowerment and truth.

Don’t forget to download the freebie I created for you. It’s a worksheet that is going to walk you step-by-step through some exercises that go along with the lessons I talked about today. It's a bit of a journaling type of exercise, but believe me, it will make everything you learned more actionable.

This episode is brought to you by:
Master Class: How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days
www.Amyporterfield.com/courses

 

May 09, 2018
#209: The Surprising Journey of Launching a Physical Product with Lara Casey
49:38

Have you ever thought about creating a physical product to sell online, maybe even adding one to your digital line up?

And if you have, have you found yourself overwhelmed with not really knowing where to start in order to bring that product from merely an idea to something your customers can physically hold in your hands?

As most of you know, my business consists of all digital products and I would say 90% of my audience is the same, but I still get questions, pretty frequently, asking me about creating physical products to include in their existing online business. Maybe you’re at a point where you’d like to add a physical product. Questions like: How do I know if I’m ready to add a physical product to my digital mix? Where would I even go to get started? What kind of physical product could I add to the mix?

Since I get a lot of questions around this topic, but I’m not the expert, I thought, “Let’s bring on someone who is.” My guest today, Lara Casey - founder of CultivateWhatMatters.com, has authored two books, Cultivate, and Make it Happen, and has had huge success in launching and selling physical products online. If you’ve ever heard of the famous PowerSheets, she’s the creator!

Lara is going to talk to us about how she knew it was time to launch a physical product; how she figured out and managed all the details around designing, producing, and fulfilling a physical product. And to keep it real, she shares the ups and downs as she created her product along the way.

When I asked Lara to tell my podcast listeners a little bit about herself, this is what she said: “We’re all about planting seeds and helping women to Cultivate What Matters and giving them the tools they need to plant seeds of growing intentional relationships or cultivating their faith...whatever it may be, specific to them.”

Planting seeds...cultivating...intentional… I love this!

Lara continued, “I’m a mom to three, a grateful wife, and I’m really passionate about helping an instant-results culture embrace the power of little by little progress, instead of perfection.”

Now, let’s dig into the interview!

QUICK SIDE NOTE to those who are coming here from my podcast for the show notes, I'd love to know if you like this longer, more detailed version of show notes? While not everything from the podcast is included here, it's a pretty thorough representation. Please let me know yay or nay and why in the comments below. 

Amy: What are PowerSheets?

Lara: The PowerSheets are our goal planner, and they help you to uncover what matters the most to you, make an action plan and then TEND to that, little by little and take action.

Amy: It’s beautiful! It looks like a planner. Would you call it a planner?

Lara: We get asked that all the time and this is really your day planner’s best friend. We call it a planner because it fits into the marketing realm of being that same type of vein, but it’s more of an action book. We want people to not just plan but start planting things in their lives and to make a mess in this (the PowerSheets).

Amy: What your very first product and why did you decide to create it?

IN THE BEGINNING

Lara: About 12 years ago, my husband Ari was deployed to Iraq, with the Marines. And as you can imagine, at the height of any time of war or turmoil, it can leave you feeling very anxious. And so, this first product, which was Southern Weddings magazine came out of that pain that I was experiencing at the time. As my husband was deployed to Iraq, I sat on my laptop computer alone one night and just thought, "I just really have a deep desire to create beauty in this world that feels so broken," and that sounded like a really grand thing at the time, but it was my real desire.

And so, I got on my computer, and I started mocking up a wedding magazine cover, and I didn't have any formal training or background in this. I had an interest in weddings and started to get my feet wet into wedding planning at the time. I think I bought an ebook that was something like Wedding Planning 101. It was $0.99 at the time.

What it was really about was that I was fascinated with stories of transformation and how even in the gift of a wedding celebration, you could transport people from feeling despair and hopelessness to a place of hope, to a place of thinking about the future.

So, I mocked up this little wedding magazine cover, and I had no idea where it would go from there... I just knew I had to create it. I had this restlessness that I'm sure a lot of your listeners may feel at times. I put it out there to the world, and I thought, "You know what? This is something new and different."

I started a blog at the time. If you would have said the word blog to someone, they probably would have thought about the movie The Blob and had no idea what you were talking about.

Amy: Like the wild, wild West online, when blogs weren't even popular!

Lara: I started a blog to talk about creating meaningful beginnings to married life and started sharing the idea about this wedding magazine. Long story short, it really took off. People were excited about something new and different in the South, not just talking about roasted chicken and tulle at a wedding, but a story and how that story could transform guests' lives.

This is how the first physical product came to be. I used my whole life savings and created a physical print version of Southern Weddings magazine. I, again, had no experience in this. I have a degree in music theater, no background in journalism. I just had this desire to do it, and I figured I'm just going to figure it out. I created the first edition on Microsoft Publisher.

WHY A PHYSICAL PRODUCT?

Lara: There is something to the tangible. I still feel the exact same way today, that I felt 12 years ago -- there's something to holding a product in your hand that has the ability to change someone's life, potentially more than a digital product that maybe they see once and forget about. This physical product is something people could pass on. They could pass it to their sisters, their moms, their best friends...it really started a revolution in the wedding industry. This is back when the only publications that were out there were really big corporate publishing houses. And then, there was me and my cat in the apartment. : )

Amy: What year was this?

Lara: This was 2008. If you fast-forward five years from then, I had a major life change happen. Our marriage was really rocky within that time period, five years later, our marriage started to come back together, and that led to our fifth-anniversary issue of Southern Weddings, being about love never fails. And so, the first shop product that we sold in more of an e-commerce platform ... it was Big Cartel at the time ... was a print that said, "Love never fails." In each of these things we've created have really been born out of a pain point, out of some challenge that I experienced in my life.

But the print was more about how could we get meaningful messaging into people's hands. It was more about the profit of people, not about dollar signs. It eventually became dollar signs, but it started with the heart of, "If we could just get this messaging literally into people's fingertips, we believe that it would have a domino effect and a ripple effect."

CREATING A SOLUTION TO A PAIN POINT

Lara: It was right around that time that our business started to boom. as the heartbeat of Southern Weddings started to really beat with the message of, "Love never fails," people really started to grasp onto it, and I became really overwhelmed with so much work, and I just had my first baby. Our marriage was coming back together, so I was trying to balance and prioritize that. I know you've had so much of that in your story too, Amy. It was like, "How do you do it all?"

And what I realized, the obvious is I can't do it all and do it well, but I can choose to cultivate what matters. And so, right around that time, I sat down at my desk one day, and I thought, "Man, I have all these things," like my facebook page, my Twitter account at the time (I don't even think that Instagram was a thing), "How am I going to tend to all these things and make them grow?" I would come to the end of a year and just get so frustrated looking back and thinking, "I could have made progress on these things if I would have tended to them little by little." So I got really frustrated, and said, "I need to fix this," and I made myself what I called a tending list.

It was just a list of all the priorities, these seeds that I wanted to grow in my life and in my business. Things that I just knew, if I just touched on them a little bit at a time, it would add up. So I created a set of worksheets to help me make progress on the things that mattered, tending to them little by little. It's just like you teach, Amy, about it being focused on action by action.

MAKING PROGRESS

Lara: And that's when my life started to change. I started to make progress on the things that mattered. People started to see me making progress, amidst a lot of mistakes, and I got an email from a publisher who had read a series that I posted on my blog at the time about goal setting and about how I was doing this differently. The publisher emailed me, and that's how I got my first book contract for Make It Happen, and then my most recent one is Cultivate. At the same time, others began to ask me to create this set of worksheets for them too, and it really took off.

Amy: I love these stories, where you create something for yourself and then others want it, and it grows into a business. I mean, how organic can you get, right?

Lara: Yes! We have an unofficial, yet, official office motto that is: If you're not excited about it, nobody's going to be excited about it. So, for us, we have to create the things that we use in our everyday lives, the things that we need, and we just have to trust if we've done our research, and  looked at what the market needs, and listened enough, then other people are probably going to be affected by it too, if we are.

Amy: If you created these worksheets for yourself, did you just put them out there and that's how you knew others wanted them? Did you sell them and then hope that others wanted them? How did that happen?

Lara: It was a lot of both. It was a lot like throwing things to the wind. There weren't any shops around at the time, my friend Lindsay Letters had a shop with a couple prints in it, but there was no one that was really modeling this at the time. So, we were just testing the waters. At the time, I was doing coaching for branding clients, and I tested the PowerSheets out with them in little spurts. We would test it. The content, I tested with the Making Things Happen Conference, which we were doing twice a year (and still do twice a year now).

It was being tested, but it wasn't like a full-fledged test in an e-commerce platform. We just really at the time had to take the risk and put it out there.

Amy: You were creating a solution to your pain point, to begin with, and then your first customers were people in your local community and people who knew you through Southern Weddings and the Make Things Happen Conference who had that same need, and your product was their answer. Perfect!

Tell us what happened from there, as far as you knowing that this was actually going to be a business and not just a one-off order for some friends. For example, did you have a certain amount of workbooks? These worksheets really became a workbook, right?

Lara: Yes, you got it.

Amy: So did you have a certain amount of workbooks that you wanted to pre-sell before you'd produce the product? Or did you place an order that you could afford at the time and then sold online at stores or events? Give us all the details.

MAKING THINGS HAPPEN!

Lara: I designed the first round, which was a loose-leaf set of worksheets. We printed them at a local printer, which is something that I think is very important for anybody that's starting out because you get the joy and the asset of having a relationship with someone who's going to hopefully walk you through that process. We did not speak the printer paper product language at first, and I still feel like we're learning that. We didn't know anything about paperweights or bleed on paper or even what was possible.

I think it's really important to try a local printer first, even if you think you're going to get a better cost somewhere else, just so you can get that education.

We did a very small batch at first, and I think it was like 500 sets of PowerSheets, and that felt like a huge amount for us, at first. I feel very strongly about the power of one, so I thought, "If we could get even these 500 sets of PowerSheets into people's hands,” -- I started to imagine the ripple effect. I hope that's encouragement for anybody that's starting out. Don't compare your numbers to somebody else. Do what you think is best for you right now and just think about the ripple effect.

Amy: What were some of your biggest fears at this point, when you started to put it out there?

Lara: So many things. The thought of just somebody buying something from us was scary. The thought of, do we know even how to do transactions, or what if someone is unhappy with the product? What if this product doesn't create results for other people like it has for us and the people we've tested it with? What do you do about customer service? How do you print labels? I think the biggest thing is that there was so much unknown. The only way that we were going to figure out how to do it well was to do it and to get as much good advice as we could. But at the time, there weren't any resources for shop owners like there are now.

Amy: I love that you put this out there because a lot of my students want the whole roadmap in front of them, and they know I'm a step-by-step girl. So they'll say, "Amy, just give us exactly what we need to do." But if you look back at people that have had major success, they just put it out there, and when an issue comes up, they figure it out, and then there's their process moving forward.

Lara: I think you're right. I think that if I would have had a "plan" to start out with, we would have changed so much about it. Especially with e-commerce or selling a physical product in a retail shop, whatever it is, there's so much testing that happens, and asking yourself, "Is this right for us? Can we make this better? How can we put our unique stamp on this?" So I feel like it's actually an advantage to not know the entire roadmap ahead because you get the freedom to change for the better.

Amy: That's so powerful. Now, in these early days, when you did your first print run, and you've got your loose-leaf pages out there, you didn't do a pre-order, you actually put the money down, and you ordered 500. Did you sell those online or in person or both?

Lara: We sold them online, for the mere fact that we work out of my house. It's a small operation, and that also brought a lot of challenges with it, too. One of the biggest bumps in the road that we've had with production was having a lot of manual labor to do ourselves to package the products. This is not something that our printer at the time could do. We were collating the products by hand, packaging them by hand, stickering them, figuring out how to use the label printer, which we actually did at first. We are grassroots. I remember going to the post office with hundreds of boxes and the post people looking at us like, "Are you kidding me?"

Amy: This is how it's done! I love how you built this, because it is completely grassroots, just starting from something really small and doing all the labor yourself. You really had to just get in there and figure stuff out. Thank goodness the product you created was one to help you keep organized because it sounds like there were a lot of moving pieces!

So many people get to a place of overwhelm in the process of creating their product, whether it be physical or digital, and they just get stuck and make zero progress. It sounds like this wasn't the case for you. You just kept moving step by step even when you didn't have all the answers. Such a big learning moment.

So, you've got your first product out there and it was validated through continued customer demand and sales. How long did you stick with that business model? And when was the next major turning point in your business?

TAKING RISKS AND MAKING PIVOTS

Lara: I love this question because it takes me right back to the point of taking big risks.
One was, at first, our shop was called the Lara Casey shop, and that was just because it was my name at the time that was the heart of the teaching. I was the one creating all the content and all the messaging. But, over the course of several years, we realized that we/I did not want to just tell my story. It was not about me. This product was about other people's stories, and those stories had so much power to them.

So one of the biggest pivotal moments for us was stepping back and making the scary decision to completely change the name of our shop. The crazy part was that things were going really well. Sales were good. Things kept trucking along. We'd had a growth rate of almost 150% every year.

At the same time, this is where you really start to get to, and I don't want to call it magic, but like, the real heartbeat of where I think success comes from is doing things from your core, from your why, and always being willing to take risks for that. So for us, we had this conversation I'll never forget it. We stopped one day, and we said, "You know what? This name is not working. This is not about me anymore. How can we have a name that allows us to give other people the reins and to make it about them?" And so, we went around and around with a lot of different ideas and just kept coming back to why we do what we do, which is to help women cultivate what matters.

We changed the name of our shop from the Lara Casey shop to Cultivate What Matters, and that turning point was like a huge flood for us, because it wasn't about selling a product; it was about teaching people a different way of living and about changing the way that they think, and that's when things started to really click.

It's easy to be complacent. It's easy just to look at numbers. But again, when you're looking at the profit of people, -- like how can we actually affect people's lives in a more profound way -- you're working with a whole different set of rules, and it makes the risks worth it.

Amy: At this point, demand increased even more, right?

Lara: Yes.

Amy: What did that look like? Did you add more products? Did you move from local? Give us all the details.

Lara: One Thanksgiving I was sitting with my family on shipping boxes for Thanksgiving dinner, because my living room was full of boxes, and that was the breaking point. That's when I said, "You know what? I think we have grown to the point where something needs to change."

One change we made was taking the fulfillment away from our hands and putting it into a local warehouse, and that was a scary move because, through Southern Weddings, we have always held to the fact that there's magic in a handwritten note. I would write handwritten notes with all of the first PowerSheets orders. I mean, it would take me days, writing hundreds of notes because of that "power of one".

But, in order to grow with your business, to affect more people's lives, sometimes, you have to let go of some things and choose more meaningful things that you can do on a larger scale. One thing that was really important to us was to have a local warehouse, where we could still have a touchpoint. We could still deliver handwritten notes and I could get my dining room back! : )

As far as production goes, we outgrew our local printer, and the strain of the manual labor really became unsustainable for us. And having so many amazing, sweet friends come to my house to collate PowerSheets on my back porch all the time, it just started to NOT add up. So, we started to look at different options. To give you a little bit of background, we are a debt-free company, which I’m very grateful for and it's something we worked very hard for. So we didn’t take out any loans for this growth. We have embraced this principle not just in our business, but in our lives and what we teach, that it's okay to grow slow.

We have many times had to deal with sellouts, which sounds like a wonderful problem to have -- it's a blessing for sure when a product sells out, but for us, it was by necessity. We only ordered as much as we could. And in being a debt-free company, and in believing that growing slow was really important to us, it took a long time to figure out a better option for production. We wanted to be really intentional about that.

So, fast-forward, during that bump, we started working with a company called Codra. Codra is essentially like a middleman between us — the designer and the shop — and international and US production. We found them through my book publisher, Thomas Nelson, who produce a lot of Bibles and book content like that. I'm telling you this because more than looking for the right price point, and more than looking for the best deal, it's about looking for the right relationship. Because if you're really in this for the long haul, and if you really want it to be a product that is sustainable for the long term, then that relationship behind it has to be, too. All that to say that the team at Codra are our best advocates, and they have found us international partners and even domestic partners - production manufacturers - that have really strong integrity.

This was so, so important to us that the integrity of our product started even at production and went all the way through our customer delight, all the way down to the way we package things, that there was no stone left unturned. So, that was the biggest bump for us, was making that leap of faith to go with an outside production house.

Amy: So now they're being printed in China, but you have a middleman, so you don't have to go over to China and watch them and make sure everything's working properly and all that stuff?

Lara: That's correct. We love them so much because they take such care to make sure that our manufacturing partners are also really taken care of. They are the ones that travel there all the time, and they are there working with multiple clients at a time. It's neat to know that they have such integrity with those relationships, and they're passing that onto us.

Amy: Did you have to get a business loan to move on to this next big step in terms of moving from local to international printing?

MARKETING MATTERS

Lara: No, and I'm really grateful for that. We just grew at the pace that we knew we could sustain, but this is where we had to get really smart. When you reach a certain point, I mean, really at any point in your marketing, as you know more than anybody else, Amy, you've got to get smart about your marketing. You have to have the right data, and that's when it was about four years into our process (we've had PowerSheets for almost seven years now) when we started to really look at the data, and we started to look at our analytics and started to grow our email list and work on these things that we felt like were great benchmarks to knowing. If we could get to those key performance indicators, like having a certain number of newsletter subscribers or whatever those metrics are, that we would feel more confident in making a larger purchase for more inventory for the next one. We couldn't take risks with that anymore or just shoot the wind with a number that sounded good. We had to start looking at the data and making great strides towards that.

Amy: And it can be scary to look at the data. Some of my students say they don't want to look, because they're not really sure what they're looking for, and they might not even want to know the truth if they're being really honest with themselves. So this was something that you did that most people don't do -- you got really knowledgeable about what the numbers told you.

Lara: Yes, and we started with no email list. I remember when our former marketing director came to us, and she's like, "So tell me about your email list." It was like I felt list shame. I was like,, "What kind of list are you talking about here?"

Amy: It happens to us all.

Lara: It does, but I think more so than any numbers, it was about providing helpful content for people...we're not product producers. Like I said earlier, we're seed planters. First and foremost, we're about helping women change their lives and giving them the tools to do that. If we weren't doing that in our day-to-day content, there's no way that product is going to be a long-term thing in their lives anyway.

Amy: To give us a little perspective here, can you share a quick timeline from the printing of your first workbook to where you are at this point in our chat now, producing your product in China?

Lara: 

  • We first started in 2011 - I printed that workbook for myself to use at first.
  • In 2013, we produced the first small batch of 500 workbooks at the local printer for our first customers.
  • In 2014, we bumped up production to about 3,000 (switched from selling them on Big Cartel to Shopify, where we still are today). Printed at the same printing house in the US.
  • In 2015, we sought out a really great international partner through Codra. We do most of our printing here in the US for our accessory products. We use a couple printers: We love Curry Printing, in Dallas, Texas, and then Smart Press is another partner that we use here stateside.
  • But in 2016, that's when things started to change big time. That's the year that we changed the name of our company. And, up until this point, this was a mostly black and white product. And if anybody knows me, I have a very colorful product. This is really one of the hallmarks of our company, is about living your life in full color. And so, we took a really big risk. I remember being so scared to put color in our product thinking nobody's going to like this. It's not neutral enough. We're not going to reach everyone. But when we try to be everyone or everything for everybody, that's when you really miss the magic.
  • Then we put stickers in there, and we started to make goal setting fun, and that became our hallmark. And that's also when we embraced that mantra of, "If you're not excited about it, nobody's going to be excited about it." We changed it from being loose-leaf worksheets to a bound workbook. One of the other big things we did is we started to cut products from our shop. We had grown our shop under the impression that more is better.

FINDING YOUR CENTRAL FOCUS TO PROPEL YOU FORWARD

Lara: Once you really find your niche, and you find what matters, having one central focus is really what propelled us forward. So we decided to make the PowerSheets the main product, with everything else as a support to that main focus and system.

Amy: I can't get over how many great lessons you are sharing! It’s all the stuff that I teach, but you're saying it differently and putting it into a different light, and I'm loving it! So, you shaved down some of your products to get really focused on the one that was really doing well for you, and you knew it was the right fit for your audience.

Lara: Yes, but it was scary because cutting things out makes you feel like you're not going to please everybody. But it had to become more about the impact and realizing that we could make a bigger impact if we could help people make a better buying decision by giving them less to choose from.

Amy: So, now we know the product, but you said accessories -- I'm very curious about what that means. I'd also love to know about your team size, your production site, your warehouse, all that good stuff.

Lara: I love that you encouraged our listeners, too, that this doesn't happen overnight. It's a joy and an honor to be able to share the start of the story instead of just where we are now, because I would feel so intimidated if I just heard the end instead of knowing that it took hard work, and most of these things that were successes were because I made a lot of mistakes on the way.

But, out of all of those mistakes and trial and error, we have come up with a product lineup that, like I said, centralizes on or focuses on the PowerSheets and uncovering what matters to you, making an action plan and then doing something about it. We know there's not a one-size-fits-all program for everybody's life, so we have to be able to customize that for different people. We haven't shared any of this yet, but I'm excited to share here that for the release of our 2019 PowerSheets, we’re going to have four covers for the one-year sets. This is exciting for us because people have always wanted to choose the color that matches their life.

And there's a lot of intentionalities that went behind those covers, too. So, we’ll have four one-year sets of PowerSheets, with one six-month undated set. The six-month undated set was a very intentional decision too. People sometimes find out about us in the middle of the year, and we believe there's nothing magical about January 1st. You should be able to set goals at any time you want.

We also have another cornerstone product, which is our Write The Word Journal, and it's a Bible journal that allows you to just literally write Bible verses, and those have been super popular for people that want to cultivate their faith. So we have seven Write The Word Journals. We also have a new product we just released, which is Write the Word for Kids.

And this is where it gets fun as far as dreaming about if you have a core product, how could an accessory fuel that product? We came up with five different goal guides: a goal guide for parents; a goal guide for friendship and relationships; one for wellness; and one for finances. So if those things are important to you, that's where that supports the main product.

Amy: I like how these extras all support the main product.

Lara: Yes, because if they detract or, here's where it gets technical, if we have a product that felt like it merited its own separate launch and didn't support the other products, we would have a hard time getting people to purchase the main system that we're teaching about in our day-to-day content. It can actually be a distraction in a way.

We also have our Goal Setting Sticker Book, because goal setting should be fun! : )

Amy: Months ago, I wanted to buy the PowerSheets when all my friends were all about them and they were sold out and I was bummed out. Well, the other day, I was lucky to get this nice beautiful box in the mail from you - I was so excited! Thank you for that! I'm embarrassed to say how excited I was about the stickers, but I was. So that was extra fun!

Lara: We often talk about how the stickers are fun, but this is where a researched-backed, data-oriented mindset can help you create a product that's really fun. For us, knowing that there is power in the handwritten word, as opposed to typing something digitally, there's power in marking something that's meaningful for you. And with the stickers, for instance, stickers that say things like “top priority” and “this matters”, there's actually something that happens in your brain when you're putting a sticker on a goal that really matters to you. Your mind starts to make decisions and you start to go through a series of trying to figure out how you're going to do that.

THERE’S NO “I’ IN TEAM!

Amy: Tell me about your team size and the positions you have on your team.

Lara: We have a team of nine women who I'm very grateful to work alongside. Half of them work here in my home office in Chapel Hill, North Carolina, and the other half work remotely.

  • CEO and Visionary: That’s me (Lara Casey). We use our PowerSheets for business, but we also use the Traction model, and that has been really helpful for us, for anybody that is starting to grow a team, Traction and the EOS principles have been awesome to get us organized as far as our team structure, who reports to who, and how all that works really well.
  • Creative Director: This is where we show our small business card. The Creative Director is also our Chief of Staff, so we like to do that when we're small.
  • Director of Operations: Mostly handles the production side of working with our production partners on the products and making sure our fulfillment team is helping our customers to be delighted.
  • Graphic Designer: Helps with both product design and marketing design.
  • Customer Delight Manager: This is a huge position for us. One of the central focuses for us is making sure our customers feel delighted, which is why we don't call it customer service.
  • Content Marketing Manager
  • PR manager
  • Conference Director for the Making Things Happen Conference
  • And we're hunting for a Marketing Director right now. So, if anybody out there is interested, click here.

Amy: I hope that someone reading this is the perfect fit or knows someone who is.

Lara: We want to stay a small team, and even in our 10-year vision, we have plans to hopefully just remain like 12 to 13 people, because we have that agility, the ability to be nimble, the ability to make quick decisions and act on them. The Traction Model was really helpful for us to be able to do that.

Amy: Tell us about your current production method and your new warehouse.

Lara: We just switched to a new warehouse, in Kentucky, through a company called EasyPost. EasyPost is a tech company, so they're very much focused on advancements in technology. They created a software that is also labeled the same thing, EasyPost, but they also do fulfillment now. Fulfillment means that we get our product to their warehouse, and they take care of everything on the shipping side. Our system links in with them through Shopify, and they take care of sending all the orders out. For production, we still use the same people that we've been using for the last three years, which is Codra, Curry Printing and Smart Press.

The reason we chose the new warehouse in Kentucky is there, through the advancement in technology, is a decrease in human error. We have a lot of influxes of launch dates, where we sold far more than we expected to. We had these big bumps, and our current warehouse just wasn't able to handle that without a lot of errors. It has been really helpful to work with the team that does Kickstarter. They do high production for lots of different shops that might have 25,000 products go out on the day, but they can also do our normal day-to-day quantities, too.

Amy: Fantastic! Things happen...you made choices to change things up to make it better, and that’s how your business has grown over the years. So many different changes, but based on needs, wants, mistakes and everything in between.

Looking back. If you knew back then what you know now, what would you have done differently?

IF ONLY I HAD KNOWN THEN WHAT I KNOW NOW

Lara: I would have owned our mantra earlier of, "If you're excited about it, chances are other people will be too." That really is the best form of marketing that we've experienced: If it’s a product or a piece of content that we need and will change our everyday lives, it's worth taking a risk to put out there in hopes that other people will too. That's where we really get to the power of one. So, I would say, "Take risks for what matters." And then I would also say, "Keep making it better." I am amazed that every year when we start talking about the next year's version of the PowerSheets, or really any of our products, that there are hundreds of changes that get made.

We don't just rest on our laurels. We are making it better through listening to our customer, asking them questions like, "Is this working for you?" Hearing their stories and giving them lots of opportunities to give us feedback. Keep making it better. Never stop growing.

Amy: If you could give my listeners and readers one or two pieces of advice if they're thinking about launching a physical product, what would that be?

Lara: I would say make something that you need. Make something that you know that you will authentically be able to tell people, "This filled a need for me," or, "This filled a need for my mom," or someone that's close to you. It has to have a personal story behind it. People grasp on to the power of story, and they will listen to you if you’re being authentic with them and telling them about your product.

The other thing I would say is, just what we have experienced throughout this whole six-year period of having PowerSheets and 12 years of Southern Weddings, that it's okay to grow slow. You don't have to have the whole plan to get started. Good things take root over time, and little by little, good things grow and they bloom.

Amy: There are so many great little nuggets you’ve shared with us! This has been a real eye-opener for me as well because I've never done a physical product, would not even know where to start, but these lessons you learned along the way are just priceless for anybody thinking of doing a physical product or even just adding a physical product to their online business.

I think your story shows us that there are no shortcuts, but it can really pay off when you come from a place like you did of wanting to serve your customer well and providing them with products that can bring about change.

_______

Ok, my reader, was this interview not just packed with great insight and inspiration?! Head over to www.CultivateWhatMatters.com/Amy to see Lara’s amazing products (and check out that job listing, if they haven’t filled it by the time you’re reading this). When you use that special link, Lara is giving you a special discount because you’re part of my awesome community. Yay for us! And, thank you, Lara!

Also, don't forget to let me know, in the comments below, if you like this longer, more detailed version of show notes. I appreciate your input!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, How to Create Your Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan. You can get it at http://www.amyporterfield.com/listbuilding. If you are not building your email list every single day there is no better time than right now!

May 03, 2018
#208: How I've Built My "Small, But Mighty" Team (The Wins, Fails & Fears)
49:07

It’s time to talk team!

In the last 6 months, it’s been a staffing bonanza: I’ve hired four of the five full-time positions on my team. And boy, has it been a whirlwind, filled with mistakes, wins, fears and A LOT of excitement.

But through the process, I’ve identified 7 big distinctions to help you build your own team. Now, I’m not saying go out and hire right now! At this point, all you might need is an amazing VA, or a part-time contractor to help you out. I’m tackling this subject as well, so stay tuned.

Building your team—the right kind of team—is essential to the growth of your business, to eliminate some of the stress and overwhelm, to make a bigger impact, and yeah, to make more money! So if you’re a business owner growing your business, this will be a must-listen for you. (44:34)

With the right team on your side, the sky’s the limit!

So, join me as I share with you how I built my “Small, But Mighty” team, and how I figured out what I needed and what I didn’t need. I’ve also got an awesome freebie for those of you starting to build your team virtually—you can get my “7 Make or Break Questions When You’re Interviewing for a Virtual Position” hereLet’s get started!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Check out these highlights:

  • Who is on my team—what each team member does—and when I started building my team. [5:29]
  • Why I wanted local team members (and how I ultimately changed my mind!). [15:26]
  • About those trial periods (yes, they’re a bit corporate, but they work!) [20:39]
  • So, what if they’ve got the skill set but not much of the right personality? [23:34]
  • When it’s OK to hire even if they don’t have all the experience (and what to do). [31:37]
  • My fave hiring tools. [35:17]
  • Hiring a referral vs. hiring from an ad. [37:36]
  • Getting over the fear of hiring [45:07]
May 02, 2018
#207: 20 Questions (Rapid Fire Style!) with Special Guest Interviewer, Hobie Porterfield
39:41

My husband Hobie and I had a great time recording this episode!

It was extra special because a couple weeks before recording the episode, I asked my audience to send in questions for me to answer: business, personal, silly, or whatever. The hook was that I couldn't look at any of the questions in advance. Hobie was the only one that got to look at them. He went through all the questions and chose his favorite 20. He said there were a bunch of great questions and that they were pretty hard to narrow down. Perhaps we’ll have a Part 2 at some point!

Thank you to all of my awesome fans for sending in such great questions. You truly are the best!

Well, as you can imagine, I was a bit nervous because I had no clue what was coming at me. I told this to Hobie and he assured me that I was, and I quote, “definitely going to be uncomfortable on a few of them.” Great! Just great!

Alright, I’m going to list out the questions here and give you a bit of a teaser on each one, but I invite you to tune in to my podcast to hear our full conversation (just press the play button at the top of this page). : )

20 QUESTIONS: YOU ASKED AND I’M TELLING
HOW DO YOU FIND A FAMILY AND BUSINESS BALANCE WITHOUT LOSING YOUR SANITY AND FEELING GUILTY? —NATHALIA MELO WILSON
  • My answer has to do with having an understanding husband who speaks up when he needs to.
WILL YOU GIVE IN AND MOVE OR RETIRE TO TENNESSEE? INQUIRING MINDS WANT TO KNOW. —SHANTELL BRIGHTMAN
  • Hobie and I dream of a lake house in Tennessee one day!
WHAT WAS THE BEST VACATION YOU EVER HAD? ~ TRACY GREEN CAINES
  • Let me just tell you, the mini-pool on the balcony overlooked the ocean! Ahhhh….
CAN YOU SHARE WITH US A CHALLENGING PERIOD IN YOUR LIFE AND HOW YOU GOT OUT OF IT? ~ MYKAO THAO
  • A time when I wanted to wrap Hobie up in bubble wrap every morning. I know the suspense is killing you, isn’t it?!
IF A WORK-LIFE BALANCE IS IMPORTANT TO YOU, HOW CAN YOU TELL YOU’RE GETTING IT RIGHT? ~ MICHELLE ONYANGO
  • I actually get into this topic in an episode that airs shortly after this one (it will be episode 210...be on the lookout). My answer in this episode has a lot to do with the happiness of my family.
HOW DID YOU PICK YOUR DOG’S NAMES: GUS AND SCOUT? ~ SPURGEON PERKINS
  • You'll have to tune in to the show to hear how we came up with their names.
WHAT DOES A TYPICAL DAY LOOK LIKE FOR AMY PORTERFIELD? ~ RACHAEL WATSON
WHAT’S THE BIGGEST MISTAKE YOU’VE MADE IN YOUR BUSINESS, OR THE SINGLE BEST THING YOU’VE DONE? ~ AMY WARE
  • Without a doubt, taking the leap to do what I do now!
HOW DO YOU MANAGE TO NOT RESPOND TO NEGATIVE COMMENTS? ~ NIKOLINA ANDRIC
  • I’m pretty good here, but Hobie’s another story. ; )
DOES AMY SHARE THE COVERS, HOBIE? OR IS SHE A COVERS HOG? INQUIRING MINDS WANT TO KNOW. ~ NICOLE WALTERS
  • Hobie shares why he nicknamed me “The Alligator” when it comes to hogging the covers.
WHAT WOULD BE THE MOST CHALLENGING PART OF SWAPPING JOBS WITH HOBIE FOR 24 HOURS? ~ ERIC UPTON
  • Do you know what my husband does for a living? He’s basically a hero in my eyes, but the job would be tough! Hobie also shares how he’s a bit technologically challenged, which gave me a real laugh!
HOW HAS BEING A WOMAN PLAYED TO YOUR ADVANTAGE OR DISADVANTAGE IN GROWING YOUR BUSINESS? ~ AMBER BRUESKE
  • There’s a mix of masculine and feminine energy that I need to show up with and that can be good and bad in various situations.
WHAT FAMILY ROUTINES OR RITUALS KEEP YOUR FAMILY OR MARRIAGE HAPPY? ~ TARA ZIRKER
  • It’s all about coffee in the morning and going to bed together at night!
IF YOU COULD ONLY DO ONE THING DIFFERENTLY WHEN YOU STARTED YOUR BUSINESS, WHAT WOULD IT BE? ~ AIMEE STONEHILL
20 SECONDS OF COURAGE. CAN YOU SHARE A MOMENT IN YOUR BIZ WHEN YOU HAD TO CALL IN TRUE COURAGE, AND IT BECAME A PIVOTAL MOMENT FOR YOU? ~ JANET BECKERS
  •  Changing the names of one of my programs and a recent experience on stage.
IF YOU LOOK AT YOUR BUSINESS FIVE, TEN, AND FIFTEEN YEARS FROM NOW, WHAT DOES IT LOOK LIKE? ARE YOUR LONG-TERM GOALS CAREFULLY MAPPED OUT AND PLANNED? OR ARE THERE MASSIVE LEAPS THAT CAN'T EVEN ENTER YOUR SHORT-TERM THINKING? ~ ANDY WANG
  • I talk about being a planner, but a shorter-term thinker as far as years down the road.
WHAT MAKES YOUR MARRIAGE WITH HOBIE SUPER SPECIAL? ~ EMILY MYRICK
  • Yes, I thought Hobie was just setting me up with this one, but he didn’t. Let me just say that I feel like the luckiest woman around, with my man!
HOW DID YOU AND HOBIE MEET? AND WHY DO YOU THINK YOU CONNECTED SO WELL? AND THEN, THE PLOT TWIST IS, HOBIE HAS TO TELL THE STORY FROM HIS PERSPECTIVE. THEN YOU HAVE TO TELL THE STORY FROM YOUR PERSPECTIVE. ~ LAUREN TICKNER
  • You're going to want to listen to all the juicy details on this one. ; )
HOW LONG DID IT TAKE YOU TO FEEL LIKE YOU'VE MADE IT IN YOUR BUSINESS? OR AT LEAST LIKE YOU HAD IT TOGETHER AND WERE THERE EVER ANY TIMES BEFORE THAT POINT WHERE YOU FELT LIKE COMPLETELY THROWING IN THE TOWEL? ~ SHELLY LEVINE
  • Many, many times. The first 2 years I felt like I was going to have to go back to my corporate job, but that sounded miserable.
I COULD REALLY USE SOME ADVICE ON HANDLING LAUNDRY WHILE YOU'RE WORKING FROM HOME. DOES SOMEBODY ELSE DO THAT FOR YOU OR DO YOU JUST WORK AROUND IT? ~ INA COVENEY
  • Did I mention I feel like the luckiest woman around, with my husband?
HOW DO YOU BALANCE GIVING PERSONAL ATTENTION TO YOUR CLIENTS WHILE STILL TRYING TO AUTOMATE YOUR BUSINESS AND NOT BE TOO INVOLVED? ~ JENNIFER LAKE
  • Believe it or not, my answer has to do with Facebook lives.
IF YOU WERE JUST GETTING STARTED IN SOCIAL MEDIA, WHAT ARE THE THREE TOP PLATFORMS YOU WOULD FOCUS ON BUILDING AN AUDIENCE? ~ TAMMI HARRIS
  • YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram.

Well, I have to admit, I may have been a little nervous at first, but that was super fun. If there are any Pittsburgh Steeler fans out there, you may want to tune in to the last part of the episode for a good Steelers story.

**********

And that's a wrap! Maybe Hobie does have a future in podcasting after all! 😍

Amy

P.S. If you'd like to hear more from Hobie, listen in to this episode where we talked about how to make love and business work. 

May 02, 2018
GDPR For Entrepreneurs: What You Need to Know with Bobby Klinck
57:21

If you have an online business or an email list that you communicate with, you’ve probably heard the rumblings around the internet about the EU’s new General Data Protection Regulation (let’s just call it GDPR, shall we?). This new regulation goes into effect May 25, 2018 and in an effort to understand what it is, what it means to online marketers, and what we need to take action on, I’ve invited Bobby Klinck, an intellectual property attorney, to help us navigate all things GDPR. Bobby is not only an attorney, but he is an entrepreneur himself, so he really has his finger on the pulse of what online entrepreneurs need to do to protect themselves.

Let’s dive in and figure this all out!

What is GDPR?

GDPR stands for “The General Data Protection Regulation” a privacy law from the European Union that goes into effect May 25, 2018. Even though it’s a European Union law, all online entrepreneurs need to be paying attention because the GDPR will mean major changes for the way we operate.

What activities are covered by the GDPR?

  • The GDPR applies to the processing of personal data.
  • Processing is a fancy word for, “doing anything with data”. You should assume it covers everything you do with all of the data you collect from individuals from collection to deletion (and at every point in between).
  • Only applies to personal data which is anything that is associated with, or related to, someone who is identified or who you can identify.
  • Identified includes: names, email addresses, physical addresses, and most people agree it includes IP addresses and other info collected automatically (usually collected by Google Analytics).
  • Also includes any type of processing and information that you’re adding to your contact database. This could be information that you collect automatically, through an opt-in or any other collection method. (ex: surveys, quizzes, etc.), or through tagging or segmenting in your CRM database. These activities are included because you are effectively “monitoring” what people are doing.

Who does the GDPR apply to?

  • The GDPR will apply to any relationship or transaction (commercial or free) where one of more of the parties is in the EU. It is not based on citizenship, it’s based on where they are when you are interacting with them.
  • If you are an online entrepreneur or marketer based in the European Union, you must comply with the GDPR across your entire business. The means that if you are collecting data from someone in the US, you still have to comply.
  • If you are an online entrepreneur or marketer based outside of the EU, you must comply with the GDPR when we are interacting with or collecting data from people in the EU.
  • This is where things get complicated! There are some instances where it doesn’t apply if you’re outside the EU .

How Does GDPR Apply to Non-EU Entrepreneurs?

  • A non-EU entrepreneur has to comply when processing of people in the EU.
  • But ONLY if the processing is related to:
    • Offering products or services to people in the EU (paid AND free) - that means a lead magnet counts!
    • Monitoring the behavior of people in the EU (as mentioned earlier)
  • Here’s where the GREY ZONE enters in: People are not sure how the territorial limits will apply. Questions you may be asking:
    • What about people who don’t knowingly collect information?
    • Ex: Facebook Ads: Bobby focuses on people only in the US. He’s not actively trying to attract people in the EU. But when he looks at his list, about 5% are in the EU. He’s not going to refuse doing business with this 5%, so he will have to comply with GDPR when he’s interacting and handling data with this 5% from the EU.
    • What about adding a disclaimer that says you only sell to people in the US?
    • Unfortunately, there are not crystal clear answers to these questions, but let’s dig into the language and details and see how this pertains to you.

6 principles of the GDPR

#1: Data shall be processed “lawfully, fairly, and in a transparent manner.”

  • You have to be upfront about what you are collecting the data for.

#2: Data shall be “collected for specified, explicit and legitimate purposes.”

  • You can’t collect data without explaining how you are using it, and those purposes have to be legit.

#3: Data processing shall be “limited to what is necessary” for the purpose.

  • You can’t collect all kinds of data on a person if all you need is an email address (like for a lead magnet). You may only collect the minimum amount of data for the purpose you are collecting it for. Once you have collected the necessary data, you can only use it for its intended purpose. (We’ll get into how this affects list-building later in the post).

#4: Data shall be accurate, kept up to date, and corrected.

  • Doesn’t really apply to us. This is more for the Google and Facebooks of the world.

#5: Data shall be kept so it identifies a person “no longer than is necessary.”

  • You should not keep data about people forever if there is no reason to keep it.

#6: Data shall be “processed in a manner that ensures appropriate security.”

  • You have to take reasonable steps to protect the data. We should all already be using SSL certificates and other ways to actually make sure that we’re protecting the data, (Data should be stored behind a secure wall (password collected).

How You Will Need to Change the Way You Collect Email Addresses From Potential Leads In Your Marketing Efforts:

The only lawful basis for adding someone to your marketing email list under the GDPR would be consent, and the GDPR requires that consent be freely given, specific, and unambiguous.

This new standard means we can't automatically add everyone who grabs one of our lead magnets to our general marketing email list.

  • We must get a separate consent to add them to our marketing list.
  • You can't require them to give this consent as a condition for getting your freebie.
  • You have to sell prospects on the benefits of your list to get them to voluntarily sign up (not just as a requirement to get your lead magnet, freebie, or webinar registration).

The new consent standard applies to your EXISTING list. If you can’t show that you have the right kind of consent from people who are already on your list and to whom the GDPR applies, then you cannot email them any longer beginning May 25, 2018


IMPORTANT: Because consent must be specific and unambiguous, someone downloading a lead magnet from you does not equate to consent to be added to your general email list.

The GDPR also prohibits you to ask for consent to add them to the email list. Getting consent for multiple things or in the course of some other transaction is going to be hard. You likely need stand alone consent.

According to the GDPR, you also can’t add a checkbox and prohibit the delivery of the lead magnet if they don’t click the box.

You may not require someone to consent to be added to your email list to get access to your lead magnet. (Someone giving you their email address and you promising them a freebie is a contract under the law and adding them to your email list is not “necessary” as stated in the 6 principles above.)

Ultimately, to be added to your email list, a prospect must specifically and affirmatively agree to be added to your list. And you may not require that they join your list to receive a freebie, attend a webinar, etc. Instead, we have to sell prospects on the value of being added to our list.

The new consent standard applies to your EXISTING list. Come May 25, you cannot email your existing contacts who signed up through a lead magnet.


Can I send a nurture sequence after someone opts in for my lead magnet under GDPR?

It’s not crystal clear, but there’s a good argument for allowing you to send a nurture sequence after someone downloads your lead magnet.

This would be called expanded processing and that is when you take an action after the initial action.

Factors to consider when deciding whether it’s ok, or not, to do expanded processing:

  • The link between the purposes of collection and the purposes for the expanded processing
  • Context in which the data was collected
  • Nature of the personal data (we’re not really collecting sensitive information for a lead magnet)
  • Consequences of expanded processing (the consequence might be getting a few emails from you)
  • Existence of appropriate safeguards (these should be in place no matter what)

How Do I Preserve My Existing List and Get Compliant?

It’s two-pronged: Between now and May 25, you need to build goodwill with your list and run campaigns to get GDPR-compliant consents.

For non-EU entrepreneurs: Start by segmenting your list into two parts:
1) Non-EU subscribers
2) Subscribers from EU and any unknowns (treat them as if they are in the EU)
Many of the email service providers have this functionality or are currently rolling it out.

Why should I segment?:

  • You are going to re-engage with the subscribers from your EU (and those who are unknown) segmented portion of your list before May 25. The results of your re-engagement campaign won’t be great. You want to figure out how you can keep people on your list without getting a new consent.
  • For the non-EU list, you can continue communicating with them just like you have been.
  • If you have people that opted in cleanly to your newsletter, you can probably put them in the “ok” category. These people have given you consent to receive your marketing emails.

How do I run a re-engagement campaign?:

  • BEFORE you send the consent emails, first deliver extra value consistently.
    • Send an extra email a week.
  • THEN send emails asking for consent. Only to those who you have to send to!
    • Make sure that you have a system set up so that when someone does consent, you are taking them off this special “EU-non consent” list and moving them on to a “EU confirmed consent” list.
    • You want to send multiple “consent” emails and make them enticing. Pay close attention to the subject lines! Catchy or blatant subject lines might work well. The challenge is to get people to open the emails.
    • The only goal of the re-engagement campaign is to convince people to give you GDPR-compliant consent.
      • That might be by clicking a link in an email or signing up via an opt-in page. It depends on what your email service provider allows.

Anyone who doesn't give the necessary consent by May 24, should be deleted from your list. Remember, even storing or deleting their info is "processing," so this work needs to be done before May 25, 2018.


Summary of Bobby’s Suggestions to Preserve Your
Existing List and Get GDPR Compliant

Step #1: Build goodwill by delivering amazing value to your list between now and then. I'm talking about going above and beyond the normal value that I'm sure you deliver. Make your content SO good, no one will want to miss the awesomeness.

Step #2: Create your list of targets from whom you need new consents. For entrepreneurs in the EU, this will be your whole list. For entrepreneurs outside the EU, this will be everyone in the EU and anyone whose location is unknown.

Step #3: Run a re-engagement campaign to the list of people who need to provide fresh consent. Sell them on the benefits and do this in your own style. Good copywriting is still key here! You know your audience. You'll want to plan for a series of emails with increasingly dire (and interesting) subject lines to make sure people don't miss them.

Finally, anyone who doesn't give the necessary consent by May 24, should be axed from your list. Remember even storing or deleting their info is "processing," so this work needs to be done before May 25.


For online entrepreneurs, the main impact of GDPR will be in how we build our email list, so let’s take a list on what list-building will look like going forward.


IMPORTANT: Gone are the days of offering a lead magnet and adding everyone who claims the lead magnet to our marketing email lists.


What do I need to do moving forward in my list building efforts to be compliant with GDPR?

Because you have to get stand alone consent to add someone to our list, you either have to go back to the old “join my newsletter” model or use lead magnets and get consent somewhere along the funnel.

  • There’s no question that this consent would be sufficient, assuming you disclose what you will include.
  • But this method never really worked from a marketing standpoint... and there’s no reason to think that it will work now.
  • The “join my newsletter” approach is especially bad for non -EU entrepreneurs who can use segmenting as part of their strategy.

What would a workaround look like?

  • You can use lead magnets to get their name and email and then try to sell them on joining your list at some point in your funnel that you are allowed to have without getting further consent.
  • There are four touchpoints to consider:
    1) Opt-in Page (checkbox or drop-down menu)
    2) Sandwich Page (like a one-click upsell page)
    3) Delivery Email Itself
    4) In the Lead Magnet

Let’s break down all 4 options:

  • Opt-in Page:
    • You can add a voluntary checkbox/dropdown menu on your opt-in page.
    • This would clearly be consent if you do it right.
    • It must be voluntary and it cannot be the default. You can’t force them to agree and you can’t have the agreement as the default.
    • If you are going to do this, try to use a drop-down menu vs a checkbox. That way they have to choose “Yes or No” - so they have to make a choice and you are not forcing the “Yes.” With a checkbox for “Yes”, they can easily miss it and skip it all together (since it can’t be forced!).
  • Sandwich Page:
    • Include a one-click upsell page between opt-in and thank you page that asks them to subscribe.
    • “Hey! One more thing before we finish.” - It’s essentially a sales page for your newsletter.
    • This gives you the chance to sell the benefits of being on your list.
    • They are presented with this option all on its own, so it’s compliant.
  • Delivery Email:
    • You deliver the email as usual that gives them the lead magnet as promised.
    • Include language in the email to sell them on joining your list and include a call to action (example below).
    • Depending on how your system works, either send them to a separate opt-in or use click to segment the list.
  • In the Lead Magnet:
    • Add a paragraph at the end of your lead magnets selling them on your list with a clickable link.
    • This is sufficient consent and it gives them a reminder if they look back at your lead magnet later.

Guidance for non-EU Marketers:

  • Don’t seek consent until after the point that you can segment between EU and non-EU prospective leads. This likely means using only the delivery email and in the lead magnet itself.
  • **If your email service provider is able to show different pages based on somebody’s IP address/country, then do this at the front end (and outlined above). So you would show an alternative page for all outside of the US and don’t bother those in the US.

What is the Role of the Privacy Policy Related to GDPR?

  • Under the GDPR, you are required to inform people of certain information and you have to give them information to get informed consent.
  • And you have to provide this information to the individuals at the time that you are collecting their information. Your privacy policy is the tool you use to meet this requirement.
  • You need a Privacy Policy regardless of whether the GDPR applies. Privacy Policies were always important and they are a MUST in the GDPR world.
  • CA law requires you to disclose certain information.
  • There are hefty fines under GDPR and CA law, so get a policy in place.

What Do I Need to Include in the Privacy Policy?

  • The relevant contact information.
  • What information you collect and the basis for collecting it.
  • What you do with the data (including who else gets access).
  • The visitors rights under the GDPR.

Where Do You Put the Policy?

  • Create a standalone page on your website that includes the policy.
  • Put links to that page in your footer navigation on your website (and on opt-in pages, sales pages, LeadPages, webinar registration pages, etc.)
  • Put a link anywhere that you ask for consent or collect data.

What’s Next?

Check out Bobby’s Free GDPR Training: I’m breaking my rules a bit here because you all know I’ve had a policy for the last year or so of not sending podcast traffic to someone else’s sign up page - I’ve talked about that strategy on my show before. HOWEVER, this information is important and I want you to protect yourself. So I’m making an exception. I want to encourage you to check out Bobby’s FREE mini-training all about the GDPR. The goal of his mini training is not only to make sure that you, as an online entrepreneur, understand the legal requirements but also to give you the tools and practical advice you need to thrive in a GDPR world.

THANK YOU, Bobby, for your time and generosity in helping us understand GDPR. I truly feel I now have what it takes to move forward and implement to get compliant before the deadline! -- Amy

Apr 30, 2018
#206: The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training
29:26

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • When you’re looking into creating a course—and this is especially true when you’re just starting out—you’ve got a TON of information to choose from. Maybe you’ve been working on this material for 5 or 10 years, or you’ve been consulting a while and you have a ton of stories, examples and exercises.
  • Getting all of that out of your head can be difficult, to say the least. Whenever I sit down to create a new course (like I’m doing right now) it can be both exciting, and excruciating.
  • Which is why I wanted to bring on Gina Onativia, a content and course expert who is in the trenches every day with her clients, building their courses. Gina has a super practical post-it exercise she’s created to help her clients figure out some pre-details before diving into course creation. I think of her process as kind of like a “prelude” to my own...and I think you’ll find it extremely helpful in your own course creation process.

By the way, if you’re NOT in the midst of creating a course, you can also use this exercise for any type of content creation. AND I want to make sure you download the freebie—which has the exact steps we are going to talk about in this episode. In the freebie, you’ll see a real post-it exercise from one of Gina’s clients that you can use as an example to guide your own process (and I LOVE great examples!). (9:01)

With your freebie at the ready, get ready to dive into your course creation here.

This episode is brought to you by:
In my free masterclassHow to Confidently Create Your First Online Course in 60 Days, I will walk you through all of the pieces it takes to create a stellar online course. Save your spot here!

Check out these highlights:

  • The first area course creators get tripped up when starting out. [8:42]
  • How to start your post-it exercise. (If you’re an office supply junkie like me, get excited!) [9:31]
  • Why it’s so important to know what your avatar is feeling. [13:59]
  • How to brainstorm your overarching steps. [14:50]
  • What to do if you’re stuck. [16:27]
  • The final step: Your roadmap. [19:15]
  • How do I sell just a piece of my course as a standalone? [24:04]
Apr 12, 2018
#205: The 3 Do’s and 3 Don’ts for Entrepreneurs In-the-Making
28:19

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • The fear of not being good enough is a tough feeling to shake. If you struggle with this fear, I know it can show up way too often. Now, I can’t promise that it will ever completely go away—but I am proof that you can silence that voice A LOT.
  • If this fear comes up for you, then this is the show for you.
  • Today I’m going to introduce you to a powerhouse named Rachel Hollis—an amazing entrepreneur who manages a lifestyle website with almost two million readers each year and over 800,000 actively engaged followers on social media. Together, we’re talking about the pressures that you face as mothers and fathers and husbands and wives and employees, and of course, entrepreneurs.
  • We’re talking do’s and don’ts for entrepreneurs-in-the-making, and specifically, how to break through some of those major fears that we are constantly up against as you put yourself out there on social media, and in videos, and everything else you do to build your online business. (2:25)

Now, if you read the title of this episode and said something along the lines of, “Well, I’m not really sure I can call myself an entrepreneur…,” this is what I have to say to you: If you’re showing up, if you’re building your business, if you’re working hard toward your goals—you are legit! You are an entrepreneur, so it’s time to own it! So, if the fear of not being good enough, or that you’re not doing enough, or that you’re not doing it right, if those fears come up for you, then this is the show for you. Listen in.

This episode is brought to you by:
My incredible and free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan,” where you’ll learn my proven 3-stack system for leveraging the most powerful, “what’s working now” list-building strategies. You can sign up here.

Check out these highlights:

Links mentioned in this episode:

 
Apr 05, 2018
#204: How She Quit Her Day Job and Turned Her Side Hustle Into a Full-Time Thing with Melissa Norris
45:18

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • One question I get asked a bunch: How do I transition from my 9-to-5 to an online business full-time? What are the exact steps?
  • There are a lot of different ways to get there, but I wanted to bring in one of my students who did it in a less-scary and less-painful way that you can learn from and model.
  • Melissa Norris will share with us ONE roadmap for how she got to where she could quit her day job and live out her dream business.
  • Melissa’s story is filled with amazing insights and a-ha moments that many of you will be able to use for your own journeys—especially if you are interested in investing your time and money into webinars! (25:30)

Now here’s the kicker for today’s ep: Melissa’s business is all about the pioneering lifestyle! I’m talking full functioning homestead with pigs and cattle, grinding your own flour, canning vegetables… things you’ll probably NEVER see me doing (and for good reason!). The fascinating thing is she was able to use the same marketing principles and strategies (that you can use, too) to find her tribe, build her business and quit her day job. So if you’ve been wondering how you can ditch your J-O-B, this episode is the right one for you! Listen here to get Melissa’s step-by-step plan.

This episode is brought to you by:

Free Masterclass: How to Create and Deliver Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don’t Have a List)

Check out these highlights:

  • Melissa’s incredible story about a full functioning homestead [4:24]
  • The importance of (sustainable) baby steps—and how to find the time to take those first steps. [13:28]
  • The inevitability of having to hustle, at least for some time. [17:08]
  • What scaling looked like after quitting her day job. [23:06]
  • Melissa’s hit “seasonal webinars” and what she learned from them. [25:30]
  • How Melissa runs her membership site. [29:44]
  • A few amazing sales sequence a-ha moments! [37:47]
Mar 29, 2018
#203: How To Get Noticed Online When You’re Just Starting Out
27:25

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • I’ve been an online marketing entrepreneur for a long time now. I’ve worked with thousands of students and have gotten pretty darn good at finding patterns. Specifically, patterns in limiting beliefs and mindset blocks that often stop promising entrepreneurs in their tracks.
  • One common struggle I’ve uncovered A LOT is the fight to stand out when the online world has become so saturated. And here’s the thing—it is tough to stand out. I’m not going to sugar coat it. It can be incredibly frustrating.
  • But I’m here to tell you—sometimes it’s not just about the strategies. Sometimes the key to getting noticed is all about...mindset.
  • And this all starts with one simple truth about every successful entrepreneur... (2:15)

So, in today’s episode I wanted to make sure you take the time to stop and learn how to shift the way you approach a noisy online world, and in turn, get noticed. Because it’s really the way you think that will ultimately set you apart. Tune in now.

This episode is brought to you by:
My incredible, and free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan,” where you’ll learn my proven 3-stack system for leveraging the most powerful, “what’s working now” list-building strategies. You can sign up here.

Check out these highlights:

Mar 22, 2018
#202: How to Engage Your Small Facebook Group When You’re Just Starting Out with Caitlin Bacher
52:00

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • In the past few years, as Facebook has evolved, I’ve begun to think about Facebook groups in a whole different way. I believe groups—and not pages—are the key to building the kind of communities that allow you to truly connect with and grow your audience.
  • And it’s not just me! Many of my peers are having the same experience in discovering the incredible potential of Facebook groups. One superstar, in particular, is my friend Caitlin Bacher—who has grown her private FB group to more than 30,000 members in 3 years!
  • Caitlin is with me today to answer the question I get asked all of the time with my students: How do I boost engagement in my Facebook groups when I’m starting from zero?
  • Tune in to learn how to make Facebook groups one of your most effective social platforms! And Caitlin shares ALL, including the #1 mistake she sees entrepreneurs make with groups... [6:06]

Yes, I know it sounds like things just got trickier with the Facebook algorithm and the announcement that Facebook is going to focus more on “meaningful social interactions.” But don’t panic! This is actually great news for those of you who are using (or want to use) Facebook groups for your business. There are so many options. From Facebook groups that are tied to your paid content, to free communities that are tied to your bigger messaging and brand. It all begins here.

This episode is brought to you by:
Master Class: How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days
www.Amyporterfield.com/free

Check out these highlights:

  • Why Facebook groups and why someone would decide to do only Facebook groups? [4:14]
  • The importance of getting really good at selling one thing first. [8:55]
  • Everything you need to know about closed free groups. [17:57]
  • Some of the best type of content you can create for your own communities. [28:00]
  • What about Facebook groups created for paid courses? [34:01]
  • Using an email series to boost engagement within your Facebook group. [37:08]
  • How to use the group to help you solve for buyer’s remorse (for your paid content). [39:48]
Mar 15, 2018
#201: Five Ways to Make Money (Without Using Webinars)
55:11

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Yes, today’s topic may seem a bit off-brand for me, since to know me is to know that I love love love webinars.
  • However, today I’m mixing things up to present a few different strategies to make money online.
  • I STILL think webinars are the most powerful way you can drive your online business…but I wanted to share 5 ways to make money online that do not include a webinar training and that can set you up for bigger strategies to bring in bigger bucks.
  • Not only am I dishing out several ways you can make money, but I’m also talking about the actual offers you can craft to then promote the strategies I’m sharing.

I am a big believer in baby steps, and you may not be ready for webinars in your business—YET. So I’m going to talk about some simpler strategies you can use in your business until you’re ready to take the “webinar leap.” Let’s start making some money...

Check out these highlights:

Mar 08, 2018
#200: 10 Online Marketers Share Their Zig Stories
01:09:38

It’s the 200th episode! Cue the confetti and champagne! If you have been listening to me since I first aired in 2013, THANK YOU! It’s been 5 AMAZING years and I couldn’t have done it without you!

To celebrate, I have asked some of my closest friends and peers to share quick pieces about something I’ve been thinking about a lot lately…

How do you zig when others are zagging?

How do you “go against the grain”?

When do you take a risk and change things up?

And I couldn’t think of anyone better to tackle this topic than my small group of much-cherished and loved peers. I hope you enjoy listening to these as much as I have. Get ready to make some zigs happen for your own business!

If you’re wondering if it’s a right time to “zig” for your business, listen up to my four scenarios to help you decide.

Want a personalized message from me on instagram?
And if you want that new “outtake” of me sharing my personal story of zigging, make sure to 1) take a screenshot of this episode 2) post it on Instagram (feed or stories) and use #200withamy and tag me when you post it. Then I’ll slide into your DM with a link to this clip! That’s right, I will personally DM you...

Here’s a sneak peek of each of my amazing group of peers:

  • Jasmine Star gives us the inside scoop into how she invested a year of heart, soul and money into a launch that got her … an underwhelming amount of students. But then she decided to “knock on some digital doors” ... [12:50]
  • Ray Edwards shares the personal touch he provided for each person who bought one of his high-end programs. [18:25]
  • Pat Flynn starts off with a life-changing story from his childhood, then talks about how giving away a study guide for free became the launching-off point for Smart Passive Income. [20:03]
  • Diane Sanfilippo on why you need to be focused on creating paid content and programs. [26:30]
  • Julie Solomon offers up her own version of “Pitch Perfect” and how she took the initiative to start monetizing her blog. [32:01]
  • Tarzan Kay shares how she broke ALL the rules of launches, and executed a simple (no stress!) promotion that netted her five figures. [39:59]
  • James Wedmore gives us multiple examples of zigging, and asks a series of questions to help you come up with your own different “out of the box” ideas. [45:36]
  • Russell Brunson talks about how one T-shirt helped to reduce his ClickFunnels churn by 23 percent (!)—and build a powerful community in the process. [51:03]
  • Rick Mulready walks his own talk and tries his hand at Facebook Messenger for feedback about this podcast. The results may surprise you—because they surprised him! [56:51]
  • Jenna Kutcher gets real (as always) and tells you why she decided to go completely transparent with her messaging. [1:01:18]

Links to learn more about my special group of friends:

Mar 01, 2018
#199: From Two Failed Course Launches to Pre-Sell Success with Michelle Evans
53:29

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Michelle and I start at the very beginning (including how she transitioned from her 16-year corporate job at Microsoft to creating online courses). Michelle dives into all of the excruciating details of her two failed launches, and also what she did to turn it all around. I think you’ll get a lot out of the strategies, lessons and insights she’s sharing, including how she used my program Courses that Convert to make her own course dreams come true.

Check out these highlights:

Feb 22, 2018
#198: Five Important Facebook Ad Changes with Rick Mulready
40:42

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

If you’ve decided that this year is THE year to master Facebook ads, you cannot miss out on all the juicy details Rick has for us in today’s ep. Some of you know Rick from previous podcasts, and I love having him back because he’s always making sure you’re on top of your game with Facebook AND Instagram Ads. So let’s get started on the five must-areas Rick says you need to be aware of today.

Check out these highlights:

  • Where did Power Editor go? [4:51]
  • How Facebook is updating the potential audience reach. [7:39]
  • Should you keep your audiences separate? [10:40]
  • Budget optimization at the Campaign Level: you want to be ready to optimize this update. [11:45]
  • How to choose between manual and automatic bidding. [15:26]
  • Customizing ads for different placements in both Facebook and Instagram (this one’s brand new). [19:01]
  • Messenger Ads—why Rick thinks they will be BIG in 2018. [25:47]
  • Cyber Monday’s billion-dollar payoff and why keeping the mobile user in mind is super important. [31:22]
Feb 15, 2018
#197: How to 10X Your Results in 2018 (and Beyond) with 3 Dead Simple Strategies With Marie Forleo
01:00:11

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Marie has this uncanny ability to help you uncover what’s truly holding you back from getting results and on this episode, you’ll be amazed to discover that all of the strategies we’re diving into today require more of you and less of all the tools and gizmos you think you need to succeed online.

And if you let them, these strategies will free you up and open the door to a business you’ve been dreaming of.

WARNING: This one is definitely an “ear-buds episode” (to wear around the kids); Marie’s breaking out the adult language.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why running faster and faster and faster and working harder and harder and harder (like a hamster) will not get you the results you want. [10:00]
  • What it means to show the raw, real you. [12:02]
  • How Marie shook up her longtime video show with a little sumthin’ called Marie Unplugged. [17:23]
  • Do NOT spend a lot of money on that production! [20:46]
  • A real unscripted moment Marie had on the streets of New York. [22:23]
  • Our 24-hour challenge for you. [23:25]
  • Forget Social and focus on THIS instead. [25:05]
  • One of the most underrated and overlooked traits for creatives and entrepreneurs. [35:43]
  • How Marie took her B-School refund rate from 19% to less than 2%. [40:31]

Make sure to check out Marie’s FREE Video Training Series

This is some of the best marketing training out there today (in my opinion!). In Video One Marie covers two burning questions:

  • Where should I focus in my business?
  • How do I know if I’m working on the right things for my business?

Grab video one here now.

Links I mentioned in this episode:

Exploring B-School: 30 Days of Diving Into the Details
For the third year in a row, I’m bringing back my free, 30-Day B-School Pop-up Facebook Group, where I will get laser-focused on my experience with Marie’s B-School program. I’ll share personal business-building stories of how I got where I am today, exclusive live video trainings, and a lot of insights of how I got the most out of B-School. You can request access here.

Feb 08, 2018
#196: 3 Surprising Strategies to Increase Sales on Your Next Webinar
26:22

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • If I know one thing after running hundreds of webinars, it’s this: Connection on a webinar presentation is THE path to higher conversions.
  • With that in mind, I wanted to show you three key strategies that may just surprise you—not because they are advanced, or radically different. They may be surprising to you because they are not the typical strategies you talk about when it comes to boosting webinar conversions.
  • Which is EXACTLY why I wanted to share these three elements with you, so that you can focus on creating true, real touch points with your audience on your webinar, create those deeper connections, and ultimately see better conversions.

As some of you might already know, I relaunched my List Builder’s Lab program with a series of live webinars. And every time I do a series of live webinars I always learn new strategies or walk away with aha moments about how to do things differently or have a bigger impact. And you know me: I’m holding nothing back. Including sharing an embarrassing story of how I blew off advice from Marie Forleo. So let’s dive in.

Check out these highlights:

  • The true path to higher conversions begins here. [2:12]
  • How to get your webinar audience thinking “That’s totally me!” [4:58]
  • The (strong) case for keeping the chat live and open. [8:35]
  • What my team does during live chats to keep attendees engaged. [12:08]
  • How to get the most out of your Q&A time. [14:50]
  • Increasing the trust factor during every presentation. [17:45]
  • Are you asking: At what point in my live webinar do I focus on selling? I’ve got answers. [19:10]
  • The importance of reading between the lines and identifying what your audience SHOULD be asking. [20:18]

This episode is brought to you by:

Free Masterclass: How to Create Your Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Feb 01, 2018
#195: The 6 Pillars of My Content Creation Process
37:35

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • You KNOW you have to create “quality content” for your different outcomes—but how do you make sure that it is relevant and compelling, and the entire process doesn’t feel completely overwhelming
  • Today I’m taking the overwhelm out of getting out weekly material plus creating content inside of your programs and promotions plus everything else you’ve got to think about by breaking down every single part of the content-creating process for you.
  • Introducing: My six pillars of content creation process and how they help me stay focused with every content piece I produce.

When you start categorizing your content and just hone in on one or two things (versus the 30 things on your project plan!), you can do them much more effectively. With these pillars, I want you to know exactly what you’re focusing on for where you are in your business. No more second-guessing on what kind of content you need to engage your tribe, or build up to a promotion. I’ve put it all out there so you can take immediate action.

Oh and by the way, it may surprise you to know that I will often spend more time and energy working on my free content than on my paid content. And there’s a solid why behind that. (19:33)

Check out these highlights:

  • How I create so much content in my business [00:38]
  • The type of content that brings in my ideal customer avatars like bees to honey. [6:48]
  • To freebie or not to freebie? (Or: How to know if my content will work best with a freebie?) [9:07]
  • Content for the masses vs. content for your Tribe. [13:34]
  • Who is social media content really for? [16:50]
  • When to focus most of your content creation time into your free promo content. [19:33]
  • The key lesson for creating paid course content. [25:10]
  • The right time for paid bonus content. [27:45]
  • Why I’m including paid relationship content in my six pillars (and what that even means!). [31:40]

Here's the '6 Pillars SlideShare' I promised in this episode: www.amyporterfield.com/6pillars

Jan 24, 2018
#194: How I Handle Criticism as an Online Marketer
21:09

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

When you are building your online business, you’re opening yourself up to a completely different world for feedback (in contrast to say, the corporate realm). And the fact is that total strangers may be giving you “input.” It can be daunting in the beginning, however if you can learn to face this feedback without taking it personal, then you will become that much stronger of an entrepreneur. Let’s check out those tips now.

Check out these highlights:

  • Trolls are the worst, and you have to learn to deal with them. But what about when it’s from your audience, your clients, your students? [5:17]
  • That one time I tried to make up for a “mistake” with a disgruntled fan and how it went very, very wrong. [6:13]
  • How two of my students handled a flood of negative comments… [12:16]
  • Sometimes criticism can actually be really helpful- depending on the delivery. [15:50]
  • What I actually learned after that horrible experience dealing with criticism (and what I do now). [16:44]
  • What about when you want to give feedback? [17:56]

This episode is brought to you by:
Free Masterclass: The Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Jan 18, 2018
#193: Should I Join a Mastermind?
40:10

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

So today I’m digging into masterminds

  • Why you should think about joining a mastermind
  • How you know if you’re ready
  • How to pick a great one

Plus I’ll talk about a big decision I just made to join a mastermind for 2018, why I’m signing up, and who’s coming with me.

By the way—if you know me, you know I’m always looking for inspiration. And a big thing about working with a mastermind is that the group members inspire you to take action, partly because you’re seeing them take action, and partly because you’re in this together, and want everyone to succeed. I’ll even share a specific example of how I inspired one member to get some serious things done for her business. (13:19)

Check Out These Highlights:

This episode is brought to you by:
Free Masterclass: The Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Mastermind/Group Coaching Resources:

Jeff Walker’s Masterminds
Jeff has two—a Launch Club and a Platinum group. Currently all spaces are full; for more information, email support@productlaunchformula.com.

Brendon Burchard’s Masterminds (2 levels)

Rick Mulready’s Accelerator Group Coaching Program

The Course for Completion Mastermind (for course creators)

*Note: At this time both of James Wedmore’s masterminds are full and therefore I am not linking to them in the show notes.

Jan 11, 2018
#192: Are You Embracing the “Visionary Role” In Your Business?
25:50

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

As you listen to me figure out what I really want to be as a leader I want you thinking about this for yourself, and how you can implement these three steps and transform your business in the next year. Being intentional about setting my vision for each year has shifted the way I think about my business, and I want the same for you! Let’s start to work those visionary muscles...

Check out these highlights:

  • See how one of my favorite TV characters inspired my theme. [1:54]
  • How this all started with a simple quiz on an airplane ride. [6:58]
  • One person I definitely look up to as the iconic visionary leader. [10:46]
  • How to find your own visionary role model. [13:00]
  • Being real and vulnerable doesn’t necessarily clash with being professional. [13:52]
  • When your image online takes over your real-life identity. And how to prevent it. [17:38]
  • How to actually manifest your vision. [21:22]
Jan 04, 2018
#191: A Week in the Life (A Behind the Scenes Look Into My Business)
01:08:27

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • If you’re anything like me, you love to see behind the curtain, to what’s really going on with successful entrepreneurs.
  • Many of you have been asking me (for a while) to map out my day—what I plan to do, what I actually get done, how I use my time.
  • Well I’m taking it one step further and talking through an entire WEEK.
  • You’ll hear about my struggles. How I get into the flow. And when I couldn’t get it together. Oh, and the one podcast I’m obsessed with right now.

The truth is, my processes and habits are a big part of what makes my business successful. I’ve got BIG chunks of time carved out where I can stay hyper-focused and get what might take another person weeks to do. And I know that many of my students want to do that too. So I’m hoping you’ll learn a little something about how to optimize your routine with this episode...

Here’s How the Episode Breaks Down:
I’ll start the week with my Sunday session.

From there, each day I’ll check in during the Morning and talk about what the day is going to look like.

Then I’ll check back in during the Evening to chat about what actually happened.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • My personal and professional goals for the week (including my battle with one food that makes me feel sick). [7:08]
  • How I approach a new content project. [18:45]
  • My workday shutdown ritual. [24:47]
  • All about my co-working space and how it helps my business. [30:50]
  • My quality time with the hubby, Hobie. [34:51]
  • The 3 roles I play in my business. [38:06]
  • My new favorite podcast featuring one of my business idols. [41:23]
  • Jasmine Star and my first InstaLive. [43:00]
  • Where I ended up at the end of of the week. [1:03:01]
Dec 28, 2017
#190: How Getting ‘Niche Specific’ Evolved Into $12K/Month Automated Webinars
49:07

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Today this dog lover (me!) is talking cat grooming—but it’s not what you think :). I’m highlighting cat grooming as the starting point of what has become a lucrative business empire for my student and new friend, Danelle German.
  • Danelle started with one simple question (5:07) —and grew that focus to a business that now generates $12,000 a month on evergreen webinars ALONE. That’s not counting her speaking, curriculum deals, physical products and certification program.
  • Danelle is here to teach us: If you really want to make money in this online marketing world, you need to drill down and serve a specific audience.

You never know who you’re going to meet at live events, right? And I am so pleased that I got the opportunity to meet Danelle at a recent event, because she is the perfect example of starting small and scaling slowly and intelligently. (During today’s episode, you’re going to hear me say “genius” A LOT.) I encourage you to “listen beyond the cat grooming” and absorb how Danelle uncovered new opportunities to consistently build her business.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • The question that Danelle’s audience REALLY wanted answered. [5:29]
  • How difficult it was to focus on a small niche like cat grooming (when starting out)... [7:37]
  • Why you don’t need massive amounts of customers. [12:12]
  • How Danelle was able to avoid any tough competition. [14:45]
  • The secret element that made Danelle’s business so effective in the early days. [18:19]
  • Why it’s crucial to shed light on the problems your audience faces. [19:24]
  • How Danelle added a non-cat grooming audience to her repertoire. [22:33] And where she found them (so you can add your own sub-audience!).
  • Danelle’s experience on how she used Webinars That Convert to lock in her success.[29:05]
  • Why she switched to evergreen webinars. [32:30]
  • The unbelievable show-up rate Danelle sees on her webinars. [34:43]
  • How to find and nail your niche. [41:38]

Danelle on the Value of Staying in Your Zone of Expertise:
“If I am 100% confident in what I am talking about and what I am teaching and, ultimately, what I am selling to people, I am going to do a much better job. The further I get out of the scope of my area of expertise and skill set, that confidence begins to diminish. I keep it real tight around that skill set and that knowledge base and then grow from there.”
—Danelle German, Online Marketing Entrepreneur, National Cat Groomers Institute

Dec 21, 2017
#189: 3 Wins (and a Few Misses) From My Live Events
30:24

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • This year I made a big decision to open up what is typically a B-School bonus event, and do two one-day live events for ALL of my students.
  • There is something incredible about holding live events—the connections with your audience, the relationships you build, the amazing team building.
  • Which is exactly WHY I wanted to go behind the scenes and share the big learnings, and a few misses.
  • I know some of you are thinking about holding your own events, so I wanted to give you some steps to making sure you hold your own ultra-successful event. And for me, it all starts with the connecting opportunities. (18:02)

So if you have been thinking about using events as a great upsell, or a VIP experience, or maybe a new revenue stream, you will want to listen in to all the takeaways from this episode. For each point I walk through, I made sure to provide a “take action” piece for you so you can immediately apply it to your own event planning.

Let’s get started making events work for your business.

By the Way…
I mention Marie Forleo’s B-School and my over the top bonus package (with a free live event!) for those who signed up via my affiliate link. I rarely do live events so if you don’t want to miss it in 2018, click HERE to sign up for the wait list and get all the details once it launches.

Check out these highlights:

  • WHY I decided to open my events to all of my students. [2:18]
  • The art of layering elements for a fabulous experience (in other words: gifts!). [7:39]
  • The feeding frenzy I created—and how to get people to stay in the room and connect. [10:42]
  • Thinking about inviting guest speakers? Check out these criteria to help you choose. [16:30]
  • Why you should consider including a VIP experience.[20:00]
  • There’s always room for improvement… [21:22]
  • How to make Q&A time meaningful for everyone (and not have it drag on!). [23:35]
Dec 14, 2017
#188: What I Learned From a Year of Automating My Business
28:48

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • At the end of 2016 it hit me: I was working for my business instead of my business working for me. Can I get an “AMEN”?
  • So I had to make a BIG decision and explore an entire year of evergreen for my business this past year (2017) and limit my number of live launches.
  • In the spirit of pure transparency, I’m looking back on how the year went, and putting it all out there for you: the good, the bad, the (at times) ugly so you know how I made this decision, how I executed, and what I learned from the entire process. And how proud I am of my “bold move.”

Spoiler-alert for this episode: I thought my year of automation would be much easier than it was. I took a leap of faith, and now regret NONE of it. In fact, I’m a better leader and business owner because of it. Today I’ll break down the positive results, and some of the learnings along the way.

To make it truly actionable, I have broken this episode into four parts:
Part One: How I approached the year of automation [4:38]
Part Two: What happened and the results [10:58]
Part Three: What I learned [14:46]
Part Four: How I plan to move forward [24:55]

Check Out These Highlights:

Dec 07, 2017
#187: How to Use Pinterest to Generate Traffic and Profits With Jenna Kutcher
45:56

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • What IF instead of looking at Pinterest as just another Social Media platform, you saw it as a powerful search engine that can drive traffic for your business?
  • That’s exactly why I invited my guest today—photographer, podcaster and savvy business woman Jenna Kutcher. Because she has experienced the kind of amazing impact Pinterest can have on your business—in fact, Pinterest is the platform that drives the MOST traffic to her site: More than 5,000 unique visitors every single month. (Yeah, I couldn’t believe it at first either!)
  • Pinterest also (at times) gets a bad rap because it may not be the first site you think of to reach your core clients, which also couldn’t be more wrong.
  • I think first and foremost, a mindset shift around Pinterest is in order, starting here.

Yes, Pinterest can be THAT effective. And what I love about Jenna is that she holds nothing back. She’s the kind of gal that says what she’s thinking, or feeling, at any moment. I feel like this episode is in that same spirit—open, and raw. I think you’ll maybe change your mind about Pinterest, and find a new friend in Jenna.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why it’s so important to be vulnerable with your brand. [8:13]
  • Should you care about your number of followers on Pinterest? [19:06]
  • The first step you want to take with your Pinterest strategy. [21:35]
  • How to look like you are active on Pinterest (and make the algorithm work for you!). [25:12]
  • Proven ways to get the most mileage out of your content. [27:54]
  • Jenna’s favorite Pinterest tool (for scheduling AND checking your links). [31:16]
  • This one tip will guarantee you engagement on Pinterest. [35:11]
Nov 30, 2017
#186: How to Makeover Your Blog to Get More Traction with Julie Solomon
51:18

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

In the world of online marketing, all of the people I follow and look up to—and who I know are financially successful in their business—they all have a central hub where they create content on a weekly basis. And for most of them… it’s a blog.

So look no further for the connection between blogging and having a thriving business. Now I want to make sure you are using the strategies that really get results (v. blogging to crickets)—and that’s where Julie is the master. Let’s start your makeover.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • Find out why Julie calls her blog “the headquarters”.  [12:17]
  • Why it’s so important to know your avatar’s favorite Margarita flavor. [14:06]
  • The five core values a great blog post stems from.  [19:22]
  • Julie’s steps to stay consistent (it may not be what you think!) [23:13]
  • The biggest mistakes bloggers make. [27:10]
  • Julie’s favorite tools to promote her blog posts. [35:22]
  • How to know if you have a “healthy” blog. [38:02]
  • How your mom can help you optimize your blog. [41:53]
  • Trigger words: what are they and how you can use them. [45:00]
Nov 23, 2017
#185: All About Instagram Ads with Rick Mulready
39:27

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Rick Mulready is back to give the scoop on Social Media ads—but with a TWIST! We’re taking a break from Facebook ads (but don’t worry—much more to come as always on those!) and shining the light on his Social Media sister, Instagram.
  • Now just because these two are related, don’t think one size fits all when it comes to working with these platforms. Rick and I walk through the nuances of the difference between the two (especially when it comes to imagery, videos and placement).
  • Just in case you don’t think Instagram ads are worth for your business—keep in mind that there are 800 million Instagram users right now that are up for grabs.
  • AND if that’s not enough, if you have a product or service, Instagram can be an incredibly powerful platform for you. Just take a listen to these stats that Rick throws out. [7:39]

I gotta tell you, I love Instagram and feel that it’s a great time to grab your audience’s attention. So I’m shifting gears with Rick today so we can help you capitalize on the Insta Opportunity. I want you to dive in...and help me figure out the big question: Emoji or emoticons?

A special Easter Egg for today’s episode:
It turns out you DO need 10,000 followers in order to have the swipe up feature. (And on that same note, follow Rick on Instagram @rickmulready so he can get the followers he needs!) If you want to know what I’m talking about, check out our sidebar conversation on this.[21:00]

And a few great Instagram examples (including that story ad I ran):

Check out these highlights:

  • Let’s start this off with WHO exactly is on Instagram (so you know if you should be there!). [3:20]
  • What are the best days and times to post on Instagram? [5:00]
  • Where and how to set up your ads (on Facebook and Instagram). [10:39]
  • Which ad type would be best for your business and customers—and the parameters for each. [12:03]
  • The big differences between Facebook and Instagram (Here’s a hint: you CAN’T just repurpose one for the other). [13:17]
  • With Insta, do you have the same targeting possibilities as Facebook? [19:22]
  • How to take advantage of story ads (and what happened after I ran my first one for my List Builders Lab promo). [22:10]
  • Why you need to add text and emojis to your InstaStories. [28:16]
  • How to choose the right objectives when creating your Instagram ad campaigns. [28:59]
Nov 16, 2017
#184: How She Did It: From a Webinar False Start to a $30,000 Success Story
42:44

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • I’ve talked extensively about my epic fails with webinars—and I’ve also shared how I picked myself back up, practiced a ton—experimented—and just went for it. It wasn’t any different for my friend, video rockstar Luria Petrucci, who has an incredible webinar success story that you need to hear.
  • I want this episode to inspire you to take action on your own webinars. Because if Luria can do it (and spend only $600 on Facebook ads in the process!), you can too.
  • If you are a student of my Webinars That Convert program, this is the episode for YOU as Luria (a fellow student) highlights exactly which tips and insights worked well for her.
  • And if you don’t have anything to sell yet, you can use the exact strategy Luria used to put an offer out there. 

You may remember Luria from Episode 168 (The Easy Start Guide to Live Video), and I know I don’t usually bring guests back so quickly. But after hearing Luria’s story I knew you had to hear it too! So get ready. I really want you to take everything Luria learned to heart and think about how YOU can stretch yourself with webinars to get to the crazy results she proved weren’t so crazy after all. Also: Make sure you stay until the very end to learn how Luria kept her webinar attendees super engaged!

And one thing I want you to take advantage of...

If you are looking to up your webinar game, I have a must-see training where I take you behind the scenes of my actual webinar creation process: How to Create Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even if You Don’t Have a List). That’s right, I literally open the gates wide open and show you all of my webinar creation secrets, including example after example of my own webinar strategies. I absolutely know this will be incredibly valuable for your own webinar creation process, so make sure to book a time to watch.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why Luria was skittish about doing webinars at first. [2:30]
  • How “stealing” made Luria thousands of dollars on her webinar. [9:05]
  • How to align your content with your offer. [11:14]
  • Get a detailed walk-through of Luria’s amazing results after her webinar strategy overhaul (and a little mix-up with conversion rate numbers!). [17:30]
  • Our big-game changer webinar strategy. [24:58]
  • The best way to get your audience to connect with you on a deeper level and want to take the next step. [29:47]
  • Struggling with your own webinars? Luria has a few final thoughts. [36:50]
Nov 09, 2017
#183: How to Create Your Promotional Calendar
43:34

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Rules of Engagement Upfront:

  • I want you to take an entire day to do this process. I know, I know. No bellyaching. I don’t want you to feel rushed or pressured to get it done.
  • Pick a “special spot” to do this. If you want extra credit, book out a hotel room or a co-working space. If you’re going to do this at home, promise me you’ll send everyone away so you have the space to create, focus and think.
  • Don’t do this alone. Engage your virtual assistant or anyone on your team (either via Skype or fly them out!). I understand that you may be a “one-person show”—I encourage you to then find a friend or a peer that can be your sounding board.
  • Grab a whiteboard or a big sticky board. You’ll need a space to put your notes.

The freebie for this episode is EXACTLY WHAT YOU NEED TO PLAN:

You’ll hear me map out this entire process on the episode. Then, when you are ready to do your own plan, grab the step-by-step cheat sheet so you can work through this process for your own business. With this worksheet, you’ll know exactly how to plan for your 2018.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • Why your “non-negotiables” are crucial to your business success. [9:48]
  • The power of “declaring your number” and why it can drive your entire success for the New Year. [11:54]
  • How to get clarity on the past so you can plan for the future. [13:32]
  • The metrics you should come to the table with. [14:15]
  • What to ask yourself when you calendar your big promotions—a.k.a “the fun stuff.” [18:43]
  • Ways to make money in the next six months (to help get those creative juices flowing!). [19:52]
  • Don’t make this one mistake when planning out your promotions! [27:38]
  • Why you need white space between promotions. [30:45]
  • How to not let FOMO take you down in your planning process. [34:58]
Nov 02, 2017
#182: How to Mega-Batch Your Content
23:05

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Now if you’re thinking—this seems like too much work, I don’t know if I can handle this. Trust me, I get it. However, as a business owner, I don’t want you to get bogged down on details that don’t serve you. I want you to have the freedom and flexibility to focus on things that will really move the needle in your business. And I promise that mega-batching will help you get there.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • The 5 sessions I use for each batch. [9:35]
  • How I break up the recording of my podcast. [13:38]
  • Some of my favorite aspects of mega-batching. [16:41]
  • Tweaks I want to make for the future with this system. [18:58]
  • What I have planned for the podcast in 2018. [19:43]
  • Two final thoughts to help you start your own mega-batching efforts. [21:17]
Oct 26, 2017
#181: Eliminating Money Blocks with James Wedmore
41:54

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • There’s more to running a business than just steps and strategies. You’ve got to master your inner game: your core beliefs and thoughts.
  • There’s a big (and all-too prevalent) myth when it comes to your time and money: That the secret to success is to work hard and hustle. [6:47]
  • No one is exempt from dealing with money issues. So it’s time to face them.

“We gotta talk about money.” That’s what my dear friend and mindset maven James Wedmore said when I told him I wanted him back on the show to talk entrepreneurial mindset. James and I both think that money is a huge block when it comes to your business. So today I want to chat about some of the beliefs or blind spots that just might be holding you back from finding real success for your business. Do me a favor and just see if they feel true for you…

Check out these highlights:

  • The real 80/20 percent split when it comes to being an entrepreneur. [7:52]
  • We all have a relationship with money just like we all have a relationship with our mom, dad, spouse, friends, etc. [10:08]
  • One of my biggest money (limiting) beliefs, which stems from my childhood. [12:46]
  • Contrary to popular belief, money does not come from effort. [14:22]
  • Why  believing in abundance is an absolute for entrepreneurs like us. [15:48]
  • The easiest way to create new beliefs. [20:02]
  • How to get “passionately curious” and “play the scientist role.” [21:58]
  • This is WHY you really want things in life. [26:17]
  • A few ways to practice the power of gratitude. [30:27]
  • Final money mindset shifts from James. [32:57]
Oct 19, 2017
#180: 7 Ways I’ve Collaborated with Friends & Influencers to Increase Profits
46:44

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • On today’s episode I’m going to walk you through seven collaborations that I’ve done over the years that range from my very first time collaborating, and even feeling a little shy (but learning so much!) all the way to collaborations with some of the biggest names in online marketing.
  • I’m giving you the inside scoop into how those actually came to be, and some of the lessons I learned from each of these amazing experiences.
  • And here’s a BIG note to remember: The key to successful collaborations is found within your relationship with the person – not on what that person can do for you or what you can do for him or her. [13:24]

I know this from experience: Building your business for the long term is much easier when you can find peers and collaborators that you can build amazing relationships with. When you’re first starting out and you may not have much of a list or presence, you want to find collaborations that can help you find an audience for your business. So I hope you enjoy as I walk through my own experiences, and how I cultivated some of the best business relationships I have to this day.

The freebie for this episode is SO GOOD:

I’ve got the Top 10 questions you should ask YOURSELF if you’re considering any collaboration. It’s a checklist of sorts, where I talk about the criteria I personally use when I think about partnering with someone. If you get honest with these questions, you will save yourself a lot of stress and potential “business heartache” - it’s a thing, trust me.

Download it here and run through them the next time you’re thinking about a collaboration.

Check out these highlights:

  • Collaboration #1: My very “first time”: how I went in, what I learned from it and what I wish I’d done differently [4:14]
  • Collaboration #2: When and how I learned the real special ingredient for collaborations (here’s a hint: it’s all about trust) [9:50]
  • Collaboration #3: How I landed a key influencer [15:37]
  • Collaboration #4: The most successful affiliate marketing relationship I’ve ever had. (Spoiler alert: It’s all about B-School with Marie Forleo!) [20:50]
  • Collaboration #5: How I moved things into the real world (think small live event) with a weekend workshop collaboration [24:42]
  • Collaboration #6: I get asked all of the time about adding guest experts inside of your paid course…here’s a full explanation of what I typically do, with Jasmine Star as my shining example [32:24]

Collaboration #7: And I just couldn’t leave this one out… If you’ve ever wondered how Rick Mulready and I started working together, maybe you’d like to hear about the coffee date I didn’t really want to go to. [39:10]

Oct 12, 2017
#179: The Real Truth Why I Hate Video (Hint: It's My Weight)
10:00

I am a firm believer in changing things up, breaking a pattern, switching gears…

Today I’m doing all three.

Because I know it’s time.

The truth is, I’ve been holding back for a while.

I have finally decided that I’ve had enough of the BS, and the fear.

To know me is to know I don’t love being on video. And I have given a lot of excuses around that.

Time to come clean:

I hate video because I’m embarrassed about my weight.

Wow. It felt freeing just typing that.

So this podcast is my very open letter to you, dear listener. Because I owe you this openness—so I can (perhaps) also inspire you to come out and call out what’s been holding you back. And even give it a name.

This episode was a tough one to record. But worth it. 100% worth it.

Here I go.

Amy

Oct 05, 2017
#178: List Building + Social Media (What's Working Now)
48:26

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Right at this moment you should be thinking about your list building efforts. I want you borderline obsessed with list-building! This episode is key to your obsession, as today you’re getting every single one of my tested and tried tips and tricks for list building.
  • List building starts with a great idea for a lead magnet, and a great idea for a lead magnet always starts with your ideal customer avatar. And there is ONE big question I ask when I'm thinking about my ideal customer avatar. [6:14]
  • There’s a new player in the list building game that’s getting off-the-charts results. It’s VIDEO and when done right, it will boost your list growth—it’s all how you use it—and that’s part of today’s episode.

I know I’ve talked about list-building many times before, but here’s the thing: list building—when done right—can dramatically change your business (I should know, since it completely changed mine). So I want you to listen, then take immediate action of one or two of the strategies I mention.

Stay tuned for a NEW, FREE and LIVE webinar with yours truly ;-)

This is a training I’m doing by myself, and LIVE: “The Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan.” If you’ve ever felt behind in your list building, I’m going to show you how to get caught up quickly in terms of what to do inside your business to create a list-building foundation that can run on autopilot.

Check out these highlights:

  • How to come up with a great idea for a lead magnet. [5:08]
  • How to embrace video when it comes to list building. [10:06]
  • Confirmation emails—there’s so much more you can do with them! [17:25]
  • The right strategy for your nurture sequence. [21:33]
  • How calls-to-actions can make all of the difference with your campaigns. [24:45]
  • The tools I use (and how I use them) for my own list building. [27:05]
  • How and why I link my original free content to my list-building efforts. [40:11]

The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm)

Sep 28, 2017
#177: How to Design Your Ideal Week with Michael Hyatt
40:01

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Being productive is really not about “getting things done” and MORE about doing what’s inside your desire zone.
  • You’ve got your big “time savers” like productivity software, your smartphone, your hacks—but how is that all working out for you? These “resources” are actually cutting into your time!
  • You can transform your entire routine by defining your Ideal Week [26:39] (I know because I did it!).
  • There are four rituals you need to set yourself up for success. My guess is you are doing maybe one or two of these (at best) right now. So let’s UP your game.

What if you stopped telling yourself you needed to be more productive, and instead, focused on being free—to focus, be presentspontaneous, to do nothing. I know, kind of crazy, right? But that’s EXACTLY what my very special guest, Michael Hyatt, and I tackle today.

A quick bonus for listening:
I wanted you to see how the Ideal Week exercise (listen here to understand the concept of an Ideal Week) is working for me, including my morning and workday rituals. Click play below to watch how I am now planning out my week.

You’ll want to check out Michael’s new training:

So many times you are doing things in the name of “productivity” that are actually making you feel more overwhelmed and discouraged. I want you to start making real progress and feel in control. Michael will talk all about that and more in his free training, “The 7 Deadly Sins of Productivity: The Hidden Habits Undermining Your Performance (And How to Change Them).” Sign up here for free before it’s too late!

Check out these podcast highlights:

  • You want to live your life in ONE out of four zones. [5:42]
  • How to provide a “positive no.” [12:22]
  • Tips to automate tasks (beyond just using technology).  [15:44]
  • How to really structure your morning routine. [16:22]
  • The first step to optimizing delegation that so many miss. [22:22]
  • Your different “stage times” and how to allocate time for each. [26:51]
  • The power of “batching your meetings” to create more white space. [27:22]
Sep 21, 2017
#176: Steal My Podcast Project Plan!
46:21

Why you’ve got to listen to today’s episode:

  • A podcast can dramatically change your business by connecting you with your audience in a new and intimate way, each and every week.
  • Having a comprehensive system (and proven project plan!) can help you streamline your delivery of consistent weekly content.
  • You can truly scale your content efforts—and save a TON of time—if you use a little system called “batching” when planning.
  • There’s one list-building tactic that’s on my MUST list: freebies, or content upgrades. There’s definitely an art and science to implementing these the right way. [26:28]

Today I’m bringing together two of my passions—podcasting and systems—in the ultimate behind-the-scenes of my podcast episodes. And I’ve spared no detail. It’s all here—from how I come up with my topics, to how we publish the finished recording, I walk through it all.

And you’ve got to get today’s freebie:

It’s too good for words: a complete project plan of our process, ready for you to use at any time. I walk you through each of the six stages of podcast production, and even sprinkle in some insider notes. If you want to streamline your content creation, this one is a must for you.

And another quick bonus for today:

I made you a quickie video to walk through my podcasting equipment essentials. I think you’ll be pleasantly surprised by how simple my set-up is! Click play to watch now.

Check out these highlights:

  • My star podcast team members, and the roles you need for your own production [4:44]
  • One of the best and most prepared podcast guests I have ever hosted [9:36]
  • The new strategy I am using to get more content done in concentrated amounts of time [13:37]
  • Why your titles are so crucial in your production timeline [20:43]
  • How and why I am changing up my show notes [23:54]
  • The podcast and social media promotion: How I am experimenting [29:50]
  • The lowdown on all of the imagery I use for the podcast [33:55]
  • The advanced strategy I employ for Instagram [42:37]
Sep 14, 2017
#175: How I Went from Corporate to Consulting to Courses
53:30

You asked, and I’m bringing it: My story. And I mean ALL the details, of how I went from corporate to consulting to where I am today: courses.

My intention here is not to relive the old days—I’m doing this because you likely can relate to one of the three scenarios:

  • You currently are working in a corporate job, with thoughts of starting your own thing.
  • Your dream business is currently your #sidehustle and you’re looking to make it your full-time gig.
  • You no longer are tied to your J.O.B however your business model is not exactly what you’d like it to be. You want to move into online courses sooner than later.

Anyway you approach it, there are opportunities in front of you right now that you may not see as relevant to where you want to go. But that’s not true. Every step counts.

If I hadn’t taken a job at Harley Davidson, I wouldn’t have seen what building a community, or movement, looks like and thought, “That’s what I want.”

If I hadn’t worked for a matchmaking service, I wouldn’t have figured out that I hate sales.

And if I hadn’t said, ‘yes,’ to working on Tony Robbins’ creative team, I’m not sure any of what followed would have happened.

Speaking of working for Tony, I wanted to share the five core lessons I learned while working for Tony, from creating content, to making big decisions as a business owner, to shaping your mindset. I’ve put the lessons all down in my brand new freebie.

So, I’m breaking down my journey for you in five phases. In each one, I’ll tell you what I learned and the turning point that helped me move to the next phase. This is how each one breaks down:

Phase One: Corporate (or being “on the clock”)

Phase Two: Consulting (or really doing the Corporate thing for multiple bosses instead of just the one)

Phase Three: Courses (without a niche—so this was more of an experimental time)

Phase Four: Courses (with a niche nailed down)

Phase Five: Product Suite (or courses that can scale and ultimately put my business in the fast lane)

The biggest thing I want you to take away from my story is you don’t need to have it all figured out. You just need to move forward in any way you can, and from where you are now.

So let’s get into it … I was born on a rainy night in December … Ha! No, we’re not going that far back.

Let's start from my (career) beginning...

P.S Find out more about my live event, The Entrepreneur Experience at amyporterfield.com/events. The dates are October 21st or December 2nd, so don’t delay!

Sep 07, 2017
#174: 3 Hacks to Help You Get More Done in Less Time
43:07

When it comes to working smarter and not harder, you know the conventional wisdom: Manage your time, take breaks, get enough sleep, tackle the big projects when you feel the most focused, and the list goes on.

You know all this stuff, but why is it so hard to act on it? And even if you are applying some of those strategies (which are all good), you still find yourself with more work than you can possibly get done in a single day.

Enter Carey Bentley. She’s a productivity and accountability expert. Along with her husband, Demir, they founded Lifehack Bootcamp, a program designed to get you working more efficiently so you can create the lifestyle you want.

Now, Carey and Demir weren’t always experts at this—in fact, they once were raging workaholics, but they had to figure out another way because the way they were working was literally affecting their health.

Their secret is practice—hard, intentional, sweaty practice. You know, the way pro athletes practice. So think of productivity less like a class where you’re studying to pass an exam and more like a craft that you’re working to get better at all the time.

Here’s what you’ll learn:

  • The four phases of productivity and why you’re ultimately shooting to be like LeBron James. (Check those out at 11:54)
  • The four layers of accountability—with a coach, with a team, with a buddy, with your community—where you are closing off all escape routes by making yourself feel the pressure from all sides. (Carey starts to break down those levels at 16:19)
  • How to create a “Champagne Moment” that literally has you popping open a bottle every week (metaphorically, but you can take that literally too!).

Download this week’s freebie for a step-by-step walkthrough of this process. (You can think about your own moment at 15:18).

You’ll also hear Carey and I talk about the five limiting mindsets (OK that’s just really a nice way to say “excuses”) people adopt to NOT get things done. Have you ever complained about not having enough time or having too much on your plate? Yeah, me too. It’s time to shut that down. Carey and I talk about the first two on the show. You can get all five (and the “Champagne Moment” exercise) by downloading this week’s freebie.

No more procrastinating—time to move forward.

And as if this isn’t enough, Carey grabbed her hubby, Demir, and filmed an extra special video for your eyes only on steps to beat decision fatigue.

Aug 31, 2017
#173: Getting Started with Facebook Ads: The List Building Series (Part 2)
45:57

The deep dive into all things Facebook Ads continues with part two of my mini training with Rick Mulready.

In part one we discussed the importance of mapping out a strategy before you jump into scheduling your ads, as well as knowing how to target your ideal customer and build custom audiences using the Audience Insights tool. (Missed Part 1? It was SO GOOD and you can listen here.)

We’re going a little deeper in today’s second part by telling you how to set up your ads using the Power Editor and how to assess your performance by focusing on a few key metrics.

PART TWO
Getting to know the Power Editor. A Facebook ad consists of three elements— campaign, ad set and ad. The campaign is where you set the objective of the ad, such as page post engagement or website clicks. The ad set is where you select the targeting, budget and schedule for the ad. And the ad is where you have the image and text for your ad.

How to Create a Campaign:

Using metrics to evaluate ad performance. First, don’t look at anything related to how your ads are doing for 72 hours. Then, take a look at these numbers by going to the ads manager, clicking the performance dropdown menu and selecting customized columns to choose the stats you want to review.

These are the metrics to pay attention to:

Cost per lead (or conversion): In general, shoot for $9 and under on a lead. Sound high? You’ve got to be real about what’s happening with Facebook. It’s super competitive and that means it’s getting more expensive—yet it’s still the most cost-effective ad platform.

Landing page conversion rate: Your goal is at least 20% conversion. If you’re not there, look at the consistency between your ad and the landing page. Are you using the same text, color scheme and other graphical elements? Is the messaging consistent?

Click-through rate: If it’s less than 1%, that’s a sign that your ad is not resonating with your audience.

Relevance score: The closer you are to 10, the better. If it’s low, that means your ad isn’t relevant. The problem could be with your ad or with the audience you’re targeting.

Frequency score: If you’re at a 4 or higher, that means people are seeing your ad too many times and won’t look at it anymore. Try changing up the type of ad you’re showing.

If you’re happy with the metrics, start to scale. If not, use the data to figure out your next step. For example, if you’ve got a 2% click-through rate and a decent relevance score, but your cost per lead is high, that might mean something about your landing page isn’t consistent with your ad. Use the data to troubleshoot your campaign.

Remember: Become a student of Facebook ads! Research the strategy that works for you, and don’t be afraid to dive in and take some risks for your list-building efforts. Now is the time.

Aug 24, 2017
#172: Getting Started with Facebook Ads: The List Building Series (Part 1)
42:28

Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve dabbled with running a Facebook ads campaign, I want you locked into this jam-packed two-part episode of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast.

My good friend Rick Mulready, who knows Facebook ads better than anyone I know, helps me cover everything you need to know to get your Facebook ads off the ground.

PART ONE

Have a strategy. One of the biggest reasons entrepreneurs lose faith is because they put a bunch of money into ads without a plan, and then get disappointed when there are no returns.

Rick has a lot of great advice here, including why working backward from your end goal is the ultimate way to set yourself up for success.

We also explore questions like:

  • How do I convert Facebook fans into email subscribers?
  • What’s the key to attracting paying customers?
  • Can I build my list using Facebook ads, even if I don’t have anything to sell?

Target, target, target. You’ve got to get specific on your audience. This is one of the biggest advantages of using Facebook ads, and I want you to spend some time here. For example, if you’re a personal trainer, go beyond simply targeting people who exercise and target audiences that fit specifically within your areas of expertise or certain specific interests.

You can do so much more to refine your audience by looking at where they shop, what brands they like, how they exercise and more.

One of my favorite tools within Facebook Ads is Audience Insights because it allows you to educate yourself on the characteristics of your audience, based on people who already like your page. By doing this, you can better cater to the needs of existing customers and scale your business by targeting new potential customers with similar characteristics. (Check out my video below on how I use it in my business!)

Also, don’t miss Rick’s breakdown on how Facebook wants you to target. One thing we all know for sure is the more you do things Facebook’s way, the more the social media giant will like and reward you.

In part two, we get into the ins and outs of the Power Editor and what metrics you should be paying attention to. Don’t forget to check out the links below to other podcasts Rick and I have done on Facebook ads.

Let’s get back to basics.

 

Aug 17, 2017
#171: DIYing Your Business: 5 Areas to Focus On When You're Just Starting Out
41:15

I love HGTV. It’s easy to get hooked watching JoJo and Chip Gaines on “Fixer Upper” transform an old ranch home into something SPECTACULAR (with shiplap of course!), and I’m always picking up little tips that I can DIY along the way.

Because sometimes DIY is best.

A professional web designer or developer isn't always the answer.

And neither is a seasoned copywriter or Facebook ad consultant.

Here’s the truth: You’re an entrepreneur.

Which means, by nature, you’re a DIYer.

In fact, you probably started your business because you knew you could do something better yourself. You’re likely great at wearing many hats—owner, marketer, writer, developer, etc. AND, you may have to do things yourself for awhile because you don’t have a big team or a big budget (yet!).

I’m here to say, “You’re on the right track!”

I think there are some things you just have to DIY, especially when you’re a rookie entrepreneur. In the long run, your business and your tribe will be better off for it.

BUT, there aren’t enough hours in the day, week or month for you to do every single thing yourself. So these are the five things I believe are crucial for you to take on in the beginning:

  • Website (Listen in at 4:40)
  • Copywriting (Listen in at 11:05)
  • Marketing (Listen in at 16:25)
  • Facebook Ad Campaigns (Listen in at 21:16)
  • Money (Listen in at 26:55)

None of these might seem like small potatoes—and they’re not—but I’ve got some resources below to help ease the learning curve.

Also, hang out with me until the end and I will answer the question that crosses every entrepreneur’s mind on this topic: How long do I need to keep doing these things myself?

Let’s roll up our sleeves and get to work.

Aug 10, 2017
#170: How to Get the Big Stuff Done When Life Gets in the Way
31:52

It’s so incredibly easy to get caught up in busywork or to let your phone or email start controlling your schedule. Before you know it, a whole day (or several) has gone by and you don’t have anything real to show for it.

Let that happen too much and you lose serious momentum—not to mention not getting tasks done that will actually grow your business.

I don’t want that happening to you. So I’m sharing the five strategies I use to stay or get back in the zone whenever I start drifting off.

Here’s a brief summary:

#1: Set your priorities daily. Sometimes it seems like every action item is crucial, but that’s not true. Responding to emails and recording new videos for your course do not rank the same. I’ll share some advice from my good friend Michael Hyatt, who puts a limit on the number of big tasks he works on every day.

#2: Be clear about WHAT and WHY. You’ll hear me talk about how a lack of clarity kept me from getting one project done.

#3: Power up. I’ll talk about how I get my creative batteries to reach a “full charge.”

#4: Schedule your day for success. Devoting an hour here and there to a big project means you may not be finishing it anytime soon. I’ll share the strategy I use to make sure I have focused time.

#5: Say it out loud. Making a bold, public statement, like I did about  reworking List Builders Lab, forces you to deliver. I’ll go over the best way to make this kind of public commitment.

And then, of course, I’ve got a bonus strategy that I share at the very end of the show. It’s a way to pick yourself up when things get a little tough.  

It’s time to shove those distractions to the side and get focused.

Jul 27, 2017
#169: How to Pitch Yourself to Land Bigger Opportunities Online
47:46

Isn’t running a business like giving one pitch after another? Think about it. You’re an entrepreneur. That means you’re constantly pitching potential and existing customers, students and fans.

So as intimidating as pitching an editor at Forbes or the Huffington Post may sound, you’re already doing it to some extent in other parts of your business.

Landing more media opportunities will do a lot of great things for your business, like help you grow your email list, establish more street cred, and create more demand for your products and services. That’s why it’s more than worth your time to figure out how to pitch yourself successfully to media organizations and outlets.

The question is: what’s the difference between a knockout pitch and the thousand other pitches that find their way into the trash?

I’ll tell you exactly how. And to help me, I’ve got my friend Jennifer Berson joining me on this podcast episode. Jennifer was a lawyer working at a prestigious firm before she decided to follow her inner creative voice and start Jeneration PR, an ultra successful public relations and social media marketing firm.

Jennifer shares all the amazing tips, tricks and tidbits that will get you closer to landing the podcast, blog or social media show you’ve always dreamed about being featured on.

And, don’t forget to download this week’s freebie. It’s a pitch template, based on the formula Jen delivers during the show. All you have to do is fill in the blanks and you’re that much closer to landing your next big media hit.

Today Jennifer is helping me answer questions like:

  • Why is it so important that you know the RIGHT way to pitch
  • Where do you start?
  • How do you position yourself as an expert without a large following or customer base?
  • How should you structure your pitch?
  • What are the biggest pitch mistakes?

Let’s start pitching.

Jul 20, 2017
#168: The Easy Start Guide to Live Video with Luria Petrucci
48:44

Video is where it’s at, folks. That’s why this latest episode is coming from my brand new studio—which, by the way, has taken me FAR outside of my comfort zone. But I wanted to take my video content to a higher level this year and that’s exactly what I’m doing, with help from my good friend Luria Petrucci of Live Streaming Pros.

After Luria (and her partner David Foster) set up my studio, I wanted to hear all about her approach to video, including her recommendations on everything from equipment to tips for preparation and overall content flow.

First, Luria and I break down the four different levels of live streaming, talking about what they entail, along with the pros and cons. (These levels are so insightful, I can’t wait for you to hear about them and decide which level you are operating at currently.)

By the way—don’t forget to download my video gear guide freebie. You’ll find out what I’ve got going on in my new studio, as well as different alternatives if you are just getting started.

You will also learn some tips for being your most natural self on camera along with Luria’s formula for rocking out a mobile live stream.

Luria and I cap it all off with the 3-part strategy for how to create video content that really engages with your audience.

Go listen to this episode about all things video now.

Jul 13, 2017
#167: Your 4x4 Gut Check: Are You Moving Your Biz Forward?
37:44

The one thing nearly every entrepreneur I know, including myself, NEVER does is STOP. You’re in the fast lane practically all of the time because there’s so much to do!

The problem is that because you’re going a million miles an hour, you often sacrifice important parts of the creative process of any endeavor or business: creating the space needed to slow down and imagine what could be for your business.

So this week, I’m going to put aside all the talk about Facebook ads and webinar funnels to pause for a moment and answer a question that’s equally as important.

How are you feeling about your business right now?

Now, I know. You’re saying, “Jeez, Amy. I don’t have time to think about that. I’m too busy actually running my business.”

I totally understand. I don’t check in with myself and answer that question nearly enough either. Today I’m giving myself permission to not only do that on this podcast episode but to also share my answers with you.

As I go through and reveal where I am in my business right now, I want you to be thinking about or writing down where you are at the moment too. I’ve given you a freebie—a quick cheat sheet—to help you do just that.

First, I’m going to do a gut-check on the four major categories that are (hopefully) driving your business forward.

Then, you’re going to do something really fun—IMAGINE WHAT’S POSSIBLE.

I’ll tell you about the big jump I’m making right now (and it’s definitely putting me outside of my comfort zone), as well as some of the smaller things I’m doing to keep things fresh.

Lastly, I’ve got a SUPER important question I ask myself every single quarter (that I want YOU to start asking every three months).

Don’t forget about the freebie; you’ll want it to take stock of how you are doing with six months to go in 2017.

Gut check time. See you there.

Jul 06, 2017
#166: How to Rework Your Struggling Online Course
55:40

I had to eat a big slice of humble pie recently when it came to reworking one of my courses. It was ALL worth it, because today I get to share with you the exact steps I used to rework my List Builder’s Lab (LBL) program.

I love LBL, however I knew it was time for a change when I realized my students weren’t crossing the finish line like I wanted them to. So I had to swallow my pride and get to work.

And I’m sharing the entire process with you today.

This episode is all about figuring out when it’s time for a rework, how extensive it should be, and managing the process so you get it done and roll it out as efficiently as possible. By the end of it you’ll be able to answer:

  • When is it time to re-work my course?
  • Do I need to re-work or update my course? And what’s the difference?
  • How do I start the process? (You’ll learn my 5-step process here.)
  • What’s the timeline? How quickly can I get this done?
  • What about my existing students? Do they get the latest version for free?

As a preview, my first step is to survey my students. Listening to them is the most critical part of this whole process. To make it easier, I’m giving you the survey I used for reworking List Builder’s Lab.

In addition to the questions I asked, I’ve added some extra commentary on why I asked those specific questions.

Let’s go check out those 5 steps.

 

Jun 29, 2017
#165: How to Troubleshoot Your Biggest Webinar Challenges
51:41

There are a ton of moving parts in pulling off a successful webinar. The good news is, with so many variables, there’s a lot you can do to turn your webinar into a hit. You’ve just got to get really good at investigating what may have gone wrong.

I’ve got you covered on how to do that in this week’s podcast. Even better is the freebie that goes along with it.

If you’ve ever wished for a webinar checklist to keep you on track, consider it granted with Your Webinar Problem-Solving Toolkit, a series of checklists, organized by category, to help you zero in on trouble areas.

Along with the deep dive I’m about to do on your toughest webinar challenges, I’m also talking about a strategy I’m using right now in my business. This is the first time I’ve shared it. You don’t want to miss this part because it basically shows you how to identify anything and everything that could go wrong in a webinar campaign or any other kind of marketing effort you’re doing.

But before I get to that, I’m covering:

Challenge #1: My Facebook ads aren’t getting traction! Get ready to hear a lot about targeting and retargeting.

Challenge #2: My webinar registration page isn’t converting! You may need to refresh the look and feel with something simpler. Here’s an example of one of my reg pages that I talk about in the episode here.

Challenge #3: My webinar isn’t converting! You don’t want to miss this part because this is where I share the thing I’ve never talked about before and it’s been a game-changer for my business.

Here’s a bit of advice as you listen.  Do NOT try and implement all of the things I tell you to right away. Just focus on ONE. Whether it’s tweaking an image in a Facebook ad or redesigning your registration page, you’re taking baby steps.

Don’t forget to download the freebie, either after you’ve listened or before.

OK, let’s go troubleshoot.

 

Jun 22, 2017
#164: Free Content vs. Paid Content (What’s the Difference?)
27:48

Nothing will grow your business faster than sharing your expertise through blogs, podcast episodes, Facebook Live broadcasts, freebies, and more. All of that is content gold that you give away for free.

The key question here is how do you know where to draw the line between free and paid content? AND, is it possible to give away too much for free? I answer those questions and more in this episode of the podcast.

By the end of the show, you’ll know:

  • My three core differences between free and paid content
  • The key principles I use for free vs. paid content
  • Examples of how I do this in my business with my courses, using my podcast, and other kinds of content

And if you are feeling like your creative pipeline is beginning to dry up, you’re really going to enjoy this week’s freebie. It’s my new and improved “10 Free Content Triggers” guide for developing cheat sheets, blueprints, checklists and more. I’ve reworked this into something that’s pretty hot and trust me, you don’t want to miss it.

Ready to learn how to differentiate your free and paid content? Get all of the goods here.

Jun 15, 2017
#163: Demystifying the Facebook Pixel
01:01:31

Do you know who’s visited your website in the last 24 hours? What about who visited your most recent blog post but while visiting your site did not sign up to get your latest freebie? Do you know who’s watching just for the first few minutes of your latest Facebook video but then moving on to something else?

Welcome to Facebook Pixel Optimization. Don’t be nervous! We’re going to ease into all you need to know with my Facebook ad guru Rick Mulready, who can break down the Power Editor like Stephen Hawking does the universe.

These are the questions Rick and I tackle in this episode:

  • What is the Facebook pixel? What does it do?  (Yes, a few fundamentals just in case you are new to this environment!)
  • How do I set it up?
  • When do I use it?
  • What are event codes?
  • How does it measure efficiency? Where can I see the data?
  • What’s the difference between a Facebook account pixel and a conversion pixel?
  • Why do I have to put the pixel on specific web pages when it’s already on my website?
  • How is the pixel related to retargeting?
  • Why do my Facebook conversion stats differ a lot from my LeadPages notifications for the same campaign?
  • What are the essentials for running an effective retargeting ad campaign?
  • How can I use retargeting for people who watch my Facebook Live videos?
  • After someone views a blog post with the pixel, how long do I have to retarget them?

Phew. That’s a lot, right? And that’s not all! Download Rick’s article, “The Complete Guide to the Facebook Ads Pixel,” and you will become a pixel master in no time.

Jun 08, 2017
#162: The New Rules of Facebook Marketing
51:32

As quickly as Facebook changes, there are some things that are as true today as they were a few years ago:

  • Facebook cares more about its users vs. the marketers.
  • Likes, comments, shares, views, and clicks are gold—the more, the better.
  • The more personal you are and the more you do to generate real and valuable interaction, the more your fans will engage (by liking, sharing, etc.).

Now, HOW you accomplish those three points has changed A LOT. Why? Well, there are few reasons.

You’ve heard me talk about the infamous Facebook algorithm, and while I’m not going to nerd out on all of its particulars (there are hundreds), it does have everything to do with how many of your fans are actually seeing your posts.

If you start to understand just a little bit about how it works, you can get smarter about the kind of content you’re creating. Feel me?

I’m going to tell you how to do that by sharing my:

Along the way, you’ll hear me talk about how I’m implementing some of these new rules in real time, like video. Creating more video is a HUGE priority for me this year (so much so that I’m even building a studio in my house—pics to come on Facebook and Instagram soon!).

Starting this week I’m doing weekly Facebook Live videos (go to facebook.com/amyporterfield to find out when) where we’ll talk about some of the content on the podcast and more. And I’m going to be incorporating more video into my posts.

You already know that video is huge with Facebook. What kind of video to create is also critical—and an important part of this episode—because the more you make viewers stop, watch and unmute your video, the more Facebook will reward you by pushing your videos out to larger segments of your community.

For examples of what types of videos to model, make sure to download my 2017 Ultimate Guide to What’s Working Now on Facebook. It’s loaded with examples of video you can use to start reimagining your Facebook engagement strategy right NOW.

 

Jun 01, 2017
#161: Love & Business: How to Make it Work
49:53

If you think being an entrepreneur is tough, try being married to one.

Just ask Hobie Porterfield (as I do in this episode).

You’ve heard me talk about my hunky husband from time to time, and just how important he is to the success of my business. But I’ve never really talked about what that means exactly.

In isolation, running a business and keeping a marriage together are tough. Together?

It’s an entirely different beast. The fact is, entrepreneurship brings a very different dimension to a marriage.

People with 9-to-5 jobs usually work in organizations that provide support, training and resources. Entrepreneurship can be isolating, which is one reason we often turn to our spouses or significant others for support.

So today, Hobie and I are talking about what the road has been like for us.

In this episode we reveal:

  • Why Hobie thinks the significant other is 40% of your business success
  • My recent ‘aha’ moment about what it means to REALLY spend time together
  • How we give each other what we need, EVEN during the most stressful times
  • The five most important things we do to make our marriage work

We’re in a pretty awesome place now, but it wasn’t always that way, and we figure out something new every day, including us coming up with a trigger word (it’s a celebrity name - can you guess which one?) to bring me back to him when my iPhone has got me sucked in!

This is every bit as important (probably more) as planning your next big launch or creating a new marketing funnel. You’ve got to nurture your personal relationships with the same care, intensity and passion as you do your business.

Go listen here now, your main squeeze will thank you for it, I promise ;-)

May 25, 2017
#160: Behind the Scenes of My Website Redesign
52:54

Here’s the thing: businesses evolve and grow. Mine has (and so will yours). And what worked a few years ago for my website is no longer reflective of where I am today.

If you know it’s time for a website revamp, let this serve as your roadmap of sorts. While you may make different decisions than I did, the overall message you should take away is the same: You need to be intentional and strategic about every part of your site.

For example, deciding what to feature on the homepage will influence so many other things like navigation, the sitemap, overall user experience, and ultimately, conversions.

(If you simply don’t have the bandwidth to take on this kind of project right now, listen to this episode as a resource you can use when you’re ready (make sure to download the freebie and save it to your computer!).

Here’s how the episode breaks down:

Part 1—Planning: Learn some of the questions you MUST have answers to before you even think about development.

Part 2—The Map: Why you have to plot out every page (and I walk you through why my homepage is laid out the way it is).

Part 3—The Miscues: My five biggest flops, like not including my team in the process. Yeah. Smooth move, Amy.

Part 4—Your Decision: Find out the elements my designer, Jessica, says you must have for success.

PLUS, don’t forget to download the 10 Essential Elements for Your Website freebie. It’ll save you some headaches, I promise!

One last thing—if you can, go to my website’s homepage (amyporterfield.com) as you listen so you can see some of the elements I talk about during the episode.

 

May 18, 2017
#159: How I Found, Hired and Work With My Project Manager
53:47

When you’re just starting out, you can manage everything on your own. And you probably have to—until you’re generating revenue. As soon as that happens, things change. Priorities shift. To-do lists grow. New ideas, projects and opportunities pop up every day, all of which are left for you to juggle with.

What if you had the right support to help keep you and your business not only in check, but growing?

Imagine that new email campaign copy you’ve avoided writing for days has been broken down, researched and organized in such a way that it almost feels like you’re just filling in the blanks.

Imagine you’re no longer prioritizing and checking off each box of your to-do list, rather it’s a document that lives with someone else, somewhere else—far, far away from you.

Imagine you’re no longer the gatekeeper of every new project, launch, contractor or task. Your project manager (or PM) is handling it all for you.

On this podcast episode I start the conversation about why this role is (or will be) essential for your business.

By the end of the episode you’ll know:

  • What a PM could do for your business (immediately and long term)
  • Where to find a PM
  • When you’re ready for a PM (and how much one costs)
  • Why “TEA time” with your PM is crucial for success

Plus, I’m lifting the curtain to show you how I found, hired, trained and integrated my crazy awesome PM, Chloe, into my business.

Do me one quick favor before you start listening: Download this week’s freebie, and get your Project Manager Hiring Toolkit. Job description? Check. New hire survey? Check. Even if you are not ready to hire just yet, GET IT NOW to have when you need it!

 

May 11, 2017
#158: Saving Sales & Rescuing Refunds
01:04:36

You know how intense launches are from start to finish, right? You’ve heard me say here repeatedly that you’ve got to think through every part of it. And in so many ways, once that cart opens, you’ve got to double your efforts to save sales. Then once those carts close, you have to get scrappy to keep those new customers happy, and rescue any potential refunds.

There are going to be so many people who just can’t make a decision about you. Even after you’ve given everything by building a superior course or program, with every bell and whistle an online student could wish for.

However, the doubt surfaces because most folks are just looking for a way out (revisit Episode #156 with my good friend Russell Brunson later for more).

Your job is to not let them find a way out, and the best, most effective way to do that is to meaningfully connect with your customers as much as possible. This episode is loaded with strategies on how to save potential sales during your next promo and ensure you don’t get a bunch of refunds, including:

  • How to hone your refund policy. (Ever wondered why mine is so strict? I talk about it in this episode.)
  • Why your webinar Q&As are critical to your promotion success.
  • How you can empower and engage new students with your onboarding emails.

Because I’m covering A LOT of ground with this episode, I want you to download the freebie so you have a handy list of the 5 Strategies to Save Your Sales and 7 Ways to Rescue Potential RefundsI’m also giving you the exact phone script I used when I offered a 1-800 number during a launch. That’s TWO great reasons to download, so make sure you secure that freebie and put it in a safe place for your next launch.

Also: Stay on until the end because I’m going through the pros and cons of whether you should drip the content in your program and how that decision can impact your refund rate.

 

May 04, 2017
#157: The Bonus Brainstorm: How to Create a Bonus Package for Your Next Course Offer (Rebroadcast)
48:25

I don’t know about you, but I’m the type of person who loves to pick up a book I’ve read a bunch of times already, read it again, and find new takeaways.

I love doing that, because I know every time I’m reading that book I’m in a different place in my life, making me see the insights in a new light.

In that same spirit: There was such an overwhelming response to the original episode I recorded on creating compelling bonuses, that I wanted to rebroadcast this episode, with a new take.

So not only am I teaching you the bonus strategies that have worked for me and my business, but I’ve got an all-new insight that I wanted to share that’s made a BIG difference in my launch results.

Here’s a little of what I’ll cover in this mini-workshop all about creating bonuses:

  • Strategies that have worked to drive sales for me over and over again
  • How to incentivize buyers to buy on cart open day (instead of waiting!)
  • The best bonuses to offer for an affiliate launch

Then I want you to implement what you’ve learned in this workshop and download my worksheet—I give the five steps for creating extraordinary bonuses for your product EVERY TIME. This is a must have exercise to help you create bonuses that convert.

I also give you a new full-pay bonus strategy that worked for me recently. As promised in the episode, here is how I positioned the three group coaching calls:

And since I do not explain the live small group coaching calls on the webinar, I made sure to include some details about the bonus on the sales page:

So whether you are offering a full-pay, fast-action or 48-hour bonus, if you want to position your program or product to demand higher prices, get more customers into your program, and have a compelling way to get potential buyers off the fence, make sure to walk through this mini-training.

 

Apr 27, 2017
#156: Expert Secrets & Online Strategies with Russell Brunson
47:21

In online marketing, no one knows how to build a movement better than super entrepreneur Russell Brunson. You’ve probably heard me talk about his very popular software company ClickFunnels, but he’s also got a coaching company, a supplements company and he’s a best-selling author with a new book out called Expert Secrets (get your free copy at amyporterfield.com/secrets).

In this episode of the podcast, Russell shares some of the book’s juiciest concepts, including:

  • Why 1,000 true fans are all you need to build a movement through your business.
  • How to create a sweet spot in the market you serve and how to find new opportunities in it (because that’s where all the gold is).
  • The rules you must live by to play like a boss.

You’ll find an amazing amount of practical strategies; from identifying your ideal market niche and leading them to create new opportunities, all the way to understanding the REAL reasons why people buy your stuff and why charging what you’re worth actually shows you care more than anything else. Through it all, Russell is soooo good at breaking down the consumer psyche and giving you the confidence needed to build the business of your wildest dreams.

I loved this book so much and I know you will too—that’s why I’m giving it to you for free. All you have to pay for is the shipping and handling. So make sure you go to amyporterfield.com/secrets to get your copy now. This offer won’t last long so make sure you do it NOW.

 

Apr 20, 2017
#155: The New 'FB Messenger Ads' with Rick Mulready
37:54

Facebook ad expert, Rick Mulready, is back to talk about a tremendous new Ad tool that he’s already leveraging to drive major results in his business.

If you’re starting to hear more about Facebook Messenger Ads, it’s for good reason. You’re probably one of the billion people who use the Messenger app to chat with family and friends instantaneously every day.

But what if an ad popped up from your favorite clothing store and just by clicking it you could ask about one of their new products? Better yet, what if a rep from that store gets back to you immediately.

BAM. That’s the beauty of Facebook Messenger ads for your customers. (It’s the first ad type that gets your ideal customer avatar talking with you instantly.)

Now for you, this means being able to answer questions or address objections to your programs and courses in real time, like during a launch when you’re trying to close more sales.

Today Rick and I go inside why this new format is climbing the charts and how you can take advantage of it right now.

In the episode, Rick talks about his experience using Messenger Ads for the first time. Make sure to listen to get all the details about how this ad below performed for him!

I’ve also included some screenshots of what the interface looks like when you’re creating the ad inside of The Power Editor. It’s super easy. You can check it out step by step below.

Step 1: Go to ads creation in Ads Manager or Power Editor.

Step 2: Choose the Traffic objective and complete your Campaign name, adset name, and ad name.

Step 3: Under the adset level, select website or messenger. Continue by Choosing your audience, budget and placement.

Step 4: At the ad level, Choose the Page you want to connect

Step 5: At the ad level, select your image/video and copy. Choose a welcome message. When people click on your ad, they will automatically be directed to Messenger and receive a copy of your ad and the welcome message.

*You can select any call-to-action button, in addition to ‘Send Message’. A Messenger icon will appear next to this call-to-action button in the ad.

*NOTE: Your ad to open conversations in Messenger won’t appear to people on mobile who don’t have the Messenger app.

So ready to tackle a new world of Facebook Messenger ads? Get all the starter details here—and don’t forget to sign up for Rick’s brand new webinar, “How to Create an Automated Facebook Ads System That Gets Leads & Sales Every Day.” I think we all need a bit of that magic!

Apr 13, 2017
#154: 7 Content Creation Ideas to Use When You’re Feeling Uninspired
36:41

Don’t you wish for a button you could push to get your creative brain synapses firing when it seems like they’ve gone on vacation?

While we’re waiting on that magic, I’ve got something to bring you back into the light because we’re all human, right? You may be the most creative person EVER, but for whatever reason, there are times when content inspiration is elusive and it is a battle to come up with something new.

This is especially true when you’ve been in the game for a while and feel like you’ve covered every angle of your industry. The good news is there are always more directions you can explore.

Here’s a quick tease of the strategies I talk about on today’s show to help you create new content when you feel less than gung-ho:

  • I’ll tell you about how I just dusted off some old content and gave it a new fresh spin (and how you can do the same thing with your own pieces!).
  • The sure-fire way I ALWAYS am inspired to create new content (it involves me first and foremost stepping away from my laptop…).
  • You’re not alone in creating your content. In fact, you have a HUGE resource for new content that you may not have thought of...

Make sure you stay on until the end when I reveal the process I use to ensure I am always delivering top-notch content. If an idea doesn’t make it past one of these phases, I don’t do it. Period.

And check out my ‘10 Days of Inspiration’ one-pager freebie because, unfortunately, you can’t always wait for inspiration to hit you. You have deadlines. Sometimes, you have to hunt that inspiration thing down yourself. This will help get the ideas flowing, I promise!

 

Apr 06, 2017
#153: 3 Ways to Get More Mileage Out of Your Course (Especially If You Have a Small List)
47:53

You know that feeling after you’ve just poured blood, sweat and so many tears into building something, like, say, an online course?

There is nothing like the feeling of accomplishment that comes with building a course! So of course you want to make sure you are marketing it effectively.

Enter Victoria Gibson, online business coach and mentor extraordinaire. She’s all about helping entrepreneurs get BIG results with their online courses and coaching programs. One of her clients built a 7-figure business in two years following the principles she is going to talk to us about on this episode.

Here’s a quick preview:

  • Is your program loaded with videos, downloadable audio and PDF worksheets? What about actual one-on-one time with you? That’s right. Your course may need more of YOU. Don’t worry, that doesn’t mean endless hours spent Facetiming.

  • If you’re just starting out, you may be thinking, “Well, how could I possibly charge more than $97 for my course?” When the REAL question may be how could you not charge MORE?

  • Feeling repetitive? You’re doing it right. Your customers need to hear your core message a lot. Plus, being consistent and clear is what will later allow you to expand once you’ve nailed your message and built a mighty (no matter what size) community that loves what you’re giving them.

Get ready to hear all of the crucial course-selling knowledge Victoria is dropping.

*Correction: Stay tuned for my next amazing interview with Rick Mulready in Episode 155

Mar 30, 2017
#152: How to Avoid FOMO in Your Biz & Make Better Decisions
31:11

When a new opportunity comes along, do you immediately jump for joy to be a part of something new and exciting, or are you cautiously weighing your options?

The thing is: Are you choosing things that are really driving your business forward or do you have a case of FOMO (fear of missing out)?

And trust me, I’m your girl when it comes to all the various ways FOMO can creep into how you’re operating and end up costing you in the long run.

After a few expensive missteps (one to the tune of $20,000; more about that here), I’ve gotten really good at saying, “No,” to the things that don’t fit the stage of growth I’m in with my business right now. Did you read that last part?

I said, “RIGHT NOW.”

And that’s important because we’re not talking about how to say, “No,” on this week’s show. We are talking about how to intelligently evaluate those shiny, fun, killer sounding opportunities that come your way and make everything inside of you shout, “Hell, yeah!”

But is it really “Hell, yeah!”, or is it more of a “maybe later”?

To help you figure it out, we’re talking about the 3 critical questions I ask myself every time a new or unexpected opportunity comes my way.

Listen to the show and then download my new One Page Evaluator freebie. It helps you figure out how to answer those questions, and includes a few extras that will really help you drill down the next time you have a big decision to make.

Mar 23, 2017
#151: 38,000+ Members in 2 Years: Tips to Building a Highly Engaged Facebook Group with Jill & Josh Stanton
49:48

Let’s rewind for a sec. Back in episode #146, I dished on Facebook groups. This is one of the bold moves I want you to consider making in 2017, because if you take the time to do it thoughtfully, it could be a tremendous game-changer for your business.

No one knows that more than Jill and Josh Stanton. In just two years the Facebook group they built for their ‘Screw the Nine to Five’ business has skyrocketed from less than 7,000 members to nearly 40,000.

You’re going to hear us talking about a lot of wicked smart strategies they are using to maximize the impact of the group on their business—list-building, selling, cross-promoting, sexy funnels and more.

BUT, pay attention to me here because I don’t want you getting overwhelmed. Keep your eyes on the prize as you listen to the podcast (and lose your mind over all the cool things that Jill shares).

The point of a Facebook group is engagement. The more you do that, by asking questions, listening and showing up in general, the more you’re going to know about what your audience wants and needs.

That’s the magic fairy dust your group will sprinkle so you really can see, hear and feel your audience, as well as show them mad love by delivering content that will make a difference in their lives.

Some of the topics explored include:

  • Cracking the code on how to find out what your group members truly WANT. (Hint: Polls are everything.)
  • Using the group to build your email list and cross-promote your other programs. (For example, the Stantons market their membership site inside the group, which serves as an entry point for their sales funnels.)
  • Striking a harmonious balance between free content shared in the group with paid content in a membership site or whatever you’re selling.
  • Keeping content organized inside of the group.
  • Managing the group, especially the bigger it gets. The kind of support needed, as well as how often you need to get involved.
  • The role Facebook Live can play in the group. (You’ll love the unique way Jill and Josh are using it OUTSIDE of their group too!)

This episode is LOADED. Listen up.

Oh, and one more very exciting thing. I did my first ever ‘after show’ with Jill and Josh. There was just so much to cover. Download it here and listen to more of our chat on their Facebook group do’s and don’ts, why the group should be about YOU and the value of connecting your members.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get the After Show with Jill and Josh Stanton

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Mar 16, 2017
#150: [Case Study] How to Turn a Pre-Launch Strategy Into a Wildly Profitable Online Launch with Terri Cole and David Vox
01:17:22

You know how I feel about having a pre-launch strategy—it’s crucial for success. Last week’s episode was all about the nuts and bolts of creating a successful pre-launch strategy.

Today’s episode makes that plan truly actionable, as I deliver a case study of what that blueprint looks like in the real world.

I talk to my good friends Terri Cole and David Vox who implemented a pre-launch strategy well in advance of their launch . . . and guess what followed?

A wildly successful 6-figure launch they can now implement over and over again, and expect amazing results.

Just a little background: Terri is a New York-based psychotherapist and founder of the Real Love Revolution, which has helped thousands of women transform their lives. David, Terri’s business partner, is a marketing and branding expert who’s produced over 150 transformational coaching programs.

Get your notebook (or laptop) ready because not only are we talking about the seven specific steps they followed, we geek out on numbers—email open rates, webinar sign-ups, sales conversions, total revenue, social media and email list growth, Facebook ad spend (which will blow your freakin’ mind), and more.

Take notes. AND stay on until the end because that’s when we talk about some of the things they won’t ever do again and what they’re planning to do next time around.

Also: If you haven’t downloaded my 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint freebie, you might just want to grab that while you listen along to this week’s episode.

These are the key steps they followed:

Step 1: Launch a pilot program.

Step 2: Survey your list.

Step 3: Built a main platform (Terri and David chose YouTube).

Step 4: Create a launch freebie.

Step 5: Create a free, closed community inside of Facebook.

Step 6: Create a 21-day challenge for that private Facebook community.

Step 7: Cart opens—launch with a multi-webinar strategy.

*NOTE: Steps 1 through 6 are all PRE-LAUNCH SPECIFICS.

Let’s dive in!

Once you’ve listened to this episode, go back and listen to last week’s and make sure you download my 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint freebie. These are some next-level goods. Get moving!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Mar 09, 2017
#149: Your 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint
57:31

Here’s the truth: Planning your pre-launch is JUST as important as preparing your actual launch strategy.

And the right pre-launch ramp-up will help you set the stage for a successful launch.

While there are many ways to execute a pre-launch strategy, sometimes it’s nice when you can cut through all of the noise and follow a single, no-nonsense, proven blueprint that’ll get you where you want to go.

That’s what I have for you today: A 90-day pre-launch roadmap that you can follow to create the momentum you need for an effective launch.

Today’s plan is broken up into three months of specific strategies that build on each other.

There are three key concepts:

  • CREATE and post original content weekly
  • CONNECT with your audience with a Facebook community
  • COMMIT with a 21-day Challenge

I also have a comprehensive guide to the 3 Cs to help you execute your plan. You can get that here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint

FREE DOWNLOAD

Over the next 90 days of this plan you will learn:

  • How to get into the habit of creating consistent content every week (and how to get the most leads out of that content!)
  • The best place to set up your opt-in
  • How to segment your audience
  • How to run a Facebook group that truly engages and conditions your audience to hear from you

Check out that step-by-step blueprint now!

Mar 02, 2017
#148: 3 Tips to Fix Your Facebook Ad Targeting
38:14

Facebook ad targeting is the trickiest thing!

I hear this in my private groups everyday. There are so many targeting combinations available for you on Facebook, it’s hard to know where to start to get out of the weeds.

I’m walking you through it all with the help of my go-to Facebook ads expert, Rick Mulready.

By the end you will be able to answer:

  • Am I sure the problem is my targeting?
  • What’s new that I’m not yet doing?
  • Are my targeting groups set up correctly?

Facebook ads are changing constantly, and by changing they are evolving — think about how much Facebook Live has grown in the last year and then consider all the ways that retargeting might be possible in those avenues…

If you’re feeling confused, you’re in the right place. Rick and I are breaking it all down for you.

We are going to walk you through 3 ways to fix your Facebook ad targeting—and the first way will surprise you.

We are going in deep on ad copy, relevance scores, new audiences to retarget, and of course the basics.

Rick and I break down how you can leverage many different custom audiences and groups. You will be confident about where you should be putting your time and energy after you listen.

We even walk you through how to set yourself up to tackle your changes one step at a time so you can understand what’s working and what’s not working.

By the end you’ll know exactly how to apply these 3 tips to work for you.

Start listening here!

Once you’ve heard this episode, click back to this page. The images below will be helpful to get a snapshot of the new-ish Facebook Page engagement targeting. It’s a cool feature you will likely want to check out once you get the details here.

Feb 16, 2017
#147: How to Ask Better Questions and Get Better Business Results with Marie Forleo
52:48

Today I’m talking about the ONE THING that could be holding you back in your business.

This is a real obstacle that can STALL your business growth.

I know this because it stunted my own growth.

Today I’m talking about the low-value bullsh*t questions you ask yourself that make you feel stuck. These are the questions that suck the soul out of you and can make you feel that you are not cut out for this entrepreneurial life.

The scary thing is that you likely don’t even know you’re doing it! But if you feel discouraged by your progress and “not enough” in your business, you are for sure doing it.

It’s time to find some new, alternative questions, don’t you think?

To help me tackle this very important topic, I’ve asked my own mentor and former business coach (and one of my favorite guests!), Marie Forleo, to help me make this into something extremely tangible and actionable for you.

I put five “low-value” questions—the kind that make your heart sink—in front of Marie and I asked her to turn them into questions that will lead you down the road to bigger results and successes. And boy, did she deliver. We also have some fun in the process, so take a listen here.

Before we dive into those 5 crucial low-value questions and their empowered high-value counterparts, one last note: Marie has released a free video training series—and it’s exceptional.

It answers the question I hear ALL THE TIME: “How do I know I’m working on the right strategies and focusing on the right things to make my business work?”

So this has become a must-watch for me, and my students.

Here are the five questions Marie is making over in today’s podcast:

LOW VALUE QUESTION #1:

What if no one buys what I'm selling?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #2:

What if they think I'm a fraud?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #3:

I don’t have enough __________ (experience/time/money/know-how/exposure) so how can I possibly compete against X?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #4:

I’m too far behind! Why didn't I get into this online marketing game earlier?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #5:

This is taking too long. Why am I not finding success more quickly?

Check out the NEW high-value questions here—and then starting USING them to shift your mindset to get bigger results in all you do.

Let’s get rid of the limiting beliefs and negative self-talk that may be holding you back—time to get inspired and raise your business game, for good.

Feb 09, 2017
#146: 3 Types of Facebook Groups: How to Use Them to Strengthen Your Impact, Leadership and Profits (Part 1)
51:28

You might of heard me say that one of the bold moves you can make in 2017 is to build your very own, private Facebook Group to include with your course package. But, there’s one thing I haven’t told you yet...

How to do it!

Today, I’m breaking down how to not only set up your group, but how to make it grow for the long-term.

This week’s mini training is all about what it takes to create a successful private Facebook Group to support the students inside of your paid programs.

I’ve been doing these groups for a long time and today I’m sharing the behind the scenes details about what works—and what doesn’t.

Also, make sure to grab my step-by-step how to guide for setting up for your first private Facebook group. It includes REAL LIFE EXAMPLES of others doing great things in their own groups and I’ve also included directions for how to set up your own private group. Download here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Facebook Course Group Primer

FREE DOWNLOAD

Get ready to strengthen your impact, leadership and profits with specialty Facebook Groups - I’ll give you the entire scoop here.

Feb 02, 2017
#145: 13 Questions to Nail Down Your Winning Webinar Topic and Title
44:41

Launching your first webinar is a pretty exciting feeling. You’re running on adrenaline and diving into slide decks, email copy, webinar platforms, and so much more.

And because I know you’re likely juggling a million things right now (that’s normal, right?!), I’m here to help you take the first BIG step in webinar planning: Identifying a perfect webinar TOPIC and then crafting it into an irresistible TITLE.

Now once you nail that title (as I know you will!), I also give 13 questions that will help you REALLY KNOW if you’ve nailed it.

But what happens if you listen to my latest mini-training, come up with your topic and title and then realize you totally missed the mark and it’s just not working for you?

In my freebie of the week, I’ve not only included those 13 CRUCIAL QUESTIONS, but also some solid troubleshooting tips to get you through any challenges you might come up against. Just grab it below.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 13 Questions That Will Reveal If You Have a Winning Webinar Topic and Title

FREE DOWNLOAD

Your webinar topic and title needs to be irresistible and actionable. It needs to instantly grab your audience’s attention, while focusing on just one thing.

Let me walk you through how to get it done, so you can get to the finish line a heck of a lot quicker.

Jan 26, 2017
#144: How to Prepare, Plan & Execute a Profitable 5-Day Challenge
58:37

Have you been seeing the ultra-successful challenges that many smart marketers have been implementing in their business? Are you curious about how it all works?

Then this powerhouse mini-training is for you.

Online challenges are a fantastic tool for building your email list. However, there’s actually an incredible benefit that most marketers hosting challenges don’t take advantage of.

My guest today is revealing his action-packed plan that shows you how you can actually make money from your first challenge — in addition to growing your email list.

Zach Spuckler is no ordinary business guy. He’s 22 years old and already an online business expert with a long list of tried and true success stories to show for it, including a $22K+ 5-Day Challenge strategy he is sharing on my podcast today.

Click to learn Zach’s flawless plan that you can leverage to execute your own 5-day Challenge.

Like anything, when it comes to Challenges, you need a system. A plan that will get you started.

That is what I’m giving you today. A detailed, exact plan for conquering your first challenge. You can use this plan again and again.

Zach is also giving you a free resource guide where you will find all the specifics of his well-executed challenge so that you can take action immediately. Listen now.

Add depth to your 2017 online business plan by not only hosting a challenge, but conquering it! Get started here.

Jan 19, 2017
#143: How Do I Know If I’m Delivering Enough Value in My Course (for the Price I Want to Charge)?
43:24

You are a rock star, a risk-taker, and your course content is awesome. You know this because you’ve put your blood, sweat and tears into making it great. Yet . . . .

You’re finding yourself wondering, does my course content justify my price?

You’re not alone.

Course creation is one of my favorite topics, but it can be incredibly tricky to lay it all out there — especially for your first course.

I’ve not only created multiple courses, but I’ve helped so many entrepreneurs who are struggling with their online courses turn them around and enable them to sell confidently.

This week I’m sharing with you how to know if you’re offering enough value for the price point you’ve set.

I’m also sharing 7 WAYS TO SAVE YOUR ONLINE COURSE. If you created your course outline and feel that something’s missing OR maybe you’ve completed your entire course and something just feels off, I’ve got the FIX for you.

In this episode, I give you 7 detailed strategies that you can use to actively save your course and see success with selling it at the price point you’ve set. Get my free detailed checklist that outlines exactly what you can do to save your course and make it even better. Download it now.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 7 Ways to Save Your Online Course

FREE DOWNLOAD

The question I am answering in this week’s episode, is: Do you have enough value to justify your price point?

Maybe you’ve seen courses similar to yours offered at a lower cost or you’re having second thoughts about your higher price. This is gut check time and this week’s episode will bolster your confidence around your price.

Does the value you’re offering in your course justify the price? Click here to find out.

There are several strategies for knowing if you’re offering enough value for the price point you’re charging.

I’m giving you my sure-fire tip for the best way to outline your course in a way that continuously keeps it fresh — and why this is so important to the overall success of your course.

Then, I give you a list of 12 questions to ask yourself that will help you confidently determine the quality in your course content.

These questions will help you be the risk-taker you are, examine your offer as a whole, and lay it all out there for your students.

You will want to use these strategies not only to identify what pieces of content you may want to change (or add), but to ensure that you feel confident in your product and have added all the value you can (without overwhelming your students!).

Boost your confidence, find out how your course value rates. Click here!

Jan 12, 2017
#142: 7 Bold Moves to Shake Up Your Business NOW
54:27

Forget your resolutions. Instead, let’s focus on making ONE BOLD MOVE in your business in 2017.

I have seven ways for you to put a stake in the ground and inject new life into your business starting NOW. Most of these seven I have done myself, so I know they can boost your business, give you a shot of confidence and be a massive game changer.

For a little extra push and motivation, I want you to also check out my freebie: my must read list to build momentum in 2017. I can’t think of anything better than a great book to help bring me new perspectives and ideas. Also, when I need inspiration, I turn to books. So for me, diving into some good books is CRUCIAL if you want to propel your business forward.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Must Read List to Build Momentum in 2017

FREE DOWNLOAD

As for the 7 bold moves, I carefully picked each of them because I know they will help drive growth for your business, and can be implemented with little cost on your part. In fact, I’ve include how you can take action for each move.

Amongst those seven, I have ways to revolutionize your content, launch a new community, find a group of mentors, help you drill down on your business, and more. I think there is a little something for everyone—check it out and pick your bold move for the New Year now.

Jan 05, 2017
#141: Where Should I Spend My Money As I Build My Online Business?
50:44

Of the hundreds of online tools and resources out there— and there are hundreds—it’s tough to know where to spend money and where to save.

My team and I have used many and have found the ‘tried and true’ tools that will assist you for the long run and give you the resources you need to navigate your online business through the three stages of launching.

Today it’s all about growing a profitable business with the right resources, while also keeping it lean.

To get you started, click here for this value-packed tools guide (it’s FREE!), which details the specific tools and resources I mention (and more) and how you can leverage them right away. Get my detailed list here!

This detailed, tested, proven list of online resources will keep you organized, increase your profits and make you look like the pro that you are.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 2017 Online Business Tool Must-Haves

FREE DOWNLOAD

Also, in this episode, I break down three crucial stages to building a strong online business and specifically share with you:

  •      How to gauge what stage you’re in
  •      The signs that you’re ready to graduate to the next level
  •      The specific tools that will get your business built for long-term profits

What stage are you in? Click here to find out!

Dec 29, 2016
#140: How to Create a 5-Day Social Media Video Series for Rapid List Growth
39:54

Today we’re talking about doing LIVE with purpose—specifically Facebook Live, Periscope, Snapchat and Instagram Stories.

In fact, my guest, Nicole Walters, a sought-after online influencer, left her corporate job (she even gave her resignation live on Periscope!) to help entrepreneurs learn how their small wins can lead to big results. She is here diving into her 5-step process for creating a multi-day video series that will help you rapidly grow your email list.

Regardless of your platform, this step-by-step process for creating your own video series will work for you.

Get the step-by-step details here.

Despite the amazing results you can get from video, some entrepreneurs (new and experienced alike) let their fears and anxieties psyche them out of using it. If you’re ready to focus on building your list, this is where you want to be focusing.

These 5 steps will break down how to create your list building video series.

  • What should your video series be about? We’ll cover that.
  • How long should each video be? Yep, that one too.
  • How do you grow your email list with each video? Check!
  • and so much more

After listening, you will understand how to do social video the right way while building up your email list.

In addition to the 5 steps, this episode gives you best practices for using live video. I’m talking crucial dos and don’ts that are truly valuable for newbies and experts alike. In fact there’s one mistake that so many of us make. After hearing what it is and how to avoid it, you won’t make the same mistake!

This episode might be the most fun I’ve had all year! Send your fears and nerves packing and create videos with confidence and conviction now! Get started here!

Dec 15, 2016
#139: The 10 Most Powerful Episodes to Help Move Your Business Forward
07:15

So here we are: The Best of 2016 List.

I have to admit, compiling this special list for you was the highlight of my week! Not only because I got to look back and remember all of the cool episodes we tackled together, but also because I had the chance to think about the impact the lessons hopefully had on your business too.

My team and I chose this Top 10 List based on a few factors, including the download stats, the feedback and stories from our listeners and my own personal favorites. So although this list is not solely based on analytics, each episode that made the list was chosen with the intention to offer powerful insights and strategies to your marketing plan as you move into the new year.

So if you missed one of these episodes, make sure to listen to it before we ring in the new year! Also make sure to download the freebie for this episode on my top business lessons for the year—I compiled these for you to make sure you can learn from my mistakes AND my wins. Get all of those a-has at amyporterfield.com/139download.

One last note: Of course NONE of this would be possible without you and your support. So I want to THANK YOU for a fantastic year!

So (drumroll please…..) here they are: My 10 Most Powerful Podcasts for 2016

#10: “Media, Meditation and a Little Motivation” with Gabby Bernstein (Episode 129)

The gist: Gabby Bernstein, best-selling author and next-generation thought leader, shows you how you can burst through the resistance and actually create those new opportunities for your business. Her techniques of choice have included meditation and manifestation – two things I’ve never personally explored in my own business until now.

Why it made the list:

I know the question some of you may be asking: Am I still meditating?

The answer is YES! I have made it a 10-minute morning habit to meditate. Gabby’s urging to do so was definitely a jumping off point for me. And I feel that it has given me so much more clarity of the projects that I want to work on and where I want to spend my time.

And another really cool factor: It’s allowed me to worry less. I’m a worrier by nature and that 10 minutes in the morning has lessened me from unnecessary worrying and replaced it with more clarity . . . which has lead to more confidence in my daily decisions.

#9: “Preparing for Future Traffic Declines: What Content Creators Need to Know” with Mike Stelzner (Episode 134)

The gist: I give you the latest trends in social media marketing with the man who knows best: my early mentor, friend, and founder of Social Media Examiner, Michael Stelzner.

Why it made the list:

I have to admit that I was a bit scared to share this episode because it has an undertone of doom and gloom when it comes to social media and the online landscape.

However, the insights and the suggested strategies that Mike shares in this episode are so incredibly valuable that this was a discussion that needed to be had. I also felt that there’s nobody better than Mike (as founder of Social Media Examiner) to share some of the findings. And I think that you will find it very actionable for your business!


#8: 
“How to Grow a Profitable Facebook Group” with Josh and Jill Stanton (Episode 97)

The gist: My guests on the podcast, the irrepressible Josh and Jill Stanton from Screw the Nine to Five, share their secret strategies for using private Facebook Groups to build a community of affinity and trust around your brand.

Why it made the list:

Facebook’s landscape has changed considerably over the last year. And where I used to say that you want to put all of your efforts into your Facebook Page and build engagement, I am now convinced that you will get a bigger bang for your buck if you create your own private Facebook Groups around a specific topic and build your community that way.

Ultimately I think this strategy is more niche focused and intimate, and the conversations are richer and more valuable. I also like that in this episode, Jill and Josh go beyond list building and talk about how to sell your online courses through these private Groups.

Plus, Jill and Josh are hilarious—so it’s an entertaining one!


#7: 
“How Do I Price My Online Course?” (Episode 107)

The gist: I want you to price your course with confidence. So I’ve got your seven-step pricing strategy to help you determine what you should really charge for your course—and feel “whole” about the entire process.

Why it made the list:

I love this episode because it takes all of the guesswork out of pricing.

When people are creating online courses, they often get stuck in the pricing war in their head. They want to charge one price but they’re not sure if their product is valuable enough to charge that price. And they’re not really sure what determines the price of a product.

In this episode, I literally broke down all of the factors that go into making a pricing decision. Once you go through the different reasons as to why you’re coming up with the price, you as the creator of that course can be incredibly confident that the price you are charging is definitely worth it (because of the value you are delivering).


#6: 
“Are You Repelling or Attracting Your Potential Customers?” with Jasmine Star (Episode 106)

The gist: My special guest, marketing and branding strategist Jasmine Star, paints a vivid and thought-provoking picture of her avatar, Elle, and gives you tons of other great social media advice.

Why it made the list:

First of all, this episode was the beginning of a beautiful friendship! I now talk to Jasmine every single week. So this chat started something that I am so fortunate to have today.

Secondly, this year I was onstage three times to talk about social media (at the Business Boutique event via the Dave Ramsey team) and each time I told the story of Jasmine’s “Elle” and it was always a huge hit. People would tell me, “After hearing about Jasmine’s Elle, I totally get it now—I’m going to find my own Elle!”

I got so excited about that because when you take what you learned in this episode and you create your own Elle, every time you post on social media, you are going to do so with confidence, knowing you are attracting the perfect person for your programs, products and services. This episode will raise your game to a new level.


#5: 
“Where Do I Start?” (Episode 105)

The gist: I tackle the two phases you need to know to build your business. I describe a path for how to build a business that will thrive in the long term, and really fulfill the lifestyle you are looking for.

Why it made the list:

This episode is perfect for you if you are still in a 9-to-5 job and working on a side hustle, or in the first year of business.

I live and die by the idea that the way your business looks today, will be dramatically different a year from now. This is because you’re learning, you’re experimenting, you’re figuring things out. So you don’t have set anything in stone!

And going through the two phases of your business allows you a little bit of breathing room for experimentation and testing out new content, ideas and platforms. So again, a must for all newbies.


#4: 
“How to Create Content Rituals to Get More Done” (Episode 102)

The gist: I share my own personal Tiger Time rituals and show you how I give myself the time and space to create my BEST content. The rules are strict, but the rewards are HUGE. I’ll also clue you in on a few musts for planning out my week—including what helps me prepare for the week ahead, and an old, yet trusty planning tool that I’ve dusted off from the past.

Why it made the list:

My favorite thing to hear is when someone comes up to me and says, “Amy, I just adopted Tiger Time in my business and I love it.” One of my listeners gushed about it when I was with my husband, Hobie.  The look on his face when he heard “Tiger Time” was priceless. ;-) But I was beaming because I know, firsthand, that creating rituals in your business is literally the secret sauce to making things actually work like no matter what.

With Tiger Time, the whole premise is to be fierce about your time and how you’re spending it, and making sure there’s always time to create. And because I believe that content creation is the foundation of a business, I think having this Tiger Time really has proven to be incredibly valuable in my own business—and hopefully the same for you.


#3: 
“Five New Launch Lessons From My Most Successful Launch to Date” (Episode 116)

The gist: I not only debrief a recent course launch (the good and the bad), but I also have five new lessons that will help you launch your next course profitably.

Why it made the list:

Whenever I do launches in review, I always get such great feedback, because listeners tell me that they feel like I’m taking them behind the scenes with me and giving them secrets that they normally wouldn’t get from other marketers they’re learning from.

I’m often told “I love your honesty about where you got stuck along the way and what you did to fix it.” The launch in review is a really good look at some concrete strategies that we applied, and an honest gut check about what worked, and what didn’t.


#2: 
“How Much Money Should I Spend on Facebook Ads to Be Successful on My Webinar?” with Rick Mulready (Episode 123)

The gist: My friend and Facebook Ad Expert, Rick Mulready, answers the number one question we both get asked all of the time: How much should I spend on Facebook ads to ensure a successful webinar?

Why it made the list:

The great news is it’s a complete numbers game. If you know the formula, you can get an exact answer to that question.

I also really like this episode because of the freebies that go along with it:

  • Facebook ads online calculator that you can use to determine your exact Facebook ads budget for your next webinar.
  • Cheat sheet detailing the the info you need to plug into the Facebook ad spend calculator.

The great thing is you’ll never again wonder how much to spend on Facebook ads to fill up your webinars! So this is a must to check out…


#1: 
“When is the Right Time to Add Another Product to Your Business?” (Episode 100)

The gist: This hot topic is focused on the big question: When do I know if it’s time to add another product to my business? To help answer, I talk about the two paths for your business; Horizontal and Vertical.

Why it made the list:

First of all, this is a question I get asked ALL OF THE TIME. When it comes to this idea of introducing a new product, I’m very passionate about the fact that you do not need a lot of courses in your business to be profitable. Quality over quantity is always my motto.

I think sometimes people create something and move away from it too quickly in their business, causing more stress, overwhelm, and more work than they need to. If you would just stick with one product a little bit longer, promote it in different ways, learn how to launch at different levels, then you would see that the program could even more profitable.

The challenge is you might give it one or two little launches and think, “I’m moving on to the next thing” because maybe it wasn’t as profitable as you had hoped or, because you got distracted by another big idea.

Here’s what I think: What you’ve created initially could always become bigger and better and more valuable, but it needs time to mature. I also think that online courses definitely mature as you, as an entrepreneur, grow and get better at content creation and launching. So why not give yourself the time for that growth?

I hope you’ve enjoyed the rundown of my 10 most powerful episodes for growing your business.  Are you ready to dive even deeper with me?  I’ve compiled my biggest business lessons and insights from 2016 —some of them were doozies, and others were more like subtle “a-has” that made a big impact in how I have shaped my business. These are 10 business lessons that have truly impacted me for the better—and I hope they have the same effect for you! Click here now to get them for free!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Top 10 Business Building Lessons From 2016

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Dec 08, 2016
#138: How to Plan Your Promotional Calendar Like a Boss
43:29

If I ever did a list of Amy’s Favorite Things (in honor of the one and only Oprah), today’s topic would be number one.

We are talking about PLANNING. Specifically, planning for the new year.

The best part is that thanks to my guest today, you can be a pro at calendaring no matter who you are. Anne Samoilov is a launch expert and when I say she knows how to plan...I mean it!

Get ready to hear her amazing, no-fail-formula for planning an entire new year of promotions, partnerships, and personal business goals.

I’m giving you a solid plan for completing your 2017 promotional calendar from start to finish, and here’s what’s great: it won’t take much time at all.

Even better, you don’t need to take any notes, because I have everything detailed in this incredible freebie! It is a quick guide to everything I share with you in this episode, including a list of questions you must ask yourself before you add anything to your calendar for the year ahead.

Start planning your 2017 promotional calendar like a boss here!

In order to plan you will need to reflect on the prior year and drill down on what worked and didn’t work for you. Then, adjust for the year ahead. Anne and I give you the questions you will want to ask yourself before you calendar anything.

This mini-training session will give you a solid approach that you can use for years to come!

And, another great thing about today’s episode is the way Anne approaches time off. While it isn’t exactly what you think it might be, you absolutely must include it on your calendar.

There are five categories total that you will want to “calendar” first and foremost — time off being the first one.

So stop whatever it is you are working on for your year ahead and listen to these steps first.

Let’s map out your year.

If your calendar for next year is swirling in your head or only partially laid out in a Google doc, this episode is for you. This approach makes planning your 2017 promotional calendar easy — even when you aren’t sure of all of your specifics yet.

Accept this episode and freebie as my gift to you this holiday season ;-)

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Your Promotional Calendar Quick Guide

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Dec 01, 2016
#136: How to Use 'Content Gold' to Fuel Your Next Launch
32:07

When it comes to your next course promotion, breaking down your content is as simple as 1-2-3:

  • What’s the best content to start a conversation with your audience?
  • What content will help you drive customers to your core marketing message?
  • Which pieces should you use to expand and deepen your audience’s knowledge of your subject?

Today I’m breaking down the 3 stages of launching content. These 3 stages will be your Bible, regardless of your business or your future programs. You can apply these stages to your specific online program or course and use them for all of your future launches as well. (I passionately use this method for all of my launches!)

This is the content that will not only keep your potential clients engaged, but will attract the right people before, during and after your launch.

And, not only am I walking you through the stages, but I’m SHOWING you precisely how you can apply them in my freebie: 3-stage content marketing launch plan here.

I’ve created a sample 3-stage content marketing launch plan using one of my students as an example. You will easily be able to use this freebie as a model for your own online program— over and over again. Get ready to see a specific example for every stage here. Download now!

You’ll learn precisely what content to market before your cart opens (and you’ll definitely want to start this 30 days before!), what to do while your cart is open, and what to communicate to your audience once your cart is closed.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get The 3 Stages for Planning Your Content Marketing Plan for Your Launch

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Nov 17, 2016
#135: 5 Common Facebook Ad Mistakes (and How to Fix Them)
31:53

Facebook’s super stealth ad targeting can zero-in on entrepreneurs over 30, who shop online at West Elm, don’t have children, love sushi, visited your website in the last 60 days and vacationed in Napa’s wine country last year — BUT it can’t seem to help you fix your Facebook ad missteps . . .

That’s where I can step in and help with an extra special episode in which I’m sharing 5 common Facebook ad mistakes, and how you can fix them.

My go-to-Facebook-ads expert Rick Mulready is here with suggestions, insight and feedback to help you bounce back from — and steer clear of — Facebook ad missteps.

Side step these 5 common mistakes most of us make with Facebook ads. Click here!

For example, how often and when specifically should you test your Facebook ads? Or, what is the best way to edit an ad — without messing up your metrics?

Rick and I are breaking that all down for you.

What’s more important: selling or getting conversions? And, how important are video views? The answers might surprise you.

We systematically review each of the 5 Facebook ad missteps and provide ways to self correct.

You know your target audience better than anybody, you know their pain points and challenges. You are more prepared than you might think to experiment with a few of these fixes and get better results from your Facebook ads.

Now is your chance to learn what to look out for and avoid these missteps in the future. Click here to get the 5 common Facebook ad mistakes!

Nov 10, 2016
#134: Preparing for Future Traffic Declines: What Content Creators Need to Know
44:56

How are you responding to the shifts happening NOW in social media marketing?

I have you covered because today I’m talking about the latest trends in social media marketing with the man who knows best: my mentor, friend, and founder of Social Media Examiner, Michael Stelzner.

Click here to learn what updates to make to your social media marketing plan today.

You may be noticing that organic social reach is declining. It’s scary, but don’t be afraid because while it sounds all doom and gloom, it’s not. There’s actually a lot of quality opportunities out there and the best ones are explained in this episode.

Are you noticing that even the Facebook social media marketing rules are shifting? Michael tells you what you should no longer be doing on Facebook — and he also touches on you where your focus should be on Facebook.

Learn what you can do to pivot your approach.

The strategies that Michael gives you are ones that I am using too. You will hear MUST-DO tips for email marketing (including how to ensure your emails are delivered and opened), conversion rate optimization, how you can best use podcasts to drive traffic, as well as tracking and analytics. Listen in now.

AND, Michael has an early-sign-up announcement about Social Media Marketing World 2017. I’m going to be speaking and I hope to see you there! Get registered now at the link at the bottom. Details here.

Nov 03, 2016
#133: How to Get Unstuck in Your Course Creation Process
40:21

Are you having a love/hate relationship with your course creation?

Creating your first online course can be a challenge. How do you decide which content to keep and which to leave out.

I have been there. It’s awful, you have such passion for your topic, but for a plethora of reasons it’s not coming through when you put pen to paper (or fingers to keyboard).

I’ve built FIVE blockbuster courses over the last six years AND I’ve been in the very same struggle you may be feeling right now.

Nearly 40,000-enrolled-students later, I’m going to walk you through how to break through the obstacles that can stall your product creation process.

I am dedicating this entire special episode to demystifying the product creation process.

I’m giving you the you exact steps to take when you feel stuck. (And, what the most common reasons are for getting stuck, so you know what to look for next time around.)

There are three questions you should ask yourself before you create any course. These questions will help you find FOCUS. Once you have that, your creative energy will flow.

I will also help you decide what content makes the most sense for your business and your audience right now. For example, do you know if you want to create an Introductory Course or a Signature Course? I’m breaking down both of these for you.

Listen in to hear how you can get unstuck and create the course you’ve desperately wanted to complete. (The finish line is closer than you think.)

Oct 24, 2016
#132: How to Cultivate an “Opportunity Knocks Every Time” Mindset with Patrick Bet-David
41:46

Your first webinar didn't convert.

You wanted to launch your course two weeks ago, but you just can’t get your content outline together.

Your Facebook ads are seeing clicks, but not getting quality leads.

What do you do when setbacks show up in your business? Bury your head in the sand? Or, pick yourself up and move forward, more determined than ever?

Having an online business can be challenging at times, and part of being an entrepreneur is knowing how to bounce back from the tough times. It’s about having the right perspective.

That’s why I wanted to chat with Patrick Bet-David. For Patrick, a setback is an opportunity waiting to happen. And his rags to riches story is inspiring for ANY business owner.

Make sure you stay tuned to the end, because in addition to Patrick’s fascinating story, I wanted to give you a little bonus: A mini-training on how you can stand out from the competition and get results.

First, you’ll learn what you need to instill in every potential buyer.

Second, you’ll discover the most important thing to deliver on.

Lastly, you will learn what you need to develop and stick to as much as you can. It’s so, so important.

The last one is incredibly powerful and can make all the difference in your new business.

Also, learn the one mistake that Patrick says ALL entrepreneurs make, so you can avoid it.

Get started on this mini-training now!

Oct 20, 2016
#131: How to Get Overwhelm to Eat Your Dust
28:49

You’ve got this!

Today, I have three incredibly DOABLE solutions to rid yourself of the feeling that may be overtaking your life – OVERWHELM.

Ugh. I don’t even like saying the word, because I know how awful it can feel when it’s overtaking your life. And, I’m here to help.

For me, overwhelm shows itself when I feel like I’ve gotten behind or everything feels disorganized, and I know things could go in a really bad direction.

It’s in those moments that I use one of my personal stress strategies that I’ve been fine tuning ever since I started my own business.

In this episode I share a very personal struggle that I’ve been facing in my business. Some of my overwhelm has been coming from my issue with doing VIDEO. Ugh! Click here to hear my story - you might be able to relate.

I’m certain that you will find that one of the three solutions I share with you in my recent episode will come naturally for you. The other two you may have to work at more, but I promise you, if you put the work in, it will be SO WORTH IT.

The first one tells you the exact process you can do to wrap your head around what is really causing overwhelm for you.

The second solution tells you the steps you can take to lessen the stress in your life.

And, the third and final fix helps you get clear on the fear that might be getting in your way.

Like I said, you’ve totally got this! Use my Triple S to squash your overwhelm. Click here!

Oct 10, 2016
#130: How to Sell on a Webinar (Without Being Overly Salesy)
41:00

Let’s face it, selling during your webinar can be awkward at first — but it doesn’t have to be.

Today I’m giving you my BEST strategies for eliminating the awkwardness and creating a smooth transition into the sales portion of your webinar.

Before I dive into it though, I want to tell you about my FREE Master Class, “How to Create Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar.”

If you sell info products or programs, digital courses, or coaching and consulting services online, then I bet you’ve considered adding webinars to your marketing strategy.

But as you know, there’s a lot of moving pieces with webinars, including the tech, filling seats, putting together your content, making that transition to selling . . . not to mention getting the courage to actually hit “broadcast.” (It can be scary!)

Webinars can be intimidating, but they don’t have to be. Join me as I walk you through what it takes to create a profitable webinar strategy.

Let’s jump back into today’s topic. You’re the expert, the go-to source on YOUR webinar. And your webinars give you the opportunity to build amazing trust between you and your audience.

I’m showing you how you can build trust and make the purchase of your product, course, or service the next logical step for your audience.

Your transition from teaching into selling can become seamless with these strategies. You will never feel like you’re selling again.

Also listen closely for the number one mistake I often see in webinars. And, learn how to avoid this misstep here.

This episode is one of my favorites because I love webinars. AND, because building trust with your audience is so important. If you’re not careful you can break down the trust you’ve built quickly.

Stick with me, and listen in, so that doesn’t happen to you.

I’ll tell you the perfect ratio of content to selling. You’ll also get tips for deciding what to put in your webinar versus what to create and sell inside your course.

I also dive into the mindset and mechanics of creating incredible webinars that will boost your sales.

Learn how to sell on a webinar without being salesy here!

Sep 29, 2016
#129: Media, Meditation and a little Motivation with Gabby Bernstein
41:17

Today, I’m on the edge of my seat wanting to give you a new strategy that will help you grow your business and make the most of your funnels, email marketing, Facebook ads and so much more.

Everything you want for your business starts with an intention, right?

Then, you add enthusiasm and dedication toward your idea.

But, then what?

Unfortunately, for many what happens next is resistance—whether it’s in the form of self-doubt, a financial obstacle, or perhaps just a seemingly unrealistic goal.

By accepting these as obstacles, you are giving into the resistance and giving up on what what could be.

So how do you get what you really want?

Gabby Bernstein, best selling author and next-generation thought leader, is here to show you how you can burst through the resistance and actually create those new opportunities for your business. Her techniques of choice have included meditation and manifestation - two things I’ve never personally explored in my own business until now.

Gabby used these techniques to achieve her number one goal—being interviewed by Oprah. (I mean, come on! Oprah?! That’s huge!)

She’s sharing her techniques here.

Listen in on the juicy details to learn how to make powerful achievements in your business now!

As you will hear us chat about on my latest podcast episode, Gabby recently released her new book, “The Universe has Your Back.” She has a special bonus for those who buy her book. She’s giving you six-and-a-half hours of free training based on principles in her book. Buy Gabby’s book and get started on her bonus training now!

Sep 15, 2016
#127: How to Organize & Analyze Your Facebook Ads
42:14

Are your Facebook ad questions piling up? Do you feel like the deeper you go with Facebook ads, the more questions you have?

Well, I’m here to help! And, with me today is an audience favorite, Facebook ad expert, Rick Mulready. He joins me on my podcast frequently and has given my audience some amazing success with Facebook ads.

So, listen in because we are answering questions that we have heard from MANY of you.

This week we tackle big questions about organizing Ad Sets, specifics on targeting and also how to analyze your latest ad campaign (aka: what do all those numbers really mean?!).

Here’s a look at what we are answering today:

  • How many ad sets are best for each ad campaign? Should I combine smaller ad sets? Are there benefits to how many you have? (Rick’s answer to this one is VERY detailed and actionable!)

  • When targeting people who like a certain Facebook page, should you also narrow the audience if you want to target specific types of people? Or, should you let the ad copy do that for you? (Such a good question!)

  • What do all the numbers mean when reading how your ads are doing in the power editor? How do you know your ads are doing well? What am I looking for? (We get this Q a lot and I love how deep we go with it!)

  • When selling high-priced programs or products, what should my strategy be and what type of sales funnel will get the best results? (We include TONS of examples with his response!)

Also, Rick hosted a free webinar where he discussed all about how to create an automated system that will bring in sales and leads everyday for your online business using Facebook ads.

Sign up for his free webinar replay to get all of Rick’s awesome tips and tricks for Facebook ad funnels!

Sep 09, 2016
#126: Operation Clear Out Your Inbox
47:22

I’m here as a witness: It IS possible to tame your email inbox and seemingly never-ending list of tasks.

In fact, thanks to today’s guests, April and Eric Perry, I’m at “Inbox Zero” right now. (Something I 100% thought was NOT possible!)

They taught me something invaluable: The reason most of us fail at getting to Inbox Zero every day is because to get there, you can’t just focus on your emails.

Huh?!  Here’s what I mean . . .

It’s not just about getting to zero, it’s about changing your approach—so that you have the right tools and procedures in place to be able to get to ZERO every day.

Which means—establishing a COMMAND CENTRAL for your business, AND your life.

April and Eric have the freedom to do more with their lives, including spend a lot more time with their family, because of their own idea command central. You can create one too.

This episode is to help get you out of the weeds and give you the FREEDOM to work on what you do best! Imagine what you could do if you had the head space to not worry about getting through your emails, but instead working on the projects that really matter for your business.

Most people live with piles everywhere—digital or physical. (I use to be a Post-It junkie!) A command central will help you churn through your “to do” list so you’re able to focus your mind on what you do best.

Set up your command central and get to Inbox Zero with me now!!

Aug 25, 2016
#125: How to Create a WOW Experience When Selling Online Programs
39:01

You bring something incredibly unique to your online course—your special delivery, your ideas, your personal experiences.

However, you still want to go that extra mile to WOW your students and make sure they feel like buying your course was more than just a worthy investment.

Recently I heard some important (and crazy) statistics on customer satisfaction and wanted to share them with you. Once I saw these mind-blowing stats, I knew right away that I needed to share with you my special ways to attract and keep a customer for life.

Here are those stats—

  • 53% of customers switch to a competitor because they feel unappreciated

  • 40% of customers begin purchasing from a competitor because of their AMAZING reputation

  • 42% switch to a competitor because they are put-off by rude staff

  • 29% switch because they are annoyed by a lack of staff knowledge (a very important one for those of you with online courses!)

Today, we are turning the tables on these stats and making sure you are on the positive end of these experiences!

I’m giving you five ways you can WOW your students starting the minute they enroll in your course.

If you’ve ever worried that your course idea has already been done before, use these 5 Wow Factors to beat your competition every single time.

I have all 5 outlined here.

I love the experience of being WOW-ed! It not only makes me a bit giddy, but it makes me feel great about my decision to buy.

It also makes me want to be an enthusiastic, REPEAT customer when I feel like I’m treated extra special.

Listen now to get ALL the details of the online course WOW factor.

The next step is to plan—plan, plan, plan.

I’m giving you these five tips so you can easily plan them into your next course launch.

The results and love you will receive from your students if they feel WOW-ed will be SO WORTH IT!

Aug 18, 2016
#124: 4 Key Roles to Help You Grow Your Business
25:28

Who makes up your support team? What are their unique qualities that help you run an all-in business?

Today I’m talking with Christy Wright, expert business coach and speaker, who is telling us the four specific roles you must have filled—with the right people—to ensure that your business is exceeding all of your wildest expectations.

We describe in detail how to be deliberate in selecting who to let into the inner circle of your business. Then, we tell you where and how to find them.

You want people who will lift you up, push you to your potential, and give you the tough love you need in order to make the right choices for your business.

Tune in to hear the four specific roles that you need filled and where to find the ideal people to fill those roles.

Business Boutique is an amazing two-day event in Nashville for women interested in starting, running or growing a business.

Whether you’re not sure what business to start or you need help tackling challenges, you will hear from incredible speakers who will help you take your business to the next level. If you are interested in learning more click here.

Aug 10, 2016
#123: How Much Money Should I Spend on Facebook Ads to Be Successful on My Webinar?
21:44

My friend and Facebook ad EXPERT, Rick Mulready, is back and together we are answering the number one question we both get asked all of the time—

How much should I spend on Facebook ads to ensure a successful webinar?

Today we have THE formula that will help you calculate your exact cost per webinar registrant that you can expect for your Facebook Ads.

I also have two freebies for you. They are incredible and I’m over the moon excited to share them with you.

When you sign up for our freebies, you’re going to receive a special link to a Facebook ads online calculator that you can use to determine your exact Facebook ads budget for your next webinar.

You will also get a cheat sheet detailing the the exact info you need to plug into the Facebook ad spend calculator. It’s all neatly packaged up for you when you sign up for the freebies!

Click here to get both now!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy & Rick's Facebook Ads Spend Calculator

FREE DOWNLOAD

Rick and I know that Facebook ads can be confusing and often times it feels like the whole ad spend thing is a big guessing game. Well...not anymore.

We can say that without a doubt Facebook ads give you the best return for your money in terms of the quality of webinar registrants.

This is our best episode yet! I’m bursting at the seams for you to get this info, so jump in now!

Aug 03, 2016
#122: Get Your Content House In Order
23:10

In this episode, I’m bringing you a little tough love.

Tough love when it comes to creating original content on a weekly basis.

This means every week you need to put out a podcast, blog post or video—whatever you love to do and do well—every week, no matter what.

I KNOW IT’S NOT EASY. But it’s 100% worth the effort.

Bottom line: Consistent content helps you build trust with your audience and earn their respect. AND - if you have content going out on a regular basis, you won’t have to work as hard when you are ready to promote. Meaning, it’s easier to make money when you are creating weekly, free content. (Listen here to find out why.)

So no more excuses. Let’s hit it.

Trust me, this could be the biggest game-changer for your business.

And to help you decide which platform may be right for you, I’ve got a fantastic new freebie called the “Content Platform Play-by-Play” that breaks down the pros/cons and what it will take to get started with each.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Content Platform Play-by-Play

FREE DOWNLOAD

Remember: If it was easy, ANYONE would do it. You are with me right now because you want something more for your business. And, building a consistent content foundation is a must to grow your business.

It won’t happen overnight, but if you start to make it a ritual TODAY, I promise you that great things can happen.

Aug 03, 2016
#121: 3 Money Habits for Growing Your Online Business
27:38

Today we are flipping the script on money habits.

I’m so excited to have with me Rachel Cruze, author of, “Love Your Life, Not Theirs.”

She is sharing her three money habits that, quite honestly, are right on the money! If you adopt these three amazing rules, your rituals around money management will empower you to see what is possible personally and help you grow your online business.

Now, I like to think I’m a smart girl. I run my own business. I’m a planner. I understand my finances.

However—

I was blown away at how much one tip in particular changed my entire outlook and the way I managed money. And, then seeing how that affected positive change in my business—the results were fantastic.

That’s why I want to share this with you so badly.

You may have heard me say it already— but I believe that when growing your own business, it often feels that what’s personal is business and what’s business is personal. This could not be more true than for this very sensitive topic, money.

Money is one of the most important common denominators in the management of your business and your personal life.

These habits, once you adopt them, can truly help your online business grow.

So, do these questions sound like you?

  • Do you compare your vacations, your home, your car, your clothes to others?
  • Does social media make it worse for you?

Rachel’s first money habit will tell you some surprising realities about what you’re seeing in your newsfeed and WHY we compare what we see to our own story.

Then, she tells you what you should be thinking and how to flip the script to actually make it incredibly positive—personally and professionally. Rachel shares how to turn this bad habit into a good one.

Go here to listen.

The second habit:

You must have a plan for your money. Yes, I’m talking a budget.

Don’t cringe!

Not knowing where you’re money is going can cause stress and anxiety. These pain points affect your personal life and your business evenly.

What’s personal is business and what’s business is personal.

So, let’s flip the script!

Rachel’s second habit is based on the categories that everyone needs to include in their budget. It’s these SPECIFIC categories that make this habit so achievable. These categories are relevant for not only you personally, but for your business too.

Does your budget give you permission to spend your money exactly how you want?

Rachel’s does. I hear you—that sounds counterintuitive. I promise you it’s not.

And, even better you won’t feel guilty. I LOVE IT!

This MUST-DO habit will address both your work and your home budget and help your business grow!

Rachel’s third habit might be the most important one here.

This is the one that will give you the permission you need as a business owner to take risks. WHY?

Because this is the one thing you can do so that you are never forced to fail. If you have this, you will feel confident to go the extra mile, to go for launching your first course, to take that risk.

You work hard for your money. If you adopt this habit, are wildly patient, and make it a priority, it will pay off.

As a business owner, there will come a day when you will be able to reap those rewards from your hard work. Or, you will have the ability to save your business or your home because you did this one thing—and you did it consistently.

Listen in to get the three habits you need for growing your online business.

Jul 29, 2016
#120: The Bonus Brainstorm: How to Create a Bonus Package for Your Next Course Offer
44:51

Are you looking to create amazing bonuses that will make your offer irresistible?

Today, I’m showing you how to do just that with my new Bonus Blueprint mini-workshop.

I LOVE getting bonuses when I sign up for courses. Just love it! Because bonuses are so vital and important for you to offer with your course, I’ve created this mini-workshop to give you the lowdown on developing bonuses that will get you results.

Why are bonuses so important? 

  • They enhance your offer by increasing the perceived value of your product.

  • They allow you to teach outside of your content outline.

  • They encourage audience members to navigate your course more efficiently.

  • They drive sales.

AND bonuses are one of my favorite pieces to plan out because there’s always something MORE I want to include for my students. It’s a fantastic way to give your students that EXTRA special piece of value.

Now I’m going to tell you right off the bat, that you want 2-3 bonuses per course. I’ll workshop you through creating incredible bonuses for every audience and every course.

I’m taking the guesswork out of it so you have more freedom to work on your course.

Speaking of taking the guesswork out, have I got a freebie for you!

It is an awesome download that gives you five steps for creating extraordinary bonuses for your product EVERY TIME. You will be able to walk yourself through the questions you need to ask to create bonuses that are fully aligned with your product and will increase the overall value of your offer.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Must-Have Steps for Creating Extraordinary Bonuses

FREE DOWNLOAD

As you’re creating your next course, this mini-workshop is for you!

I tackle:

  • How to decide what to focus your bonus on.

  • How to overdeliver for your students and bring them deeper into your course.

  • How to best position your bonus for each course.

I also give you the sure-fire strategies that have worked to drive sales for me over and over again.

With this week’s episode, you will find that your next bonus offering opportunity will be smoother, and return the results that you have been hoping for.

It will breathe new life into your campaign and help you to set up expectations for your audience, so they know what’s coming.

You will also gain clarity on how to best handle a bonus associated with an affiliate launch and how to best align it with your products. This is something everyone who might work with affiliates in the future must hear.

So get ready to workshop an enticing bonus so you can stand out from the competition and really serve your students!

Jul 28, 2016
#119: The Who, What, When, Where and How of Testimonials
30:05

Today I’m pulling the curtain back on a piece that can mean the difference between steady sales and your shopping cart catching dust.

I’m giving you the who, what, when, where and how of testimonials. These are especially helpful for those just starting out.

And, I’m also excited to give you a freebie that will make these strategies come alive for your business. It’s called, “The Anatomy of a High-Converting Testimonial.” I’m going to show you how to turn a bad testimonial into a good testimonial, and a good testimonial into an outstanding one. Your testimonials will shine with the help of this awesome tool.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Anatomy of a High-Converting Testimonial

FREE DOWNLOAD

Now, why do you need a good testimonial?

Your credibility is everything when wanting your audience to trust you. Social proof is invaluable when it comes to this.

Testimonials are the best way for you to address objections or hesitations that you may be seeing.

Testimonials allow for your community members to speak up for you and persuade others to buy your product or sign up for your course. If you can have a quote from a community member on an opt-in or sales page, it can be the selling point for on-the-fence potential buyers.

Listen in and get started now!

The most important objectives when building your audience are that you want them to know you, like you and trust you.

Then you have the ability to capture outstanding testimonials that let potential new audience members know how amazing you are.

As I mentioned, in this episode we are getting into the who, what, when, where and how of outstanding testimonials.

Here are the first few spoilers I have in store for you in this week’s episode:

  • You don’t need to only have testimonials from customers.
  • You don’t need to use a testimonial verbatim, as it is sent to you.
  • You don’t need to wait until your students have completed your first course to start collecting testimonials.
  • You don’t need to just have a dedicated testimonials page.
  • You don’t need to wait for kudos to come to you.

There are many people—outside of customers—that you might not have thought of who can provide you with testimonials. I tell you who those people might be for you and explain how to successfully solicit a testimonial from them.

When someone sends you a testimonial, you don’t need to use the exact verbiage they send you. Most people aren’t writers and don’t know what components go into an exceptional testimonial. In this episode I tell you how to work with your students to create an outstanding testimonial that will make you shine and convince potential students to buy your course.

Also, the components of a good testimonial are so, so important. I give you the framework for a perfect testimonial to ensure that every reference is a home run for your business.

Next, you can always be looking to capture testimonials. However, beyond that you don’t need to wait for your first course to complete before you start capturing kudos about your work. I have some strategies for you to get started collecting testimonials now.

There are some very strategic locations that your testimonials must live. I go into depth on where those are and what types of testimonials should live on those pages.

And, you may be thinking, this is all great, but how do I bring it all together to get an outstanding testimonial?

Well, I’m pulling back the curtain and telling you exactly how I’ve done this and how you can too.

I’m excited for you to start tackling these components now and start building your testimonial database! (Don’t worry, I share how to create a good database too.)

Jul 21, 2016
#118: A Behind the Scenes Look at What’s Working in Social Media with Dr. Axe
35:57

Social media changes RAPIDLY and today we are exploring what’s working NOW.

My guest today is Dr. Axe, a certified doctor of natural medicine, doctor of chiropractic, and clinical nutritionist. However, he’s not here to discuss health. He’s here because his website attracts more than six million views per month and his Facebook page has more than one million followers.

This doctor knows what’s working in social media today more than some of the best social media experts out there today -and that’s saying a lot!

Dr. Axe has leveraged what’s trending and his incredibly strategic take on building the backend of his business to grow his company using social media. Everything about this is a home run.

Being engaged with your audience is the key to success. Knowing what’s trending in social media, knowing what your audience loves, knowing the latest information in your field are all components to growing your business online.

Dr. Axe, however, is actually a minimalist when it comes to his online presence. He doesn’t overwhelm his audience or sweat being everywhere online every day. I find this so refreshing and you will too!

When you’re just starting out, it’s all about quality over quantity and I’m giving you the keys to how to grow an engaged audience while focusing on quality.

You will learn how Dr. Axe has attracted more than one million Facebook followers, his philosophy on using social media platforms, strategies for niche-interest list-building, how to nurture your current email list, and what to teach in a webinar versus what to sell in your webinar.

During our time together, Dr. Axe answers the following questions:

  • What’s the right length for a Facebook Live piece that will really speak to your audience and draw viewers in?
  • Do you know the best tips for how to make partnerships work for you?
  • Can you spot trends and know where to look to find them?
  • Also: Do you know the ratio of how much content you should give to how much you should sell? (This is FASCINATING! There’s an important reason why, too.)
  • There’s also this little thing called the purple cow. Do you have one?

I give you all of this and more in this action-packed quick conversation with the king of online business building.

I promise you this will not stretch you thin. In fact, these strategies will make you more efficient online. Thereby, freeing up more time for you to focus on your content.

AMEN to that!

Jul 14, 2016
#117: The Lowdown on Facebook Ad Retargeting
42:31

Do you want to know what Facebook ad retargeting is all about?

By the time you finish this episode you will not only have a deeper understanding of what Facebook ad retargeting is, but you will be ready to take the first steps to create your own campaign.

Rick Mulready, my good friend and an expert in Facebook advertising strategies, is back and together we are talking all things retargeting.

We jump right in, answering your questions about Facebook ad retargeting and how to start leveraging this strategy to get more sales.

Your questions also inspired a spirited discussion about the tech side of retargeting, the steps for setting up a campaign, and the ideal cadence for your retargeted ads based on your audience.

As our conversation progresses, we go deeper into the different strategies that you can use in your own Facebook ad retargeting campaign.

We start with the basics—explaining what in the world this Facebook retargeting IS and when you can (and should) use it.

Then, we go into how you can leverage a retargeting campaign and the benefits (more sales) that come from using it.

Next, we spend some time talking about how to determine the right audiences for retargeting and the different kinds of audience groups you can create. (The biggest asset of retargeting is that you are able to reach out to a more specific, warmer, unique audience.)

I’ll also share my own retargeting experience and tell you a little bit about how I first used retargeting and how I was able to create a smaller scale campaign, build my audience groups, and then leverage those leads to successfully sell something even bigger.

Facebook retargeting is an incredible tool. Take advantage of this episode so you can understand and apply these strategies to start your own Facebook ad retargeting campaign now.

Jul 07, 2016
#116: Five New Launch Lessons From My Most Successful Launch to Date
01:10:22

Are you gearing up to launch a new course? Or want to hear the secrets to a great launch to bank for the future?

Well, today is the big day I have been waiting for. I not only get to debrief my recent course launch with you (the good and the bad), but I also have five new lessons that will help you launch your next course profitably.

I am brutally honest when it comes to sharing these types of learnings because I want you to be incredibly prepared for what you’re about to embark on.

So here it goes. (Listen in here.)

I have a no-holds-barred freebie from my recent launch for you. I’m sharing the final three emails that I sent to my audience as I was preparing to close enrollment. We generated almost $500,000 on just the final day and these emails played a part in the final-push strategy. Get these emails to use as a guideline for your own launch here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Final 3 Launch Emails Sent Out During Courses That Convert

FREE DOWNLOAD

I’m a show and tell kind of girl and I want you to understand how these five lessons came about. So, be prepared to hear the nitty-gritty launch details, including my true ad budget, my email strategy, how I messed up on a special bonus opportunity (and what I did to fix it!) and why I had to quickly change-up my launch plan along the way.

I also go into detail on the roles of some of my oh-so-important support staff during a launch. I talk about how many full-time employees I have when I’m not launching and then break down my total full-time and part-time team members that I have ready for launch time.

Use these five strategies to avoid getting overwhelmed, prepare yourself for any launch big or small, learn how to bounce back from any misstep and most important have a successful and profitable launch.

Jun 30, 2016
#115: Affiliate Marketing Done Right with Rachel Luna
47:27

When you’re starting out in business, I am a big advocate for any and all confidence boosters. I’m talking ways you can get your feet wet so you can say with certainty: I CAN DO THIS.

Because you and I both know: You CAN do this. But sometimes you first need that little pat on the butt and boost of self-confidence.

Well, today I’ve got your keys to testing out your own launch before you really launch. It’s called Affiliate Marketing.

And I’ve got the perfect person to share the tricks and secrets to doing it right. Rachel Luna is an elite business coach who helps her clients gain clarity and confidence.

In this action-packed episode I share:

  • The 8 Steps to Successful Affiliate Marketing
  • The 7 Reasons Why Being an Affiliate is a Great Dry Run for Your Own Launch
  • Common Mistakes People Make with Affiliate Marketing

Whew! This is a TON of value.

I couldn’t wait to record this for you because I know a lot of you feel hesitation around kicking off your own launch. But, I know that affiliate marketing is one of the best ways to get the hands-on experience you need to feel good about your launch. I know this because this is the path I took—affiliate launch first, then my own launches.

Check it all out here.

So we will start off with those steps to mastering affiliate marketing:

  • Pick Your Products
  • Set Your GBB Goal (good, better, best)
  • Make Key Decisions
  • Set Up Your Backend
  • Run Your Communication Plan (Paid traffic and emails)
  • Create Results through Engagement
  • Communicate and Convert
  • Deliver on Your Word

Then, you will want to stay tuned for the real meat of this episode. I show you how affiliate marketing connects to your own launch—and how you can best leverage this approach to get results in your launch.

Rachel also shares her new program “Profit without Products.” I love when products are born out of experience and knowing your stuff inside and out. Being an affiliate marketer changed her life.

Rachel gives you the roadmap and tools for knowing what steps to take and when you should take them. She even gives you step-by-step instructions for the tech you need to reach your goals, so it won’t be overwhelming and you won’t be on your own. You can get all the details here.

EPISODE 115

Learn More about Rachel's "Profit Without Products"

LEARN MORE

Rachel and I wrap up with the common mistakes some people (not you with the help of this episode!) make with affiliate marketing, including not priming the pump, drive-by posts (a pet peeve of mine!) and the ultimate baddie: poor affiliate etiquette.

I also give you a sure-fire tip to being the best partner that your affiliate has ever seen. This advice will make them want to work with you over and over again.

It’s all here in your must-have guide to affiliate marketing.

Jun 18, 2016
#114 Part Two: The SCIENCE of a Brilliant Sales Page
47:06

When it comes to creating sales pages, does it ever make you feel like you are back in school muddling through your worst subject (for me, math!)?

Today we are back in class, but lucky for me, I’ve got the teacher of the year (and also my dear friend) Melanie Duncan leading the way.

Today, you will learn the five elements that MUST be included in all sales pages. These will guide you through creating the right copy, attracting the right audience and most important, converting these leads into sales.

Before we get too far, I want to tell you about the incredible freebie I have for you on this. I’m sharing actual screengrabs from my most successful sales pages—a show and tell kind of guide you can use to create your own sales pages. Get that cheat sheet here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Free Personal Tips: Dissecting the Science of What Makes a Brilliant Sales Page

FREE DOWNLOAD

Your sales page should showcase the value in your product and take your buyers on a journey. You want every single word and every single image to resonate with your perfect ideal customer.

With the five elements Melanie and I lay out for you here, you can create a template that will guide you through the process.

Here are some of the questions we are going to dive into:

  • What is the most crucial part of any sales page?
  • Do I know what imagery will compel my audience to buy?
  • What types of testimonials do I need to curate?
  • What are my product’s benefits and features?
  • How long should my sales page be?

Remember, you’re not going to create a new sales page in one sitting, but I promise if you take the time to create your template using this formula, you will get outstanding results and never again will feel stuck creating your sales pages. Let’s do this!

Jun 07, 2016
#113 Part One: The ART of a Brilliant Sales Page
31:52

The ultimate outcome of a sales page is to sell. We all know this. But, what you’re really doing is coaching your reader to become your client.

How?

The process for formulating a high-converting sales page is what I’m talking about today.

Your job as a coach/ teacher/ mentor is to not only have your customers’ best interest at heart, but to make your reader feel like they can shape a better version of themselves.

This special sales page formula starts with four questions that you MUST ask yourself before you start writing your sales page copy.

After you ask yourself the four questions, there are then four core points that every sales page must include.

In this episode, I crack the code and examine the art of the creating a brilliant sales page by divulging my 4x4 formula for creating results-driven copy every time. I go right into the strategy behind your sales page and what it is about your potential customers that you should always leverage.

The best way to dive deeper into your readers’ minds is with the “aha” questions. Now, I refer to these particular questions as “aha” because they are the ones that get right to where your readers’ hearts are.

If you know where their hearts are, you can better empower them to take this journey with you.

Remember people buy with their hearts not their minds. So, I provide you a roadmap for understanding your potential customers because a sales page is a different kind of conversation—one that is written from the perspective of the heart.

The good news is you don’t need to take notes today because I’ve taken the roadmap (the four questions and the four core points) and I’ve put them into a one-page cheat sheet for you.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Free 4x4 Formula for Creating Brilliant Sales Pages

FREE DOWNLOAD

Start learning about the 4x4 formula that will turn your sales page into the foundation of your potential customers’ lifelong success here.

Jun 07, 2016
#112: 5 Ways to Legally Protect Your Online Business
35:15

Do you know the most common legal mistake most entrepreneurs make when starting their first online business? Well, I didn’t either, until now!

I recently got to chat with Gena Shingle Jaffe, a ultra-successful lawyer turned entrepreneur who is on a mission to educate and empower entrepreneurs to learn about the incredibly important legal side of online business.

Gena spells out in this eye opening discussion the five essential legal documents that every entrepreneur with an online business needs and where these documents should be on your website.

Familiarize and empower yourself with these essential insights here.

Gena’s inside secrets really create a clear path toward feeling really good about the law and your business. The five essential documents will help you:

  • Understand what you must have signed by every client
  • Know the difference between what contract you need for a client versus what you need from your online course members
  • Protect yourself against someone using your content incorrectly
  • Learn how to protect the content on your website
  • Create a clear plan for your privacy policy—and discover who needs to see it

Gena also breaks down the ever-elusive copyright and trademark definitions and what you need to take action on right away to make sure your business is protected.

We also share the website address for where you can check to see if you’re infringing on anyone else’s trademark—or (better yet) if the business name is up for grabs!

You may never have thought you’d feel knowledgeable on the topic of your business and the law, but believe me after learning these concepts from Gena, you will know how to avoid being caught off-guard.

Remember at the end of the day you can’t control everything that happens online. However, if you do nothing else for your business, protect yourself and your business by listening to what’s in this episode.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Free Guide: Understanding Legal Contracts (and More!) for Entrepreneurs

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

May 25, 2016
#111: How to Get Started with Facebook Live
55:32

Are you ready to absolutely kill it with Facebook Live? Or…do you find it a little scary to get started?

My guest this week is social media expert, Kim Garst. She and I jump right into how you can absolutely increase your profits using Facebook Live. You just have to get over that initial fear that is holding you back from going LIVE on camera.

Ahem…I do realize this is harder than it sounds for many. HOWEVER, getting in front of your audience is your golden ticket to connecting with them personally and deepening your relationship with them. And, let me tell you, this correlates to larger profit margins - much, much larger.

For Kim, leveraging LIVE video streaming increased her profits by hundreds of thousands of dollars. I want this to be you telling me that this happened for you too!

The thing with Facebook Live is that, well, it’s live. And, anything can happen. So remember to relax, be prepared, and bring your personality and everything will be fine.

Once you see the metrics from your first Facebook Live broadcast, that will be all the encouragement you need to do another and another and another…

Kim shares a huge secret about the free reach of Facebook Live and why Facebook is able to successfully increase your newsfeed presence by 10 times that of a regular post. We also discuss strategies and tips for creating incredibly successful Facebook Live broadcasts, leveraging the extensive reach.

We take a deep dive into:

  • What types of content are most useful for Facebook Live

  • Which additional social platforms complement your Facebook Live broadcast

  • Where your focus should be while you’re live

  • How professional or casual you should be

  • The ideal cadence and timing for Facebook Live sessions

  • Where you’ll find the metrics from your broadcast and how to leverage the results

  • How to edit titles, images and posts for your broadcast

  • The best strategies for communicating your upcoming Facebook Live to your lists and groups

With these tips, your skill set and confidence will increase. The more Facebook Live broadcasts you do, the better you will become. I have the utmost faith in your ability to kill it!

I love that I took the leap into Facebook Live. The organic reach of these videos blows my mind and it is positively affecting my bottom line.

Right away after the broadcast you can see the metrics.

Get in here and start learning! It truly will have a tremendous effect on your businesses.

May 23, 2016
#110: Beating Facebook’s Algorithm - and More Facebook Ad Tips with Rick Mulready
33:06

Are you getting the most out of your Facebook ad efforts?

As promised in episode 104, my good friend Rick Mulready is back and we are continuing the conversation about Facebook ads. This week we tackle how to make your Facebook ads work for you, how you can leverage Facebook algorithms, and a couple of online advertising fundamentals that cannot be overlooked.

Your Questions This Week:

  • If my ad is getting results, can I use the same ad for different launches?
  • Are conversions for Facebook ads lower on weekends?
  • Should I ramp up my ad Facebook ad budget in the days before my webinar?
  • Are Lookalike Audiences on Facebook be effective?
  • I’m not converting leads. What am I doing wrong?
  • Do you have any tips for writing irresistible and compelling ad copy?

The insights provided in this episode will immediately help you focus your Facebook ads and scale your audience. To get started, click here.

These questions are from entrepreneurs just like you who are in the trenches, building your audience, and are navigating the ins and outs of Facebook advertising.

By the way—if you aren’t familiar with Facebook algorithms and how they work—KEEP READING (or better yet: Start listening!). Rick’s knowledge on this topic could dramatically change how you approach your campaigns.

For example, can you use the same ad for different launches? Sure. However, there are some guidelines to follow if you do this. Rick gives such an awesome answer that includes being careful about how much time has passed since you last ran the ad.

His response is a prime example of how Facebook algorithms can work for or against you. Listen in as Rick shares how to be sure to make these algorithms work for you.

I’m not converting leads. What am I doing wrong?

There’s no magic answer, which is a little stressful, I know. However, Rick provides a strategy for finding the answer that’s right for your outcome. So, you’ll find hope as he walks you through how to diagnose where your leads are going off-track.

Those are just two teaser Q&As, but listen here to hear them all.

As we near the end of our episode, Rick and I tackle how to write compelling copy for Facebook ads. Here’s what you will gain from listening in:

  • What you might be focusing on vs. what you should focus on.
  • How to write ad copy to attract your ideal audience.
  • Strategies for learning what your ideal audience member wants to hear from you.

I love the takeaways in this episode and I know you will find them extremely advantageous for your business, so let’s get listening!

May 19, 2016
#109: Battle-Tested Tools to Rock Your Business
39:02

Three questions for you before we start today:

  • Do you want to grow your business? (Check!)
  • Do you want to leverage more of your day to day? (Check!)
  • Do you want to make your life--personally and professionally--easier? (Check!)

Then you need the ultimate tools for your trade. And today I am in my cave of resources to share exactly what I use to scale my business, get maximum output from my team, and streamline so many different areas o of my life.

So, what tools do I use? I’m glad you asked!

Along with these resources I also provide the pros and cons of using them and the insider hacks that I’ve come to realize along the way.

Because these tools will serve your business so well, I’ve created a free cheat sheet of all my FAVORITE tools, links to where you grab them, how they work and those awesome hacks I use to make them work even better.

These hacks will save you time, money, and headaches.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Battle-Tested Tools That Will Rock Your Business

FREE DOWNLOAD

No tool is going to be the end all be all for any project, but you need to find ones that work for you and stick with them.

Commit to these and your team will follow suit. I was once that person who kept switching out tools because I would “find something better.”

My team finally called me on it and I came up with these battle-tested tools that we use on a daily basis. I can’t wait for you to check them out for yourself!

May 12, 2016
#108: How Can I Be The Expert If I'm Just Starting Out?
26:38

How can I be an expert if I am brand new at all of this and no one is paying attention—yet?

This is a valid, legitimate, understandable concern. My best advice: Get over that doubt as quickly as possible and get moving.

Here’s why:

We all started somewhere. All the experts you follow and admire today started at the bottom.

When I started my business 6 years ago, I was so afraid of so many different things.

A big lesson I learned along the way is that you are the expert of your content, your voice and your audience. Don’t think less than that at any moment.

In this episode I walk you through the Five Reminders that You Can Be The Expert Inside your Online Course. These reminders are drawn from what I have learned over the last six years. I share my secrets to success because I want you to break through those fears immediately.

Before I get into it, I want to tell you about this week’s freebie.

Whether you’re a coach, consultant, speaker, freelancer or service provider of ANY kind, owning your own course is a game changer that can have a dramatic effect on your income and impact.

Recently I’ve reverse-engineered the biggest lessons I’ve learned from five of my own successful online courses (that have served over 35,000 entrepreneurs while generating $6.4 million in revenue) and I’ve put all those key learnings in a brand new free master class.

My LIVE master class is called "How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days" and before it’s too late, I want you to grab your virtual seat!

Now, back to it—

The five reminders will let you know that you’re capable of embarking on this journey and more so that you are ready to take action NOW.

Listen in to learn the two areas where you might be holding yourself back when moving forward with building your online business.

Also, I give you the tips and strategies you need to assure yourself that you are the expert.

You will also learn the qualities that make a great online teacher and the surprise qualities that you think you might need, but don’t.

If you are thinking about building a course in the near future—or if you’ve ever felt like a fraud while growing your business— I think you will find these reminders incredibly valuable.

This episode is for you if you:

  • Wonder if your “newness” will impact the quality of your class
  • Want to learn more about cultivating your teaching skills
  • Are curious about just how much commitment you need to start a class (the answer may surprise you!)
  • Are nervous about the competition and how to push it away or embrace it

These reminders are a great trigger for me every time I start a new course. I hope you find them as valuable as I do.

Don’t forget to grab your virtual in my LIVE, Free Master Class, "How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.”

 

Apr 26, 2016
#107: How Do I Price My Online Course?
42:00

I want you to price your next (or first!) online course with confidence.

In your heart of hearts, are you getting paid what you’re worth? Are you hitting the “sweet spot” of pricing perfection?

This week I tackle these questions and give you a seven-step pricing strategy so you can determine what you should really charge for your course—and feel whole about the entire process.

I am INCREDIBLY passionate about this topic. Creating my own profitable and content-driven online courses has been the key to my success and I want to make it the key to your success too.

But first, I have something really exciting to share with you. I have a new master class ready to be unveiled: “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.”

In this master class, I share the secrets I’ve learned from helping 38,000 entrepreneurs, while making more than $6 million in revenue.

Grab your spot (it’s free!)

Now, back to today’s topic: In your gut, are you charging what you’re worth?

I would bet that this is the hardest part to starting your first online course—or even maybe your second or third.

Ask yourself these three questions:
  • Are you afraid to ask for what you’re worth?
  • Are you willing to deliver 10x the value of what you’re charging?
  • Does your price point attract the clientele you want?

Let’s dig into the seven steps here.

One of the first steps I share is surprisingly missed by many entrepreneurs. It is such a crucial part in determining your price and I don’t want you to skip it.

Then, we tackle how your product fits into your business. This is key for determining the most attractive price point for what you are offering. I ask you a couple of questions to help you through this step. It can be a tricky road to navigate. Listen here.

Next, we talk about the length of time it can take to launch and re-launch your product.

Ultimately, I want to help you get solid on how you feel about the price you’ve set. Once you decide on the price point, you’ve got to own it.

These seven steps will help you do just that. Own your price. Be confident. And go sell it.

 

Apr 07, 2016
#106: Are You Repelling or Attracting Your Potential Customers with Jasmine Star
41:48

Do you know the detailed story of your perfect ideal customer?

I am not just talking demographics or a just few pain points and struggles— I mean the nitty gritty, day in the life kind of stuff.

Because my special guest, marketing and branding strategist Jasmine Star, paints such a vivid picture of her avatar, Elle, that I feel like I know her as well as my best friend.

I think once you hear about Elle and how Jasmine created her—and how you can create your own story—you will be riveted.

That is just ONE of the many brilliant pieces of insight Jasmine drops when she stops by for my latest episode.

Other amazing takeaways from my new favorite branding and marketing strategist:

  • Learn the best approach to understanding how your product can help your audience—and ultimately how that will shift your approach to social media.

  • Check out strategies for empowering your potential customers to choose you over your competitors. Your competition isn’t going anywhere, but if you can build trust with your clients and make their life easier, they will stick with you.

  • Discover the keys to writing better copy, creating better emails, and nailing your social media—all with just a few KEY tips.

I had the MOST fun creating the episode this week—because I found Jasmine so brutally honest, funny and refreshing.

Listen in (and get ready to laugh) as Jasmine explains the 5 key tips for growing your brand.

Stay tuned for later in the episode when Jasmine goes into my favorite tip! It’s obvious you want people to love you and your social media, however, you actually WANT to repel some people. It’s so important and in the best interest of your business. She breaks down how to do this with finesse and self-assurance in order to grow your tribe.

Apr 04, 2016
#105: Where Do I Start?
37:49

I get asked all of the time: Amy, where do I start? And the answer is to start with building your business in Phase One, and progress to Phase Two. This is how to build a business that will endure in the long term, and really fulfill the lifestyle you are looking for.

I know this because I can look back and see what worked for my own business, and what I would have changed if I had to do it all again.

With Phase One, you focus on how to make money in the here and now.

In this phase, you are asking these kinds of questions: What skills and knowledge do you have right now to ensure you can make money quickly? Who’s your avatar? Do you have a solid plan in place to grow your list? What’s your strategy for your blog or posting to social media?

In this phase you are sharpening your skills and getting into the trenches with your ideal customer avatar so that you can understand their needs, wants and genuine pain points. This intel is incredibly valuable as you begin to hone in on your own messaging for your business.

I’ll walk you through several business models that are perfect for this level.

Then with Phase Two, we move into creating a business and life you love.

For this, you will ask yourself: What’s my ultimate business model?

There needs to be an alignment between what you want to do and what your avatar wants from you: That’s the sweet spot.

In many situations, including my own, a business model that offers A LOT of flexibility, consistent revenue and an abundance of opportunity to impact your audience is one that is built on you creating online training programs.

Listen in to see how to put all of this into action.

I also want to remind you to download my special freebie for today’s episode, called, “Where Should My Support Dollars Go?”

One aspect that ANY level should be thinking about is: How do I make the most of my time by hiring support? I want to give you a little cheat sheet to help you hire the right level of support for where you are at in your business.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Guide: Where Should My Support Dollars Go?

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Mar 28, 2016
#104: Your Facebook Ad Questions Answered with Rick Mulready
34:17

Do you have questions about Facebook advertising? That’s a silly question, right? We’ve all got questions! (Why does Facebook have to make it so complicated sometimes?!)

This week I have my go-to-resource for all things Facebook ads with us, Rick Mulready.

You might remember Rick from previous episodes. He left the corporate world to help entrepreneurs like you optimize your online advertising. I could not be more excited that he’s back with the latest “need to know now!” details to help us optimize our Facebook ads.

In addition to answering the questions below in exquisite detail, he is also hosting a FREE workshop on how to create a lead system using Facebook ads. (Scroll to the bottom to learn how to grab your seat.)

Here’s a list of the questions we answered on this recent episode:

  • Could you share a case study about Facebook ad spend, list growth and conversions?
  • What do I do if my ads aren’t converting well?
  • How are people getting around the character limit on Facebook ads?
  • Should I use an image or a video?
  • Is there any way to get more insight as to why Facebook rejected my ad?
  • Is what I spend per ad too much?
  • How do I know if my pixels are set up properly and reporting accurately?
  • The pages I want to target are not coming up for me. Am I targeting correctly?

The answers from Rick are killer and I don’t want you to miss them. If you want to jump right in, click here.

During our chat, Rick shares the case study of a holistic health practitioner who saw an avenue for growth by teaching her way of business to her peers. She created a video campaign and ran with it. Only, she inadvertently made a “mistake” and drove traffic to a site that I would otherwise say is unwise—but it WORKED for her.

In making this “mistake” her conversion rate grew to 40%-50%. She spent $3,000 and earned a return of $30,000. You have to listen to Rick’s explanation of why this worked.

Rick insists that if you aren’t converting your leads, you must keep it simple and take a look at the top one or two statistics that are most relevant to your outcome. Do you have the right target audience? What is your conversion rate? What is your click through rate?

Rick tells you the general cost per conversion that you should strive to spend. He also likes to see a 20% and above conversion rate on a landing page. He explains strategies and actions that you can take to make sure you’re on the right track to achieve this.

For those of you dying to know how your competitors are adding more text to their Facebook ad than is allowed, Rick tells you precisely how. We also discuss when it’s best to post a video or an image with your ad.

One of my favorite insights was that Facebook’s chat helpline is up and running. You heard me right . . . LIVE FACEBOOK AD CHAT! He explains where to find the live chat session, and he raves about the good results he’s gotten from reaching out.

Lastly, Rick talked about targeting and what to do when you can’t find the Facebook Pages you want to target. He shares three sure-fire tips for successful targeting. It may take some detective work at times, but it will pay off.

Don’t forget to register for one of Rick’s three, FREE, live webinars (on April 12 and 13) to discover how you can create an automated system that gets leads and sales everyday for your business.

EPISODE 104

Register for Rick's Free Webinar Training on Facebook Ads

LEARN MORE

I’m thrilled to tell you that Rick has agreed to come on more regularly to answer your pressing questions. We know that you need these answers to keep moving forward. Look back for another “Amy and Rick FB Ad Q&A Session” in about six weeks!

Mar 26, 2016
#103: Scaling Your e-Commerce Business with Steve Chou
46:40

Google-ads, targeting, and Facebook-scaling, oh my!

We are LUCKY to have e-commerce expert and trainer Steve Chou in my latest episode to keep you in the know of what’s working now in e-commerce.

The great thing about this interview is that although we are talking about e-commerce, the insights are applicable across several areas—business coaching, information marketing, growing your email list, webinars, and so much more!

Quick story about Steve: He owns the site, mywifequitherjob.com. And she did. They live in the gorgeous (and pricey) Silicon Valley. She wanted to quit her job to have more time with their kiddos, but they had to figure out a way to supplement her $100,000 salary. They started the site and in the first year it became a success.

HOW did Steve do that? Steve goes into detail on how he and his wife grew their business by driving traffic to their e-commerce site in this week’s episode.

First and foremost determining the best sites for your e-commerce marketing depends on what your value proposition is. What are you looking to market online with e-commerce?

If it lends itself to searches; for example, Google shopping converts very well. But you see, if you’re selling something general like T-shirts, Google might not be your best bet. And, you might want to go with the targeted marketing on Facebook for better conversion rates. Other businesses like Steve’s e-commerce wedding site where he sells custom wedding handkerchiefs, use both Facebook and Google ads. He dives into that kind of detail in our chat.

Steve and I touched on

  • When Google shopping will work in your favor
  • When using Facebook is ideal
  • What the minimum price point is of something you would want to advertise on Facebook

Equally important for you, Steve sees content as the next wave of how to market products and services and I could not agree more. We got into an important discussion on why video will be the next major trend and why you need to know where you should use it.

It all comes down to REALLY knowing your audience and who will buy your product.

Want to know how to scale your Facebook ads? This is one of the topics Steve and I discuss and I’ve created a free training video for you to dive a little deeper.

Whether you’re looking to improve your e-commerce site, build your list, or grow your consulting business, these spot-on Facebook ad scaling tips are for you!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Free Training Video: Scaling Your Facebook Ads

FREE DOWNLOAD

Listen to Steve give you more strategies on content, training programs and growing your business via Facebook, Google, Instagram, and Pinterest here.

Mar 21, 2016
#102: How to Create Content Rituals to Get More Done
35:56

My quarter one has felt chaotic. I felt scattered. Everything except time to create content was dictating my life.

It was time for a new approach to my schedule.

I know you feel me here. I needed a die-hard plan to make time for what drives my business forward. I needed a content creation RITUAL.

That’s why this episode is so important to share with you, because you will be able to apply my learnings to formulate a content creation ritual that works for you.

Last week, we talked about priorities in your business—and life. This week, we are taking it one step further and breaking down how to manage your work time and space, so that you are earth-shatteringly-productive and focused on what matters in your business.

First and foremost know this—I am insanely committed to my ritual for content creation, but by no means is it easy. I still struggle with it daily because my mind still thinks I should be doing a million other things. It’s TOUGH.

In fact I’m so committed that I have developed my own Tiger Time. That’s right, Tiger Time.

This is the part of my day that I fiercely protect (like a tiger and her cub!) in order to give myself the time and space to create my BEST content. The rules are strict, but the rewards are HUGE.

It’s been so successful for me that I’ve created a freebie that will walk you through the steps to create your own content creation ritual. So, to take action on what you’ve just learned here, to grab it.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Free Content Creation Ritual Worksheet

FREE DOWNLOAD

I’ll also clue you in on a few musts for planning out my week—including what helps me prepare for the week ahead, and an old, yet trusty planning tool that I’ve dusted off from the past.

It’s all in the latest episode—I hope you enjoy and see this ritual make a real impact on your business!

Mar 14, 2016
#101: How to Intentionally Design the Life You Want with Michael Hyatt
34:39

When my dear friend Michael Hyatt said he was going to come by to join us for our latest episode, I knew it was going to be good, and profound.

And in my latest episode, he doesn’t disappoint, ladies and gentlemen...

Because he’s talking about the ONE thing we should be focused on in our lives: Our life plan. It’s all tied to his latest book, Living Forward: A Proven Plan to Stop Drifting and Get the Life You Want, which Michael co-authored with Daniel Harkavy.

Why, you might ask, is a life plan more important than many areas of your business?

Because, as Michael says:

“A failure in one area can reverberate and cascade into other areas of our life.”

So when you’re overall life plan is off track, then your business is naturally off. According to Michael, when you’re what he calls “drifting,” you’re distracted, overwhelmed and unaware of where you should put your focus. This can create an environment for failure.

Michael helps you understand that by getting your priorities in line, so you can be prepared to make the little decisions you need to get the big results you want out of your business, and in life.

Because, it’s not the big moves that determine the quality of our output, it’s actually the little actions. In last week’s episode, I explained how I grew my business via incremental steps and not one large move.

Michael takes this one step further to help us decide what we should be focusing on in our lives, so that we are prepared and patient enough to conquer those little steps.

To get started, he prompts you to ask yourself:

  • How do you want to be remembered?
  • What is most important to you?
  • How do I get from here (wherever that is) to where I want to be?

Michael then shares the surprising reality about putting yourself first. (It’s a tough lesson.)

The book is packed with great insights, and Michael has a special deal if you buy the book tomorrow (March 11). If you purchase Living Forward by tomorrow, Michael will give you for FREE:

  • A detailed action plan guide
  • The Living Forward quick-start audio training
  • A custom Living Forward adult coloring book

To claim your bonus:

Visit the following link and follow the prompts http://livingforwardbook.com/#claimbonuses

After talking with Michael, I am more empowered than ever to determine a clear destination and make the tough choices I need to make to get me there.

So my friends, get ready to be present, be engaged and be fully focused. Get ready for a life of less drifting, and more fulfillment. Go here now to check out this special interview with Michael.

Mar 08, 2016
#100: When is the Right Time to Add Another Product to Your Business?
33:33

Today's episode is #100 (let's celebrate!)-- and I've got another hot topic I wanted to talk to you all about. This hot topic is focused on a big mistake I see a lot (especially in the first two years of business!) but I rarely talk about. Until now.

It begins with deciding on which path you should take for your business: Horizontal OR Vertical? 

Which is best for your business right now? How do you know if you are on the right path? And which path did I choose from own my business (to see crazy good results)? 

You can see the answers to these questions and more in my latest podcast episode here.

100th Podcast Episode Giveaway

Not only are we talking about such an important topic on today's episode, but I've also got something incredibly exciting to share with you!

I often get asked if I do one-on-one coaching and while I don't have the bandwidth to add coaching to my business currently, in honor of my 100th episode I wanted to create something extra special. That's why I'm giving one person the opportunity to get laser coaching from me in person, right here in San Diego, California.

If you are the winner, you get to come out to San Diego for the day where I will put you up at the Omni La Costa Resort and Spa right near my home. (You're going to love it--it's gorgeous.) Bright and early in the morning, we will meet in person and spend the day taking a deep dive into your entire business.

We'll look at everything: your avatar, your messaging, your positioning, your products, programs, offers, list-building funnel, all of it. I will give you my insights, my feedback, and advice to help you take your business to the next level whether it be horizontal or vertical.

After we're done and our brains are good and fried, we'll go out to a fun dinner together and celebrate our accomplishments. Sound good?

How to Enter The 100th Episode Contest

Make a short video (under 3 minutes) in which you tell me...

  • What you do
  • Why you would be a good candidate for a deep dive with me
  • What you hope to get out of spending a day with me here in San Diego.

Post your video on YouTube and enter the following in the description:

www.amyporterfield.com Amy Porterfield’s Online Marketing Made Easy Podcast Contest

Post the link to your video in the comments on the blog below.

If you want to take it one step further, share your video on social media with the link to our contest page (www.amyporterfield.com/100th_episode) and the hashtag #AmysCoachingGiveaway  (Sharing your video on social media isn't 100% necessary. I know some of you might feel like you don't want to put yourself out there that much just yet. But I would really appreciate it if you did!)

Okay, those are the ground rules. If you want some real insight into how to make your entry as compelling and convincing as possible, keep reading...

Who Should Enter This Contest

My offer of coaching is good for someone with an established business that wants to up-level, but it’s also good for someone that’s just starting out.

As long as you’ve been in business for at least a year, you know what you want to offer, you’ve started to build out your foundation such as creating consistent content or you’ve got a blog or podcast, then you too are a good candidate for this contest. You don’t need to be well established in your business for me to choose you for this special opportunity.

Now here are some pointers for creating your entry: 

  • In the video you make, I want you to not just tell me about yourself, but really show me what you're about. Get as creative and expressive as you feel comfortable.

  • This isn't a "technology" contest--I'm not going to pick somebody just because they used a lot of fancy video effects--but if video production is your jam, then go for it! Do whatever helps you express yourself the most.

  • My team and I will select one winner based on your initiative, your willingness to put yourself out there, your enthusiasm, and your ability to communicate clearly what you do and what you want to get out of this time together.

  • You have until Sunday March 6, to post your video.

  • All video entries must be posted in the comments of these show notes by Sunday, March 6, at 11:59 p.m. PST.

  • We will announce the winner on Monday, March 13, by putting it into the show notes here and, of course, contacting the winner. Aaaand I will probably be talking about it all around social media, because I'll be way too excited to keep it inside!

Don't Be Shy!

I know it’s a big step to put yourself out there with this whole video entry thing. But I really want to encourage you to do so! This opportunity to meet with me and put a laser focus on you and your business could be business-changing and life-changing! I promise I will make it worth your time.

I'd also like to take a minute to thank you immensely for following me on my journey of creating this podcast. It truly is one of the most favorite things I do inside my business. It has probably made the biggest impact in my ability to reach bigger audience and connect with you and grow my business overall.

Thank you so very much for letting me do what I love. I cannot wait to continue this podcast with more and more episodes about building your business and list building and webinars and all the cool stuff I get to talk about. Here's to the next 100 episodes!

And I cannot wait to see what you create in your own business...starting with your videos!

CONTEST WINNER ANNOUNCEMENT:

Whoa! We were blown away by all the AMAZING entries. After spending all week reviewing each submission, we are so excited to announce that the winner of the all expense paid trip to San Diego for a one day Deep Dive with me is:

Christina Tondevold

Christina, I cannot wait to connect with you in person to map out a plan to knock your business out of the park and get you home more with your sweet children. Please email Trivinia@amyporterfield.com to work out final details for your trip, which will happen later on this year.

But, there’s more…

With hundreds of submissions, I knew it would be hard to narrow this down. I’d love to spend a day with each of you! While we were able to come away with a clear winner, I did have a list of entrants that I wanted to offer something special to. So… if these folks would reach out to trivinia@amyporterfield.com, we have a super fun idea that we’d like to run by you.

Michelle Evans

Craig Sylvester

Annette Stephanian

Sara King

Heather Ryan

Daniel Fava

I want you ALL to hear this . . . I KNOW it was not easy to make a video and put yourself out there like that. I was so touched by the effort and vulnerability that went into each and every video. Many made me cry, many made my laugh and ALL of them touched my heart. Thank you for taking the time to share a little piece of yourself with me. Although I could only choose one winner, your video truly mattered to me!

- Amy

Mar 03, 2016
#99: How to Create a List Building Blitz Campaign
34:12

Over the last few years, I've noticed that one of the big reasons my students struggle with list building is that they lack consistent original content in their marketing strategy.

It's an easy trap to fall into. After all, creating content takes time, effort and creativity.

You might even be thinking "Amy, all my focus is going into creating my product for sale. How am I supposed to come up with fresh original content every week?"

Well, good news--this episode is all about helping you create just one piece of amazing content each month.

You heard right. Each. Month.

When you have that one piece of amazing epic content, you can spin it out into every marketing channel in your toolbox with the overall goal of building your list.

Content Comes in Three Stages

I think there’s a lot of confusion out there around content. It seems simple, but when I sat down and started mapping what successful content looks like in different contexts, I'll admit that even I got confused!

So I checked in with a good friend from my corporate job days. She’s the best at dissecting content and explaining where it shines the brightest. And what she showed me is that there are three main stages of content:

  • Paid
  • Free lead magnet
  • Just plain free (not even for an opt-in)

Notice I said "stages." All three of these types of content are related to each other--which means every time you create one kind of content, the other two are super easy to create out of it. Click here to find out how you can use the main themes within your paid product to create epic content that builds your list!

Easy Strategies for Getting More Mileage Out of Your Epic Content

Now, like I said earlier, the "meat" of the strategy we’re diving into in this episode is getting deliberate about your content creation so you can extend it across all your marketing channels. When you really get intentional with your content (and create it with your email list in mind), you're all to get huge mileage out of one piece.

After all, we take our content creation seriously. So why not put a bigger focus on getting it in front of more people while we’re creating it?

In this episode, I'm going to walk you through three roadmaps for extending one piece of epic content into every major marketing platform you use.

To make it extremely easy for you, I've put together some free worksheets that show how to break up your content into different platforms within each roadmap. Click here to get them now!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Your Free Cheat Sheet: "The List Builders Blitz Campaign"

FREE DOWNLOAD

To get the most out of today's topic, you'll really want to listen to the whole episode. But I'll outline the roadmaps for you here:

Strategy 1: Start by writing an epic blog post that includes an epic upgrade (something your readers can take more action on to get more value).

From there, you'll move to emailing your list, creating videos, doing a Periscope, and more. Click here to get all the steps now!

Strategy 2: Start by creating an epic podcast episode with an upgrade.

From the podcast, you'll create a blog post. Not just show notes, but something that brings immense value even to people that may not have heard your podcast. Next you'll email your list, create a video, and more. Click here to get all the steps.

Strategy 3: Start by creating an epic video.

The first thing you'll need to know is how to provide the content upgrade in your video...click here to find out! Next, you'll take the audio from your video to create a podcast, use the audio to create a blog post...the list goes on.

Find out the details on each of these strategies, including what constitutes an "epic" piece of content and what to put in the initial content versus what to put in the freebie, by listening to the whole episode. Click here to listen now!

The End Goal = Your Email List

Now, this whole strategy takes a little thought and effort to execute properly. That's why you won’t be using this strategy with every single piece of new content you create. Like I said, I’m suggesting you be selective with this concept and put it to work about once a month. That gives you lots of room to pace each appearance of the content within your various marketing channels (and to repost it at least once) without making it seem like overload.

Bottom line, the mindset around your campaign should always be about building your email list by getting people to your freebie. When you're creating core quality content with your email list in mind, it uplevels everywhere that content appears.

Feb 25, 2016
#98: Four Big Lies We Tell Our Entrepreneurial Selves
45:53

You know how much I love battle-tested, ultra-successful online marketing strategies. The only thing I love better is sharing strategies like these with you! It makes me so happy when we get in the trenches together and master the techniques that bring us the results we crave.

But this week, we're doing something a little different.

I'm in the midst of setting up my List-Builders Lab program right now, and I have to say that I'm really feeling the effect of all the strategies I've learned (and shared with you) over the past year. Let me tell you that the confidence I feel makes a world of difference in the midst of pre-launch craziness.

And that got me thinking about how insanely important it is in your business to have your mind right!

We don't think about this too much--we're too busy looking for the right tools, the right strategies, the right technology, etc. But if your confidence is struggling even just a bit, no strategy is going to work inside your business the way it should.

That's why today's podcast episode is all about lies, lies, lies...

And, of course, the truth that we need to replace them.

As you likely already know, to win the game of becoming a successful entrepreneur, you’ve got to focus occasionally on what’s going on between your two ears.

Today's post is all about the lies that I've personally dealt with! And sometimes, in low moments, I still hear them creeping up on me.

But with the help and advice of other friends in the online business world, I know what to tell myself when those lies show up...and that's what I want to pass on to you today.

Lie #1: You have to be the best in your market.

Sometimes, when we're just starting out, we feel like we need to be number one, the best, and out on top in our market. That's not always the case. Click here for my take on the all too common lie we tell ourselves, and what the truth really looked like for me, even when it came to getting real with my signature course offering.

Lie #2: You have to find the balance between your work and your family and all that comes in between that.

You might be surprised to hear that I don't believe in balance. While working with Tony Robbins, I learned a very important lesson that I continue to reflect on during different seasons of my business growth. I encourage you to listen to the full episode to hear exactly what balance looks like in my business. I share some powerful takeaways that I've learned recently that you don't want to miss!

Lie #3: Your failures that are adding up are proof that you’re never going to make this work.

Sometimes, when things aren’t working as we’re trying to build our businesses online, we go to a really dark place, where our whole business idea looks like a disaster and we start wondering if we are going to have to go back to the 9-to-5 job. Oh, boy have I been in place where I hated where my business was headed. Listen here, and I'll tell you what I did to make things shift.

Lie #4: Every opportunity that comes your way is big, and you can’t miss out on it or you’ll be left behind.

If you know my story, you know that for the first couple of years, I really struggled, and thought I constantly had to seize every opportunity that came my way, or I might miss my big break. Whether you're a full blown entrepreneur, or still working a corporate job while you transition, there are huge lessons I learned from this mindset. I'll share a few of them here, as well as some sage advice on what might work for you if you struggle in this area.

Stopping the Lies = Knowing the Truth

I know it’s not enough to just tell you what these lies are. You need to know how to flip them around with truth! Once you have the truth, those lies can't hold you back anymore, and you can really start building momentum in your business.

Since we're all about truth-telling today, I'll be honest and say that today's episode felt a little bit uncomfortable for me at times. It's not always easy for me to talk about topics that might not feel super good. And I don’t get to say, “Click this, go here, do that,” because we’re not talking about those specific strategies.

But I think it’s important to get really honest with ourselves, in order to be sure that those strategies will work. I hope that’s what this episode did for you, and that it redirects and recharges you, so that you start finding out how to create the business you absolutely love.

Feb 16, 2016
#97: How to Grow a Profitable Facebook Group
47:24

Today we're diving into a new aspect of Facebook marketing that may very well surprise you!

If you've hosted a webinar or an online course, you have probably also created a private Facebook group as a bonus for your clients. In addition to offering extra support and relationship, private Facebook groups are an amazing way to galvanize your clients into a true community. (Always a great thing when it comes to brand loyalty!)

But did you know that the community-creating power of private Facebook groups can be a hugely effective sales tool? 

My guests on the podcast today are Josh and Jill Stanton from Screw the 9 to 5, and they're going to share their secret strategy for using private Facebook groups to warm up your audience for sales.

Using Facebook groups in this way is really unique to Josh and Jill--as far as I know, nobody else out there is using this strategy to grow revenue.

That's because we usually think of Facebook groups as being an "after the fact" thing. You create the product, people buy it and then they're part of the group.

But what Josh and Jill have realized that there's a ton of sales power in making your audience "part of the group" before they ever spend a dime with you!

Re-think Your Page

Right off the bat, Jill makes a statement that could ruffle the feathers of a lot of online marketers:

"Facebook Pages are dead to me."

Once you recover from that bombshell, don't rush to the "Delete" button on your page! There's definitely a place for Facebook Pages...even Jill and Josh still use theirs.

But what Jill is saying is that the Page setup is really more of a one-way street when it comes to interacting with your audience. For example, when fans comment on your page, their words show up in a sidebar...not exactly a real conversation, is it?

Turning Your Brand into a Facebook Family

By contrast, a Facebook group lets the "family atmosphere" of your brand really flourish. When you gather the people who have genuine interest in your business into a private setting--one in which they can interact with you as another member (an extra-knowledgeable and authoritative member, of course)--you're able to build a community of affinity and trust around your brand.

A community in which you are the go-to source for what your audience wants to know/solve/accomplish.

A community that is brought together by the experience of your program, product or service.

If you're ready to find out the nuts and bolts of this ingenious Facebook marketing strategy, click here to listen to the whole episode now!

...Oh, and be sure to pay attention for a special bonus topic in my conversation with Josh and Jill: what to do when you realize that you don't really like your business model. (Yes, it's possible to change!)

Feb 10, 2016
#96: How to Find Clarity & Get Focused with Marie Forleo
45:36

Marie Forleo has been in the online entrepreneurship game for seventeen years. She's appeared on Oprah, been interviewed by Tony Robbins, hung out with Richard Branson.

...and she still doesn’t feel like she’s ever had a “big break.”

Yes, really.

The whole "big break" thing is a myth, Marie says. And that's not because she doesn't know how it feels to wish for one! She remembers sitting in her studio apartment, staring at the computer screen, fantasizing about the "fairy business godmother" who would sweep in and discover her potential.

But the career she's built today--the best-selling books, the hugely popular MarieTV series, the constant stream of success stories from her B School training program who approach her on the street to thank her for changing their lives--didn't come from a single amazing opportunity being dropped into her lap.

"What I’ve been able to see now, in hindsight, is there is no single opportunity that anyone else can give you that is more important for your success than the small daily actions you must take every day."

Great quote, right? There's more to come. Every question I asked Marie in our interview brought some amazing sound bites--I was scrambling to write them all down! To get a taste of her wisdom in these quotes...listen to the whole episode for Marie's insights on how to overcome perfectionism and self-doubt, the main way to unite your audience into a tribe, and what daily actions you must take to achieve the success you desire!

If you want to sign up for Marie's FREE Video Series (You need to watch Video 2 - trust us!), click here to sign up!

 

Feb 04, 2016
#95: How to Test Your Next Business Idea with Pat Flynn
50:44

Picture this: you wake up one morning with an amazing idea. You do a little research on it and, by the end of the day, feel a growing sense that this idea of yours has real selling potential. Maybe you even ask your audience directly if they'd be interested in this idea, and they give it a resounding "Yes, please!"

And then, after all this, you put your great idea into action...and it doesn't sell. Nothing comes of it.

When you spend time, effort, and money putting together something for your audience, only to hear crickets when you put it out into the world, it can really crush your confidence, not to mention put a dent in your bottom line.

But what if you could take your idea through a proven process that makes sure it's a good fit for you, your business, and for your audience?

Now that's a pretty good idea, right?

My good friend Pat Flynn has tested many, many great ideas over the course of his online career. And believe it or not, even Pat has had a few ideas that he thought were great end up dead in the water. That's what led to his new book Will It Fly?, which shows entrepreneurs how to test their great ideas for real value.

On today's podcast episode, Pat and I are going to walk you through some ideas, insights, and tips to help you learn how to test whether your idea will work for you and your audience. It's a great episode and you're going to want to hear the whole thing--trust me!

Pat is one of the hardest working guys out there. But even more impressive than his work ethic is his transparency. If you've visited his site, you've seen that he publishes his monthly revenue reports so that viewers can see real-life proof of how well his ideas work.

Success Isn't Overnight

As entrepreneurs, we're always talking about launching. Launching is a big part of what we do, but how often do we talk about what happens after you launch? Is your idea actually going to take off? Is it going to fly? Is it going to keep going or is it going to crash?

Whether you need permission to really get moving on your latest idea, or if you require some "tough love" in order to let this one go and keep searching for inspiration, Pat's book is going to give you some fundamental tools for entrepreneurial success.

EPISODE 95

Click Here to Check Out Pat's New Book "Will It Fly?"

LEARN MORE

The Three Validation Tests

One of the best things Pat's book offers is the three validation tests that show how an idea fits into your life, your strengths, and the overall goal of your business.

The Airport Test

Imagine that it's five years from now. You're at the airpot and you run into someone you haven't seen in the past five years. They ask you "How's life?"

Now imagine you answer "Life is great. It couldn't be better!" What would be happening, five years from now, to make you say that?

Now ask yourself: is the idea you're working on right now contributing to that five-years-from-now goal?

The History Test

This test makes you analyze three or four of the different jobs you've had in the past. You call to mind the position, the environment, the people you worked with, specific memories that are either pleasant or painful.

When you do a review like this, it helps you see what those jobs might have had in common...and why that pattern might be attracting you over and over. Does it point out a skill or a preference that you have? Whether they were good jobs or bad jobs, they have something valuable to tell you about who you are...and that will give you a better understanding of how your idea fits into your skill set.

The Shark Bait Test

Imagine you are a contestant on the show Shark Tank, standing in front of the celebrity investors and pitching your idea. Doing this honestly, from your gut, takes away the salesmanship from the exercise, and makes you really speak to why you and your idea are special and why people would be crazy not to get on board with it.

If you know Pat and his content at all, you know that his superpower is taking complex ideas and making them simple and easy to digest. And he brings that gift in full force to today's episode. His tips on how to tackle market research are worth their weight in gold!

Want to check out Pat's book, where he dives deep into the content he shared with us? Click here to find out more about his new book, Will It Fly.

EPISODE 95

Check Out Pat's New Book "Will It Fly?"

LEARN MORE

 

Jan 28, 2016
#94: Using Periscope to Grow Your Business
45:45

By now you've probably heard about Periscope, the live streaming social media platform that lets you talk to your fans in real time. It's the fastest growing social media platform of all time! Since Periscope launched in March 2015, it already has 15 million users. And get this: those users upload three years' worth of video content every day.

I dabbled with Periscope for a while in 2015, and to be honest, I couldn't figure out if I loved it or hated it. Mostly, I just didn't really understand how to use it to its fullest potential.

That's why I was so glad to talk with today's podcast guest. Zack Spuckler is a genuine Periscope ninja, and he has used the platform to do amazing things with his email list.

Whether you're an early adopter who is already using Periscope on a daily basis, or a skeptic who wonders if this medium is really going to last long enough to be worth the time it takes to learn it, this episode is one you just can't miss.

I'll be the first to admit that my biggest obstacle in using Periscope is the whole "live stream" nature of it. Frankly, it makes me nervous--I like to have a plan, a script, and a lot of chances to correct my mistakes.

At the same time, I recognize the real power of livestreaming to break the barriers between you and your audience. They get to come inside your world, and you get to be more personal and engaging with them. It lets your audience see a side of you that really no other social media platform offers.

Having said that, there are some do's and don'ts that go a long way toward making Periscope truly effective as a marketing tool. That's where Zach's expertise comes in!

In addition to offering tons of pro tips and insider tricks on how to use Periscope to best advantage (and a good estimate on how long it takes to really hit your stride) Zach has created a freebie just for you. It's a worksheet with five simple steps to guide you through your first Periscope broadcast. Click here to get it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Simple Broadcast System Worksheet

FREE DOWNLOAD

The Numbers

In Zach's first 30 days on Periscope, he did $10k in sales. (Listen to the podcast if you want to hear my reaction to this unbelievable number.) It's even more amazing when you find out that previous to this, Zach's all-time revenue high had been $1700 in a month.

So he started plugging all his channels into Periscope, to see what kind of results he got.

  • Would people convert on a webinar from Periscope? They would.
  • Would they convert from a funnel on Periscope? Sure enough.
  • Would they sign up for a lead magnet? Yup.
  • Would they like him on Facebook? Even that.
  • Would they buy $1500 product packages in the midst of a live stream? Yes, indeed, they would.

After a few weeks of this, people were noticing! They were asking Zach how he got these amazing results...so, naturally, he created a Periscope training course and sold it via Periscope.

I'll let Zach tell you what happened:

"I sold about $1,200 of the course at a $97 intro price. Then I did it again the next day. We ended up doing about $2,200 in sales with about an hour and a half of Periscopes. We hadn’t sent emails. We didn’t even have a sales page.

"Then I launched my Periscope course and really drove people there from Periscope. This will really tell you the power of it: I didn’t have a freebie ready for Periscope. I threw together a lead page that said, “I’m going to make a really cool Periscope freebie. I have no idea what it’s going to be, I just know that you should sign up for it.” We had over 200 people opt in for that and when all was said and done, in the course of the first 30 days and a little beyond that because we had launch, we had sold 60 copies of the course."

The Real Power Behind Periscope

Zach has tons of tips and tools that will help you create results like these on Periscope. But the real key to Zach's success isn't just the platform--it's the ability it gave him to really hear what his audience wanted.

Prior to using Periscope, Zach was facing that constant frustration of creating products that he thought his audience wanted from him, only to have nobody click the "Buy" button when he finally released it. But by engaging with his audience on live video, he could literally count the number of times people asked about something, and know exactly what it was they wanted.

"It’s just crazy, the engagement and conversion that you can get with live video. You don’t have to think anymore, you just have to listen. That's what I like about it."

If you're ready to really dive into Periscope and find out how to use it, click here to listen to the podcast now. And make sure to download the worksheet created especially for you by Zach himself.

 

Jan 21, 2016
#93: Affiliate Marketing Success with Rachel Luna
51:34

You know how important your list is to your business' growth. If you're measuring your list's health in terms of numbers, it can really get you down sometimes. It's easy to feel like the fate of your business is at a standstill until your list numbers in the thousands (or at least the high hundreds).

My guest on the podcast today is going to blow that myth out of the water! Rachel Luna is living proof that you don’t need a gigantic list to gain success. What really matters about your list isn’t the number of names and addresses on it, but the quality of those people in terms of their engagement with you.

Rachel’s success story is really a one-two punch. Not only does she show the power of what you can do with a highly engaged list, but she’s also a stellar example of how to do affiliate marketing right.

If you’ve thought about doing affiliate marketing but haven’t tried it…or if you’ve gone through it before with mediocre results…Rachel’s story is going to truly inspire you. And you’re also going to love the freebie Rachel created for us this week: it’s called the Confident Affiliate Marketing Starter Guide. You can get it by clicking here!

Secrets of an Affiliate Marketing Superstar

Last spring, Rachel worked with my business coach Todd Herman and chose to be an affiliate promoter of his 90-Day Year program. As a business/life coach to other entrepreneurs, Rachel is ultra-focused on taking action and setting goals, which made her a perfect fit for this promotion.

Her message is all about breaking through negative thoughts and limiting beliefs to achieve the success you want. This promotion really gave her a chance to practice what she preached. Rachel came into Todd's affiliate program with a list just over 5000.

That may sound like a lot, but bear in mind she was working among affiliates who had lists upward of 100k! She was a small fish in a very big pond. Actually, I also happened to be working with Todd as an affiliate for this program, as well.

And as the promotion got going, I started seeing this name I'd never heard before popping up on the leader board. Her numbers were going up at an astonishing rate. Other affiliates were starting to talk about her.

"Who is this Rachel Luna, and what is her secret?" Finally, I decided to get in touch with her to find out just that. And today she is sharing the secrets of her affiliate marketing success with all of us! Click here to start listening now.

The Steps to Affiliate Marketing Success

Rachel had done a few affiliate promotions in the past--by the time she got involved with Todd's 90-Day Year program, she had some solid standards for success in place:

  • She had rules to determine which affiliate programs she participates with. Rule #1 is not to promote anything she has not personally used. Rachel knows that to keep her list's trust, she has to limit her promotions to things that she knows will work and that she can offer knowledgeable support around.

  • She had a plan. It’s easy to think that because you’re working for someone else, you don’t have to put as much work into your launch. But Rachel really makes her affiliate partner’s business her own. She even created a Facebook group where she shared the details of her own success in using Todd’s program.

  • She had a revenue goal. This was Rachel’s fourth ever affiliate promotion, and she’d built up her capability over the previous three times. So this time, her goal was $14,000.

  • She set expectations. Right from the beginning, she let her audience know how long she’d be offering this free content from Todd. Doing this created urgency, and it also let anyone who wasn’t interested know that she wasn’t giving up her own brand forever.

  • She kept her audience engaged and accountable. Throughout the promotion, Rachel took a proactive approach to her audience. Every time content or a video was released, she would check in with her audience, tell them her takeaways and ask for theirs, keep tabs on whether they were doing their workbook exercise--whatever it took to keep them engaged. In essence, she treated the pre-launch content as if it were the program itself.

    "If you can help them get results right from jump street, they trust you, and it helps them fall in love with the program."

Find out more about how Rachel achieved such amazing affiliate success! Click here to listen now.

Overcoming Your Setbacks

You can see why Rachel was blowing us all away with her climbing numbers! This made it all the more devastating when, just one week before the official program kickoff, Rachel’s website got hacked. Everything she had planned for her promotion—blogs, sales pages, bonus materials that she’d created for her audience—was gone. Rachel considered not even doing the promotion. She’d spent hours putting all this together, only to have it wiped out overnight. But after talking with Todd, she decided to keep moving forward and see what happened.

"I sent off that first email which I had taken the time to write really well. I was very thoughtful about it. I was very intentional because I wanted to make sure it was something that would resonate with my audience."

And oh, did it ever resonate. By Day 1 of the promotion, Rachel had made $10k…almost 75% of her revenue goal. By Day 2, she’d surpassed her goal by $2000. By the time the launch ended, Rachel had made a $53,000 profit, almost four times her goal amount. By the way, this little fish, ended up finishing fourth overall out of all the affiliates promoting the program. Amazing!

You Don't Need a Big List to Get Big Results

Rachel shares a lot more details of what made her affiliate launch such a staggering success--how much she spent on Facebook ads, how she structured bonuses for her audience, etc.--in the full podcast episode. And of course you'll want to download her amazing freebie, the Confident Affiliate Marketing Starter Guide. 

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Confident Affiliate Marketing Starter Guide

FREE DOWNLOAD

But the biggest takeaway, in my view, was that Rachel didn't let the size of her email list stop her. She could have put off Todd's program until next time it came around, telling herself she was going to wait until her list was bigger. But instead, she took action with what she had, focused on maximizing her strengths, and didn't let setbacks slow her down.

"Sometimes, in my experience as a life coach, people aren’t so focused on taking action, they are focused on feeling better. They were happy with mediocre results. I want to have the best, most exciting. I want big."

Jan 13, 2016
#92: Facebook Ad Targeting 101
40:42

Let's kick off the New Year with an absolute game changer for your business: Facebook ad targeting.

Some of you by now have become really good at this. But if you're still struggling to nail your Facebook ad strategy, or if you're just getting started in this world, this episode is most definitely for you.

I work with a lot of business students who are just getting started with Facebook ads or have been dabbling in ads for a while without seeing much success. The number one mistake I see them making is targeting the wrong people. This usually happens for two reasons.

Some of my students truly don’t understand who their avatar is.

Others...the majority, in fact...know who their avatar is, but they just haven’t dug deep enough to understand them in a way that Facebook ad targeting could make a huge difference for them in their business.Specifically, they haven’t done the research or documented their successes and losses, so they aren’t really sure what’s working.

Here's what I always remind them: when you get really good at Facebook ad targeting, there is no doubt you are going to see some major shifts in the impact you have with your audience and a major increase in your revenue streams.

That's why I've created a roadmap that will let you know exactly where to focus, along with what needs to be on your radar from the get-go. It's really simple--just the way I like it--and it's set up so that you can keep adding to it as you learn exactly who your audience is and how to get in front of them. Basically, it's the key to unlocking the most valuable resource in your business.

I've put a lot into this episode for you, so make sure to listen to the whole podcast to get everything you need to start the new year off successfully!

I've also created a great freebie to help you with this plan--the Facebook Ad Targeting Starter Guide. It's a list of ten questions that you MUST be able to answer about your audience in order to fully optimize your Facebook ad targeting. Grab the special guide by clicking below!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Facebook Ads Targeting Starter Guide

FREE DOWNLOAD

Like I said, you've really got to listen to the whole episode to get all this great information I've put together for you. But to outline it for you, Facebook ad targeting breaks down into four specific opportunities:

Targeting Opportunity #1: Target Your Own Audiences

Say you already have an email list of at least 1,000 people. You can upload that email list to Facebook, Facebook will match your email list with their database and voila! You’ve got a targeting opportunity with your best, fastest-converting leads.

Targeting Opportunity #2: Targeting Your Own Facebook Fans

This list is not as warm as your own email list, but it is still a group of engaged people who are going to pay attention to you. Here’s the huge plus: you will almost always pay less with your Facebook ads when you target your own fan base versus a cold audience. If you ever needed a good reason to focus on building your Facebook fan base, I think this is the #1 best reason to do so.

Targeting Opportunity #3: Target Other Facebook Pages

This is where I want you to put the most time and energy when it comes to research and experimentation. Targeting other Facebook pages is the strategy that allows you the most opportunities.

I've also got a "super tip" to help you find out which pages you should be targeting. Click here to listen to the podcast now!

Targeting Opportunity #4: Creating Lookalike Audiences

A lookalike audience is basically you taking a custom audience that you have and then asking Facebook to find an audience that is really similar to your own audience you have already created

If you want to get a little bit more strategic with that (and I know you do!) you can try a technique called layering. I learned this from my friend James Wedmore, and I've been trying it out in my business lately, too. Click here to learn all about how you can do it!

Be Patient with Yourself

Finally, I have to remind you to be patient with yourself. This isn’t all going to fall into place tomorrow. My goal is to give you a roadmap and a bunch of examples, so you see where you want to go with your Facebook ad targeting and have the skills to get there day by day.

In addition to laying out the steps in each targeting opportunity, this podcast episode walks you through using two super-easy research tools that should become second nature to you when you start to dive into Facebook advertising. Click here to listen to the whole thing now.

And make sure to download this week's freebie so you can get super-prepared for making the most of your Facebook targeting.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Facebook Ads Targeting Starter Guide

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Jan 05, 2016
#91: 100 Days of Goal Setting with John Lee Dumas
41:54

Happy 2016, everyone! I am thrilled to ring in the New Year with you.

As I’ve mentioned before, I love new beginnings. The clean slate, the opportunity to brainstorm amazing new projects and create strategies and systems around getting them done…it gets my creative juices flowing like nothing else.

And the podcasts I have planned for 2016 are no exception! There are some really exciting episodes in store for you. We’ll be focusing on list building and building campaigns in your business so that you can sell more online. We’ll talk a lot about content creation and making sure that you’re getting in front of the right people to make the biggest impact. And we’ll make sure you are creating a business that you love as well as creating online training programs and products that your audience can’t get enough of.

But to get us set up for success in all these areas, I’m going to kick off the new year with some advice from my good friend John Lee Dumas. John is a favorite guest to have on this podcast because his brand Entrepreneur on Fire is a stellar example of the kind of success we’re all shooting for. And after hosting over 1200 interviews with successful entrepreneurs, John is definitely an authority on what it takes to achieve online business success.

SMART Goals = Surefire Success

John said that over the past few years, a pattern emerged in the emails he received from his audience. A lot of people were struggling with online business because they didn’t know how to set and accomplish goals in an effective way.

Contrast that with what John saw in the success stories of his Entrepreneur on Fire interviewees:

“I’m a big believer there is no silver bullet. It’s all hard work and getting your nose down to the grindstone, for sure. But I step back and ask what is one thing the Amy Porterfield’s and Pat Flynn’s and Michael Stelzner’s of the world all do well. … These people all know how to set and accomplish goals.”

So John decided to dedicate 2015 to creating a structure for his audience to take action with setting goals.

And now, in 2016, he has an amazing and beautiful product to help them do just that! It’s called the Freedom Journal: Accomplish Your Goals in 100 Days.

It’s a hardbound, 300-page physical book that walks you step by step through the process of not only setting a goal but accomplishing it within 100 days.

(True story: I have this journal right in front of me, and let me just tell you that simply holding it in your hands is a powerful thing. Something about this beautifully created physical product is inspiring and empowering in a whole new way. Looking at it makes you want to take action. Pretty amazing stuff!)

EPISODE 91

Click Here to Check Out The Freedom Journal

LEARN MORE

Step by Step Guidance for Your 2016 Goals

The Freedom Journal starts with John guiding you through setting a SMART goal. You probably already know this acronym: it stands for Smart, Measurable, Attainable, Relevant, and Time-bound.

The rest of the journal offers step-by-step guidance and accountability in carrying out your goal one day at a time.

In the remainder of this podcast, John and I talk through the process of two different real-life SMART goals. The first one is about John launching Entrepreneur On Fire; the second one is about how I launched Webinars That Convert. After hearing us explain how SMART goals guided our most successful ventures, you’ll have some super actionable example of how you can use the Freedom Journal to accomplish your own goals…did I mention in just 100 days?!

Click here to listen to the full episode now!

Dec 31, 2015
#90: 7 Ways to Work Smarter in 2016
01:05:59

Can you believe 2015 is over already?

I know, it's a cliche thing to say, but it's true--I feel like the year has just flown by! Maybe you can relate. I know when a year is packed with as many projects, launches, milestones reached and lessons learned as 2015 has been for me, it makes time race by.

It's impossible to anticipate the new year without thinking about resolutions. Ugh. I've never been one of those people who respond well to those.

Instead of thinking about resolutions, I found myself drifting back to a book that I've read about a hundred times. I'm sure you've heard me talk about it before: ReWorkwritten by the guys who founded Basecamp. This book was like a manual for success, back when I was first getting started...but it seems to be turning into a tradition that at the end of one year, I review it for fresh inspiration on how to smartly approach the coming year.

Call it a New Year's Rejuvenation, if you will.

This year, I was going through it looking for how its principles could help build online business. And as usual, ReWork did not disappoint. I was taking so many notes that I had to turn it into a podcast for you.

The strategies I'm going over today are all about different ways to approach your work so that...

a) you get more done
b) everything you do leads you to big results
c) you end the day feeling more satisfied with your bottom line

In particular, if you want to build a business around creating online training programs and courses, these strategies are going to be really applicable. They'll help you get more done with less time, less money, less resources…you know, the precious things we always seem to be short on.

Each of these 7 tips will have to do with one of these three words: Strategy, Saving, and Selling. And I have to tell you, this is a very dense, deep episode--give me a break, it's the final episode of 2015!--so you really should listen to the whole thing.

I suggest curling up with the last Christmas cookie, stir a little eggnog into your coffee, and enjoy a final moment of holiday hibernation to brainstorm your 2016 business year.

Strategy #1: Embrace your constraints

Limited resources force you to do make do with what you’ve got, and that in turn forces you to be creative.

Strategy #2:  Become a curator

It’s the stuff you leave out that matters--in terms of product value and saving yourself valuable time. Find out how--click here to listen now.

Strategy #3: Build a more focused product

What’s the one most important thing that your product is bringing to the table?

Strategy #4: Make decisions often

You’ll be amazed how strong your decision-making skills can get when you make it a habit.

Strategy #5: Create an offer your audience cannot refuse.

One of the best ways to do this is to offer more of you.

Strategy #6: Sell your by-product as an upsell or downsell

If you offer an upsell or downsell, you can work less! Find out how--click here to listen now.

Strategy #7: Make sure your work really matters

Nothing really matters if your work doesn’t matter to others…or to you.

In the end, your business' value is really all about your business' balance. Adding too little will leave your audience confused and you unsatisfied; adding too much value is just overkill for your audience and way too much stress for you.

Get the low-down on each of these tips...find out how they tie in with Strategy, Savings and Selling...and get your business systems aligned for an amazing new year!

Dec 31, 2015
#89: How to Fascinate Your Audience
42:16

I've got a question for you. Ready?

What do Apple, Lululemon and Morton's Salt all share in common?

Take a minute to ponder each brand. What imagery does it conjure up? More importantly, what feelings do those images create inside you?

When I think of Apple products, I think of elegant, simple design and the feeling of effortlessly getting stuff done. Lululemon brings back that sensation of looking amazing when I'm working out (even if my workout itself feels less than amazing). And Morton Salt? I think of my mom's kitchen cupboard, which feels warm and nostalgic and makes me want to go bake cookies.

Here's the answer to the quiz: all three of those brands share the power of fascination.

Fascination, as my podcast guest Sally Hogshead defines it, means an intense focus.

"When you’re fascinated by a person or a brand, you’re completely consumed in that moment. It’s that feeling you have when you’re working on a project and you’re totally in the flow. You feel creative, you feel confident, you feel focused and energized by what you’re doing. Or when you’re out at drinks with a friend—the time flies by, and you seem to be building epiphanies together in your conversation."

Click here to listen to the full episode with Sally.

For years, Sally's day job was helping big name brands like Nike and BMW find the perfect words to describe themselves. The first half of that search was understanding what they offered to their customer base that nobody else did; the second half was knowing how to capitalize on that uniqueness and capture it in language.

At a certain point, Sally realized that nobody had really brought that idea over from products to people. Business owners were all about finding the right words to get customers fascinated with their products, but they weren't finding the right words to help people understand who they are and how they add value.

These days, she parlays her understanding of what works in advertising world into a training to help entrepreneurs understand how people perceive them through their communication.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Your Free Fascination Advantage Assessment (Use Promo Code: AMY)

FREE DOWNLOAD

So here's a followup question:

What makes YOU fascinating?

And before you mumble "I'm not that fascinating, Amy" I'm going to stop you right there with what Sally told me:

"You don’t learn how to be fascinating; you unlearn boring. You’ve already been fascinating your entire life. It’s just a question of being able to identify what makes you fascinating."

Lucky for you (and me), we don't have to guess what makes us fascinating to your audience. Sally has created a totally unique assessment to help you "unlearn boring." Where most personality quizzes will tell you how you view the world, this one will tell you how other people view you.

And once you know have that information, you can use it to position yourself in a way that makes your audience fall head over heels in love with you.

"When you can identify how other people see you at your best, it becomes really easy for them to see why they should hire you, champion you, promote you. In business, the key—especially if you’re trying to grow a business online—is for you to have a very clear idea of the areas in which you can confidently deliver. And don’t try to be exceptional at the rest."

If you act quickly, you can get Sally's assessment for free! She's made a limited number of these super-valuable freebies available to the Online Marketing Made Easy community, so opt in now to get yours. And make sure to listen to the full podcast episode to get all of Sally's amazing insights on how to find what makes you fascinating.

Important Note: When you get your custom report, be sure to read the words that Sally uses to describe you. She’s one of the world’s most award winning copywriters, and your report is almost like a pre-written piece of marketing about YOU.

This is a free gift to our community, so share away! Post the code on Facebook and Twitter to get a fascinating conversation going. Describe your results and then ask them to share theirs too. Or you can get a group of friends and do your profiles together, and talk about how you apply your advantages in social media.

This can be a fantastic date night with your significant other. You can take the free assessment in about 3 minutes, and then then show each other your Fascination profiles. It’s measuring how other people see you at your BEST. So your results explain a lot about how you fascinate each other!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Your Free Fascination Advantage Assessment (Use Promo Code: AMY)

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Dec 17, 2015
#88: How To Boost Your Webinar Sales
23:50

I know that I've talked a lot with you about webinars this year. The fact is that I've been learning a ton about them myself, and every time I learn a new technique or crack the code on a revenue-boosting system, I can't help but pass it on to you!

This week, though, I'm doing something a little different. Rather than walk you through a step-by-step system, I'm going to focus with you on one very specific strategy that I learned from Tim Paige, the host of the podcast Conversion Cast and the leader of all LeadPages webinars.

Today is all about an engagement strategy that I've just begun applying it to my webinars. I’ll be sure to let you know how it's going, once I really get it off the ground. But I'll be completely honest with you: it's a little awkward, in the beginning. I've done a lot of webinars, and I still am finding my sweet spot.

The thing is that Tim, in addition to being a pal, is a true webinar ninja. This man has done 410 webinars to date! (Who knows--he may be up to more, by the time this episode airs.) No joke--his application is pending for the Guinness Book of World Records for most webinars done in a 12-month period. This is a guy who really knows the ins and outs of webinar success.

So when he tells me this strategy is worth working through, I believe it!

Listen to the full episode to get all the details on this amazing strategy from Tim Paige.

You can also check out Tim putting this revolutionary engagement strategy into action--just click here to join his latest webinar.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy and Tim's Engagement Focused Webinar

FREE DOWNLOAD

We all know how important engagement is for our webinars. There's nothing worse than crafting and delivering a dynamic, informative presentation only to hear crickets during the Q&A.

Scratch that--there is one thing worse: delivering your presentation and seeing only a faint dribble of sales by the time you log off for the day.

What you're looking for is that special spark that sets fire to your content and gets your audience fired up in response to it.

Early on, I wanted to test the idea of taking every opportunity I could throughout the process of presenting a webinar to look over in the questions box and start answering questions live as we went, as long as they were relevant and weren’t off topic.

I found in answering questions, not only did I see a 98% stick rate (98% of the people that joined the webinar in the beginning stuck around all the way until the end) but in one split test I also saw a tripled revenue from one webinar to the next."
Um...did you get all that? A 98% stick rate and a 300% revenue increase?

I'd say this strategy is well worth trying, wouldn't you?So how does this work? If you're like me, you may be already thinking about how taking questions in the middle of your presentation will interrupt your flow. What if the questions make me get ahead of myself? Am I allowed to not answer questions if they aren't on topic? How is this supposed to work with replays and automated webinars?

...And just what is it about this strategy that makes it so incredibly powerful?

Listen to the full episode for all the answers--it's a short but intense masterclass on a single technique that is a true webinar game changer.

Do you want to see Tim’s webinar engagement strategy in action? Click here to check out his special LeadPages webinar and pay close attention to when and how he asks questions and engages with his audience.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy and Tim's Engagement Focused Webinar

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Nov 30, 2015
#87: How to Build a Dream Team with Melanie Duncan
45:24

As you are building up your business and starting to see some solid success, sooner or later you're going to arrive at a certain point.

A point where you, as the founder, brand visionary and chief hustler, cannot do everything alone.

This is the moment where you need to hire some people.

Not just anyone will do, of course. You need to build out a dream team inside of your business so that you can spend more time in your areas of genius, the areas that you really excel, the areas that you love to spend time in where your skill set is the strongest, so that you can make a bigger impact for your audience and on your bottom line.

There is nobody I know who is better at this dream team creation thing than my friend Melanie Duncan.

The first thing you should know about Melanie is that she runs a multiple-seven figure empire. In other words, she's an authority on this whole online entrepreneurship thing.

The second thing you should know is that the ways she's developed her business are, in large part, the result of her amazing hiring system. She has a process for hiring that is extremely unique--it takes quite a lot of effort and focus, but it's allowed her to find amazing people that are the perfect fit to support her business. And let's be honest, when you love the people you work with, everything seems flow a whole lot better on all fronts.

But what's even more to the point is how her hiring system has also changed her perspective on hiring. I’ve seen her go through the transition of hating to hire to absolutely loving the hiring process. And as we all know, loving an IMPORTANT process you used to hate is a cornerstone of achieving the success you want.

If you're ready to dive into Melanie's amazing system, click here to listen to the full episode now.

Below, I've got the bullet-point version to get you primed for what you're about to learn.

  • Make a Dream Team List

    The first place to start is identifying what you need/want help with. Melanie says not to start with your limitations--instead, imagine what positions you'd create and fill if money, time and managing were no objection.

    "One of the harsh realities of being a business owner is you end up doing a lot of the work that you really don’t want to do. And just because you can be doing everything in your business doesn’t mean you should be doing everything."

  • Create a Revenue Goal

    This anchors your hiring to a concrete need for your business. Your revenue goal lets you know what you need from the new position, how soon you need it, and how much you can invest into it up front.

    "A lot of times the growth of your business is correlated to adding more people to your team. A lot of times your business will grow as you grow your team because it starts opening up more bandwidth for you to be focusing on the things that only you can do and really excelling at them."

  • Hire with a Sales Page

    When you're looking for top-level talent, you need to create a top-level advertisement to attract them to the position. Melanie's "help wanted" ads are as beautiful, polished and persuasive as any sales page she creates for her products and services. This is what draws the right people to apply for her dream team.

  • Hire to Fit

    It sounds elementary, but you really need to find the right person with the right skills and the right attitude for your position. In other words, you can't simply hire an amazing person and adapt them to the role. An exceptional person in the wrong position will only end up frustrated...and so will you.

    By contrast, when you take the extra time and make the hard decisions, it pays off like you wouldn't believe.

    "When you get the right people in the right positions incredible things are possible."

    Wondering how long the process should take? Cringing at the thought of sifting through resumes? Want to know how to spot a truly stand-out candidate from the crowd? Get all of Melanie's detailed insight on how to hire people for your dream team. Click here to listen to the full episode now!

Nov 23, 2015
#86: Creating An Honest Business From The Ground Up with Dale Partridge
37:43

Over the last few weeks on this podcast, we’ve been doing some intensive tactical trainings.

We’ve talked about adding upsells to your sales promotions, adding bonuses, when to add them. We’ve talked about the mindset of list building, and then we’ve gotten really specific about what you need to do to build your list.

Today I want to step back a little bit and look at the big picture and look at our team and how we’re running our business and setting things up. I thought there was no one better to do that than my new friend, Dale Partridge.

You probably already know Dale, either from Sevenly (the company he founded that became one of the fastest growing social-good startups in history), or from his many keynote speeches and feature interviews on the topic of doing business with integrity, or maybe from his recent book People Over Profits.

Dale is a creative leader whose mission is to influence an industry to rethink the models of how we do business today. And I invited him on the show today to help you (and me) learn about how to set a solid foundation for our long-term success.

One thing Dale's book really dials into is the importance of recognizing the pivotal moments in our businesses when small decisions could have major impact.

Dale went into business for himself at 18 years old...which means that even though he's still a young man, he's old in entrepreneur years. Within that time, he says, his whole mindset around business shifted from making major profits to making a major difference in people's lives.

"In the search for purpose and meaning I wanted to create a company that was more than just putting money at the bottom line. It wasn’t until I really shifted my thinking from how to make a million dollars to how to help a million people that really pushed me into business."

This is the core of Dale's "people over profits" message . . . and what I really want to stress in today's episode is that it's never too early in your business to think about how you're prioritizing people against your profits.

When you're in the early years of building our business, you're all too aware that every interaction in every business relationship matters. You're hyper-focused on bringing real, personal value to your customers with your unique talent and expertise, because you know that it's the key to your success.

But Dale points out that greed, dishonesty and customer contempt are not relegated to big corporations . . . that's just when they get caught in a big way. It's super important, he says, to set the foundation of your business integrity in these early years, while you're small, and learn how to self-correct in those moments when it's easy to make small compromises.

"I don’t want to be the most successful person that nobody respects or that nobody trusts. And I don’t want to create the biggest company that has great products but people don’t really connect with it."

Dale has done some impressive research on the most successful companies (and the ones who fell the hardest) of the past century. According to his research, the companies (and leaders) who really stood the test of time have seven core beliefs in common:

  • People matter.
  • Truth wins.
  • Transparency frees.
  • Authenticity attracts.
  • Quality speaks.
  • Generosity returns.
  • Courage sustains.

Listen to the full episode to hear Dale explain more about how these principles show up in online business practice, and how we can train ourselves to build businesses that uphold them.

"Whatever your dream is, make sure you crush on it because it’s not about you, it’s about them."

In the end, Dale says, our businesses' potential for growth is dependent on the integrity we build into our relationships with clients, vendors and colleagues. It can take real courage to honor a long-term relationship over short-term convenience. But that kind of courage is what creates a brand that really stands the test of time.

Nov 14, 2015
#85: 5 Marketing Lessons That Have Shaped My Online Business
01:00:16

Happy Thanksgiving, everyone!

First of all, can I just be a little corny and express my gratitude for all of you? It's hard to believe we're up to 85 episodes of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast . . . and with those episodes have come lots of free weekly giveaways, 17 interviews with the biggest names in online business expertise, 1.6 million audio downloads. Oh, and one very exciting mention on MSNBC as a Top 5 Online Business Podcast!

I am truly thankful for each one of you in this little community of go-getter entrepreneurs. Every time you opt in, leave a Facebook comment, write a review of the show or share this podcast with your friends, my heart is genuinely touched. Nothing makes me happier than to know that what I'm sharing is valuable and helpful to you. From the bottom of my heart, thank you.

Whew! Okay, on to business.

Today’s episode is all about . . .

Before I list them, a disclaimer: these are not little one-off tasks that you can incorporate in a few days. Sometimes I share "quick-win" strategies with you, but this week I wanted to go a little deeper with you. These are big-picture lessons that grew organically from my own journey as an online entrepreneur.

Because these are big lessons, I definitely don't want you to try tackling all of them at once. (I'm talking to all you overachievers...I know you're out there and I want you to give yourselves a break this time, okay?)

Instead, I want you to mull these over and see which, if any, really resonates with where you are in your business right now. If you feel like one of these could make a huge difference in your business, then by all means take that deeper dive. There are lots of resources on this blog that can help you devise a strategy to grow in each of these five areas. (In this week's episode, I mention specific past episodes where you can find more information--click here to listen.)

1)  Masterminding and finding a business coach.

I know I’ve already talked about this inside a different episode and I’ll link to that as well. But I’m going to share some more insights that I’ve never shared before about masterminding and finding a mentor.

A big thing I learned from my mastermind group was the power of webinars. You've heard me talk about this before, but maybe you've never really taken the plunge to learn about how you can use webinars to hit that five-figure mark in your business. For this week's freebie, I'm once again offering my webinar training, where I share exactly how I do webinars and how you can do them in your business.

EPISODE 85

Sign Up for Amy's Free Masterclass: How to Create a Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don't Have a List)

SIGN UP

2) Finding your marketing vehicle sweet spot.

This one is about platform. I’m going to show you what it looks like in my business and how it made such a huge impact. Then I will give you some actions to start investigating this in your business.

3) My partnership.

You may or may not know that I actually have a business partner. I’ve never really talked about him much, and I want to share with you how that happened, when it came about, why it came about, and what it looks like in my business (if you’ve ever thought about maybe adding a partner to the mix). This one will be really transparent. I’m going to share things I’ve never shared before, but I think it's time for me to talk about it. Click here to listen now.

4) Affiliate partnerships and my philosophy around affiliates.

Again, I’ve talked about this in past episodes but I’m going to put a little more personal slant on it in this week's episode, end give you some tips to build you own affiliate partnership strategy.

5) Consistency.

If there is any marketing lesson I need to be even better at and really focus on more and really take seriously, it’s consistency. We’re going to talk about that, what it looks like, and how we can add more of that to our business.

As I look back on my past 6 years in business, I feel incredibly thankful for these lessons, as they have shaped my professional and personal life tremendously.

EPISODE 85

Sign Up for Amy's Free Masterclass: How to Create a Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don't Have a List)

SIGN UP

Don't forget, if you want to learn how to create a five-figure webinar (even if you don't have an email list) you can sign up free for my webinar training. Click here to sign up now.

If one of these lessons really resonated with you, I'd love to hear about it! Talk to me on Facebook or Twitter and tell me which one you’re going to focus on.

Have a wonderful holiday, everyone. Thank you for being part of our tribe.

Mastermind Opportunities:

Each of these mentors have offered mastermind opportunities in the past but their masterminds might not be currently accepting new members at the moment. Do some research to learn more about each.

James Wedmore's Inner Circle
Jamie Tardy
Jeff Walker
Fabienne Fredrickson
Victoria Gibson's Breakout Success Mastermind
The Shine Academy
Natalie MacNeil's Conquer Club
Leonie Dawson's Glow Academy

Nov 11, 2015
#84: Growing a Lucrative Email List
47:42

Welcome to the second half of our intensive "refocus on your list" training!

I hope you completed the short questionnaire from last week, because this week we're really building off those questions to get where we need to go. If you haven't done it yet, click here to download it and take just 10 minutes to complete it. (It's only 3 questions--super easy.) I promise, it will free you up and cultivate the right mindset to accomplish the goal for today's episode, which is ...

For those of you who might be new to the show, lead magnets are any free, valuable giveaway that you offer your audience in exchange for their email address.

To create a good lead magnet, of course, you need to know what your tribe wants and needs from you. Having it be a decent trade-off for the email address is just not going to cut it. You want your audience gasping "Wow! I can't believe he/she is giving this away for free!"

Let me say this loud and clear: Do not be scared of giving away your best stuff for free.

I give away my best information all the time! (I'm doing it right now, as you might have noticed...and I give away even more on the full episode of today's podcast.) It doesn't hurt my bottom line at all, because in my paid products and programs, I dive much deeper and train much more specifically on those topics.

If you want to go deeper into today's topic, click here to listen to the full episode. I'm going to teach a three-part strategy to help you build your list. And our goal is not conservative, folks! This strategy is designed to get you 75 new leads per week.

I've also created a great free download for you: it's a cheat-sheet with 17 stellar examples of different kinds of lead magnets. Not only does it give some great inspiration for how to model your own giveaways, but it shows you where to place the opt-in boxes on your website for optimal conversion. Get it here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Free Cheat Sheet: 17 Pro Lead Magnet Examples

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Nov 07, 2015
#83: Cultivating a List Building Mindset
34:53

For the last several podcast episodes, we've been covering all manner of marketing tactics. Creating webinars, building urgency, writing copy. And we've taken a deep soul-searching dive into the personal "why's" and "how's" of online entrepreneurship.

This week, we're bringing it all back home. It's time to refocus on the foundation of every successful online business:

Your email list.

This week and next week, I'm devoting the podcast to some list-building straight talk.

And if you're thinking "Come on, Amy--I want the black-belt stuff that will take my business to the next level!" ... then this episode might be especially for you.

Here's how you know if you need this episode:

  • If you’ve been working on your business for over a year now and you have less than 4,000 people on your email list

  • If you’re not growing your email list by at least 75 new leads a week

  • If you already have a solid list but it’s not converting into sales or sign-ups

  • If you are struggling with confidence in your business and are feeling "less than" or comparing yourself to everybody

  • If you ever launched anything in your business and your results were lackluster (i.e., you sold only one or two of your products when you thought you were going to sell 100)

  • If you truly love the business you're creating and are passionate about seeing it succeed--in other words, if you're in this for the long haul

If you answered yes to any of those things, here's the first thing I want you to do after listening to today's episode. Download the short one-page inquiry that I created just for you. It's going to help you sort through the obstacles that are holding you back from building a healthy, growing list.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Cheat Sheet: "Uncover Your List Building Obstacles"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Let me say at the outset that, for all my talk about the crucial importance of list-building, I truly understand the difficulty involved. When you're in the beginning days and months of your business, it feels like every opportunity is more important than the simple, daily effort of building your email list.

But I learned from the sad experience of my very first product launch just how essential the list really is. Listen to the podcast episode for the full story--it's eye-opening. For now, let's just say that with all the bells and whistles of my program design and the sparkle of my marketing strategy, the promotion totally tanked.

The reason? I had a weak email list.

I couldn't understand it. I'd been networking with all the right people, even getting invited to speaking engagements and guest blog spots, and I'd spared no effort to create an amazing product.

But because I was not actively focused on list building, I wasn't able to build the business that I really wanted.

(By the way, when I say “actively” focusing on it, I mean that I would think about my list every day...but it was that horrible “I should be doing this, I’m far behind, I know I need a list" kind of thinking.)

Everything else about my business just seemed more important, in those stressful early days.

That's why I've created this download for you--to help you think through what is pulling your attention away from the cornerstone of building your business. Once you understand why it's so easy to focus on other things, you'll be able to turn the trend around and start seeing the results you want.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Cheat Sheet: "Uncover Your List Building Obstacles"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Listen to today's episode first--it will really help you with the mindset around list-building, and allow you to process the questions honestly.

And when you're done, drop me a comment to let me know what you're thinking! What is your mindset when it comes to building your list? How are your efforts coming along?

Nov 05, 2015
#82: How to Protect Your Facebook Ads Account
38:46

Hey there! I have a fun topic to cover in today's episode:

The Online Entrepreneur's Worst Nightmare. (Cue spooky music.)

Sorry...I couldn't resist. Blame the post-Halloween sugar overload.

The actual topic is how to keep your Facebook account from getting shut down.

Now, this is a topic that I know truly does scare some of you...maybe you've received warnings from Facebook about your content, or maybe you know somebody whose account has been shut down.

I know how upsetting this can be, not just to the people it occurs to, but to every other online entrepreneur in their community. It's just like that feeling when someone you know gets their house or car broken into. Suddenly it feels like the whole world is out to get you.

I don't want you going through your business day freaking out about this. That's why I'm devoting this episode to defusing the scare out of this "nightmare." Seriously...breathe. It's going to be OK.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 10 Commandments of Protecting Your Facebook Ads Account

FREE DOWNLOAD

There's nobody who knows more about protecting your Facebook account than my friend Rick Mulready. Much of the credit for today's episode goes to him.

When I was talking to Rick about this issue, the first thing that came up was how often Facebook's ad guidelines change. If you've ever felt like the old FB is a little trigger-happy on the guideline updates, you're not crazy. Not only do the guidelines change very often, but they're always couched in vague verbiage. It's just not a simple "Don't do this, this and this" with Facebook.

Rick told me that it's important to understand the foundational principle of Facebook's guidelines. For them, it all comes down to creating a great user experience. In other words, Facebook wants to protect all Facebook users from feeling lied to, "sold to," bullied, harassed...you get the picture.

If you're thinking, "Amy, I would never lie to my audience!" ... believe me, I know. And I'm on your side.

But Facebook is going the extra mile to protect users from people who do lie.

So they're not letting people make bold, specific promises to our audience about concrete things (like saving money, making money, losing weight, etc.). And they're not letting us use highly specific imagery that suggests these things (like images of idealized body types, huge stacks of cash, etc.).

Why? Because some people hear/see those things on the internet and feel bad about themselves. And feeling bad is not a good user experience.

So what is an online entrepreneur to do? Answer: get creative! (Click Here to Listen to the Full Episode!)

As you're reading through the list of ten tips about protecting your Facebook ads account, try to adopt an innovator's perspective. Rather than feeling defeated, think about how you can beat Facebook to the punch by creating content that makes all users feel amazing, hopeful, inspired, uplifted. That's a win for everybody--Facebook, your audience, and you.

Tip #1: Add a privacy policy to your registration page.

If you’re running an ad to a page where you're collecting name/email (or any information) from people, you need to have a clear explanation of what you will/won't be doing with the information you're collecting.

We explain a lot more about how to do this in the full episode. Click here to listen now.

Tip #2: Disable all pop-ups on the page where you are sending your ad traffic.

A lot of people will send Facebook ad traffic to a blog post. Facebook loves this (because users don't have to opt-in to get the content), but what they don't love is if a pop-up ad shows up 20 seconds after the user clicks. Pop-up ads have a bad rap, what can I say?

Tip #3: Pay attention to your reputation on Web Of Trust.

This is a third-party reputation site that Facebook looks at frequently to decide if an account should be shut down. It's an extra step, but checking yourself out on Web of Trust can let you know if you're building up a negative reputation somehow...and can save you a lot of heartache in the long run.

Tip #4: Use the Lead Pages plug in on your WordPress site.

Facebook currently counts a LeadPages URL as suspicious content. (We can thank shady LeadPages users for that.) As a company, LeadPages is totally above board, and they are working with Facebook to create a solution. In the meantime, though, they've created a plug-in that you can use to change your LeadPage URL to something Facebook-friendly. Again, an extra step, but it will help a lot in the long run.

It's a lot simpler to set up than you realize--listen to the podcast episode to hear me walk you through it.

Tip #5: Your landing page must accurately reflect what is being promoted in your ad.

This one probably sounds like a given to most of us ... but you'd be surprised how many people get confused when they make the transition from your ad to your landing page. Save everyone the confusion and use the same language/visuals/design in your FB ad as you have on the landing page, and everyone will be happy.

Tip #6: Be mindful of your ad copy.

You already spend hours laboring over your ad copy, I know...so take a deep breath here. The key thing to remember here is that 80% of the time, a robot is the first one judging whether your ad copy gets approved or not. Which means sometimes an ad that was just FB-approved gets disapproved the very next day...and if you leave it up, that spells trouble for your account. Key things to remember here are that you must not over sensationalize, create a false sense of urgency, or use metrics that don't apply to everyone.

(Listen to the full podcast episode to understand how different spins on ad copy can affect your Facebook account.)

Tip #7: Create a feel-good story.

#6 focused on what not to do...this one tells you what you should do. Instead of going down to negative town with your ad, you want to portray happiness, excitement, enthusiasm. You want to give your audience an overall good feeling about whatever it is you're addressing in your ad.

Tip #8: Stick to your account’s regular activity.

If you have a lot of different people logging into your FB account (for example, out-of-country VA’s or contractors) that could be a red flag with Facebook. It makes it look like there is some weird activity going on in your account. So either stick to one dedicated user (ideally yourself), or make sure you are using Facebook business manager instead of just a regular ads account.

Tip #9: Pay attention to your overall activity because it all adds up.

It's important not to push your limits too much with this stuff. I know it might be easy to think "Well, if they don't like my ad, they'll just disapprove it and I'll create a new one." But the thing is, if Facebook disapproves too many ads in a row, they may disable your ad account.

Tip #10: Focus on the relationship.

You'll rarely (if ever) see me sell directly from a Facebook ad. For me, the power of Facebook is creating and cultivating the kind of relationship I want with my audience: genuine, passionate, and truly friendly. Striking a friendly tone is what will build your email list, and keep Facebook happy.

Like I said at the beginning, this isn't something to freak out about. I just want you to be informed. Yes, it might take a little time to revamp your approach to ads, but in the long run, it's going to make for much stronger, more effective Facebook advertising for your business.

Nov 02, 2015
#81: Eight Principles of Greatness with Lewis Howes
45:39

I first met Lewis Howes back in my days of working with Social Media Examiner. I liked his technique with video interviews, and wrangled up a lot of interviewees for him; he liked my Facebook trainings, and asked me to put together a book. That was not only the beginning of my career in online training courses; it was, as they say in the movies, the beginning of a beautiful friendship.

This week, Lewis and I got the chance to reconnect over the topic of "greatness." Sound a little abstract? Let Lewis persuade you otherwise.

Lewis is a true expert in lifestyle entrepreneurship--a business coach with a top-rated podcast, a huge online educational program, earnings in seven figures, and a recognition from President Obama as one of the Top 100 Entrepreneurs in the country under age 30. Truly a great example to all of us working on our online businesses!

And you'd better believe Lewis didn't get to this level by aiming for "good enough."

His recent book School of Greatness is all about the importance of striving for greatness--in our personal lives, our health, our relationships and, of course, in our businesses.

What Does "Greatness" Really Mean?

As entrepreneurs, we're a little obsessed with the idea of "success." The symbols are always changing--this year it might be making a decent profit, next year maybe it's hitting six figures, and the year after that, it could be landing a book deal or paying off your house or...who knows?

This is the danger of becoming too obsessed with success--the target is always moving. Which means we run the risk of never being satisfied, no matter how much we accomplish.

But by focusing our sights on greatness, Lewis says, we're able to experience satisfaction with where we are in our business, and so much more besides.

"Greatness is discovering what your greatest gifts are, your talents, what you were born to do, maximizing those gifts, and impacting the maximum amount of people in the world with those gifts."

8 Principles of Greatness

Lewis' book breaks greatness into eight simple steps:

1. Clarifying Your Vision

Before you set out on your personal quest, you have to clearly see the action steps to make it happen.

2. Embracing Adversity

Challenge and struggle are a natural part of growth.

3. Cultivating a Champion's Mindset

You can't guarantee that you'll win every time, but you can always set yourself up for the opportunity to win.

4. Committing to Hustle

A willingness to do whatever it takes will take you where mere talent can't.

5. Mastering Your Health

Your health (emotional, mental and physical) can either hold you back or drive you forward--which way do you choose?

6. Practicing Positive Habits

Without intentional habits, life turns into a nothing but a series of reactions.

7. Realizing You Can't Achieve Greatness Alone

A powerful, reliable team is the key to building something that’s bigger than yourself.

8. Being of Service to Others

The crowning moment of greatness is giving your gift to the world.

This is just a summary of Lewis' eight principles--you need to hear these in detail! So click here now to listen to the full podcast episode.

Going Deeper

My chat with Lewis did more than just outline what it means to be great. It illuminated some of the finer points that past experience had "muddied up" for me.

For example...

  • The word "hustle" gives me a little bit of shudder, because I remember my corporate job days where I was really diving in, giving it my all, but felt like I lost myself. Fortunately, Lewis' definition of hustle doesn't mean prioritizing one aspect of your life at the expense of everything else important.

  • Even someone as multi-talented as Lewis feels exhausted and overwhelmed sometimes. Greatness requires a careful check-in system with yourself, to monitor your progress and where you're out of balance.

  • Certain aspects of achieving greatness will come easily to you, while other parts of it are going to be harder. Lewis explains how to fine-tune the process by uncovering the deeper roots of where you struggle.

  • You'll never accomplish the final point of greatness--being of service to the world--if you don't take care of one important thing first.

There's so much in this interview, I hope you'll take the time to listen to it today. But for now, I want to leave you with one final quote from Lewis that I thought was particularly...well, great:

"The biggest impact we can make is when we become a symbol of inspiration because we follow and chase our dreams. It is our greatest gift to follow our dreams...we are robbing ourselves and others around us when we cop out and don’t chase it out of fear."

Oct 22, 2015
#80: Ask Amy
46:58

It's time for another edition of Ask Amy!

Every now and then, no matter how good your business system is, you reach a moment where everything kind of splinters. I'm having one of those moments this week, trying to reassemble my podcasting setup after moving it into a bigger home studio.

While I'm glad to have this bigger space devoted to my podcast, I don't have the acoustics worked out yet--which means I'm a little bit stalled in terms of production. Little issues like this can really bother me, if I let them!

I'm sure you've experienced this, too. Think with me about an area in your business where you feel stuck because something else has to happen before you move forward. Maybe something’s not working properly and you have to figure it out first. Or maybe you’re just not comfortable moving forward and you’re not sure why.

All of today's questions deal with different things, but they all center around this core issue of obstacles holding back the progress of our business.

Let's take a look!

Question #1: How early do you contact affiliates if you want them to work with you to promote your course?

While I'm no expert in affiliate partnerships, I have worked with a small, carefully selected affiliate base over the last few years.

And one of the ways I select them is whether they're prepared enough with their annual business strategy to join me in planning at least three months ahead.

As my free download for this week, I'm doing a mini-training video of my new WordPress affiliate membership site. It's a great solution if you're pulling together all the materials for your affiliates. Not only does it help you get organized, but you can just show it to a programmer and tell them you want “this."

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get a Behind the Scenes Tour of Amy's Affiliate Area

FREE DOWNLOAD

Question #2: Remembering back to the first product you created, what would you tell us now that you wish you would have done differently back then?

I definitely wish I would have spent a little bit more time on developing a concept around my product suite. When you have a really solid product suite, you're able to help people in your niche that are at different phases in it.

Without this, you end up pushing away potential clients to other people. They ask you "What should I do in this phase?" and because you don't have a product around it, you point them elsewhere.

That's fine if it happens just occasionally, but when you get asked this a LOT (like I do with, say, creating online courses), your opportunity bells will start ringing like crazy and it starts to make you think "Why don't I offer a product for that?"

Question #3: What do you do when you see another site steal your content and sell it?

Um...throw something at the monitor? Just kidding. This has happened to me a lot, though. In fact, it happens with every new program I release.

One of the first things I do is remind myself that the "client" who would find my program on a shady site that is clearly not mine and go ahead and buy it is NOT a client I would want to work with. At the end of the day, it’s not about the money, it’s about the quality of people we’re attracting to our businesses.

There is, of course, a lot more I could say about this...and do! Click here to listen to the full podcast to hear all my thoughts on this issue.

Question #4: As an entrepreneur, how do you stay focused on what is at hand and not get distracted with wanting to start new projects, create new things, try a new form of social media? How do you stay focused?

First and foremost, I use Scrum. If you haven't heard of it, it's a system of project management that I explain in detail in Episode #75.

Of course, the success of this system depends on the things you can't get away from. Consistency. Deadlines. Accountability. All things I have varying degrees of success with!

But the biggest lesson I've learned with this is that I don't need to reinvent the wheel. I should model systems or approaches that I see working well for others. I don’t need to try every new tool that comes out. Bottom line, I just need to continue to do what works right for my business.

Like, for instance, my Wordpress membership affiliate site! Click the link below to get the training video now.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get a Behind the Scenes Tour of Amy's Affiliate Area

FREE DOWNLOAD

Final Thoughts

A lot of times, those feelings of being held back or stuck are rooted in bigger fears or a lack of confidence we have in our business or message.

The truth is that a lot of the time, if I go ahead and move forward anyway, I'll mess it up once, figure out what went wrong, and now know what to do. I'll also have overcome the fear of failure because guess what? I failed and it didn't ruin my life!

I would rather be making those little mistakes along the way but still be moving forward. When you get the confidence to not really care about those little mistakes, you will usually fix them, keep moving forward and BOOM--you are way ahead of yourself, way more than you thought you would be!

Oct 14, 2015
#79: How to Add Urgency to Your Next Promotion
43:46

It's a fact.  Sometimes people are reluctant to buy from you.

Even when they want your product, even when they’re smitten with your brand, there will be some prospective buyers that seem to have a built-in pause command that holds a their finger poised above the “purchase” button on your website. It's just par for the course when we are doing business online.

There’s nothing wrong with this, until it stands in the way of you making a sale to someone who truly needs what you’re offering.

There is one thing that can overcome this buyers’ reluctance.

The most successful marketers know what it is, and I’m going to share it with you today.

It’s all about adding urgency.

This is something I had to learn for myself, through plenty of trial and error, so I’m thrilled to be able to pass it on to you. It’s going to put you way ahead of your competition.

It starts with recognizing that it’s simply human nature to take our time and stay on the fence as long as we can, until we are pushed one way or the other. That push comes from learning that we must act.

That’s what urgency is: making sure that your audience knows they need to act now.

You want to build urgency into every promotion you create. There are lots of ways to do this, but the best way I’ve found to build it in is with a one-two punch: a combination of bonuses and deadlines.

I'm going to share several of my favorite strategies in this blog post, but this week's free PDF has even more urgency tactics from some of the biggest names in online marketing. Click here to download it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Bonus "How It's Done: Genius Bonus Ideas from 11 of My Favorite Online Marketers

FREE DOWNLOAD

Bonuses

Believe it or not, I’ve actually had people buy my programs just for the bonuses! While you definitely want to spend the bulk of your time crafting a great core offer, bonuses can sometimes make or break the offer by pushing people just a little bit further to finally say, “Yes, I want this.”

Now, it’s important to note that not all bonus offers have urgency attached. Sometimes you’ll create a bonus add-on to your core offer just to sweeten the deal.

Urgency bonuses are the ones that show up later in the promotion. They come in different “flavors. You do not need to do them all. You can mix and match them, based on what feels best for your offer.

1. Timely bonus

During your promotion, you pick a time where for a certain period—say 48 hours—you offer a specific add-on to your program. You email your promo list explaining quickly and thoroughly what the bonus is, why it’s valuable, and what’s in it for them. You paint the picture and tell them on what date and what time the bonus will go away.

When I do a timely bonus, I always email my list at least one more time, usually 24 hours before the bonus is going to end, to let them know that time is running out.

Let me tell you, it works really, really well. When you’ve got a really good, juicy bonus, especially one that addresses a pain point. The main thing here, is to be very clear when it expires.

2. Fast action bonus 

This is a bonus that you give away during a live situation. For me, it’s when I’m live on a webinar that I’m using as part of my promotion. If you attend the webinar and respond to the offer at the end, right then and there, you get the special bonus I’m offering.

I’ve been doing these fast-action bonuses for a long time. But that didn’t stop me from making a big, fat flub during my recent “Webinars That Convert” promo! Click here to listen to the episode where I explain all about it…and how you can make sure to avoid it!

3. The sweeten-the-pot bonus

This kind of bonus doesn’t have a timeline. Everybody who buys your product gets it. But this style of bonus allows you to add something during your promotion…which means you get another reason to email.

Finding really good reasons to email is an essential part of the puzzle in a successful promotion. The more opportunities you have to communicate to your audience, the better shot you have at winning them over…but you have to have a good reason to email! And what better reason is there than offering them something amazing for free?

I usually introduce this bonus four or five days into my promotion. I send out an email saying that I’ve created this special new bonus, explain why it’s great, give them the link and tell them to sign up.

Yes, they could still wait until the very end of your promotion, but having something new on the table immediately creates a sense of urgency.

It also creates some very valuable buzz for your offer, especially if you sprinkle a lot of hints about this new bonus of yours all over social media.

There are a lot more kinds of bonuses that you can create to add urgency to your promotion. Click here to listen to the full episode to learn about more ways to add urgent action opportunities to your offer.

Other Ways to Create Urgency

Early-bird pricing is a favorite of mine. Again, it creates lots of opportunities to email my audience, as I warn them of the approaching change in price.

The main thing with this is to make sure the price increase is compelling enough to create urgency. My programs go up by $100 when my early-bird window closes. I know that sounds like a lot, but that’s the point! If people are on the fence, a $100 price increase is definitely going to push them over.

Cart closing is a natural urgency creator. This is when the time frame ends for all buying opportunities, the last day when people can buy your product/sign up for your program/etc.

The key with this is to be true to your word. It’s really bad form, not to mention bad for your business long-term, to announce cart closing but then make all kinds of exceptions, or keep the cart open longer than you said you would.

As I mentioned earlier, one of the main places to showcase urgency is in your emails. Once I attract people to a webinar, I follow up that webinar with some really strategic email marketing. I work really hard on those emails to craft not just a compelling sales message, but to help my new audience to understand why this program is so valuable and why they need it.

But sometimes a picture is worth a thousand words. That’s why I love using the countdown timer.

As you are reading my email, the timer at the very top of the email is actively ticking away. When it comes to human instincts, the only thing strong enough to beat the buyer's resistance is being able to see time running out, second by second!

Finally, there is the “limited spots available” tactic. If you have a more exclusive version of your product (a special edition, a higher tier, etc.), it creates the perfect opportunity to email your list about the short supply of opportunities. Even if they weren't planning to buy in at this level, hearing the words "limited availability" again creates the urgency that you're looking for.

These are my favorite tools to create urgency. You'll learn about so many more when you download my free PDF for this week! Click here to get it now.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Bonus "How It's Done: Genius Bonus Ideas from 11 of My Favorite Online Marketers

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Oct 13, 2015
#78: How I Generated $170K from One Upsell Strategy
32:35

In the process of building my business, I’ve made more than my share of mistakes. The silver lining is that I get to pass the wisdom I’ve learned on to you. It’s always easier to do something right when you’ve got someone guiding you past the ways it can go wrong.

However, today’s post is all about something that recently worked really well in my business. It’s something you can apply quickly to your next promotion.

Ready? Let’s talk about upsells!

What Is an Upsell?

First, let’s get our definitions straight.

Say someone buys a program or product from you online. They fill in all the credit card details and finish the transaction completely. They are officially now a member of your program.

Before you take them to the purchase thank-you page that’s when you can offer an upsell. You are giving your new purchaser one more opportunity to buy from you within the same interaction.

Pretty cool, right?

Putting Together Your Upsell Offer

Three vital things to consider when doing upsells:

  • What is the best upsell you can offer as it relates to the program you just sold?
  • How do you price your upsell?
  • The flow of the upsell process.

I’m no expert in upsells. I’ve been in business a while, and just recently started using them.

But the success I’ve experienced has shown me that there’s a certain flow that’s really important to the overall strategy of your upsell.

An Example from My Promotion

In my most recent promotion, Webinars That Convert, I welcomed over 1,000 new members into the program in just under two weeks! That alone was awesome…but even more awesome was the fact that 58% of those new members purchased the upsell I offered! That generated an extra $170k in revenue!

Here’s how I designed that upsell—both the product and the process.

I put together a product that perfectly complemented the program I was selling. In this case, it was a pack of 5 slide deck templates. You need a slide deck for your webinar, and these templates gave purchasers five unique, polished looks for their presentation. They also made the setup process a lot simpler.

I had the template pack price fixed, BUT I offered buyers three different options. They could purchase the pack in one fell swoop, they could split up the purchase into two payments, or they could purchase a “lite” pack of just two templates.

I structured the upsell offer with a great deal of strategy. Here’s how it worked: if someone saw the offer and bought the five decks at full price, they would never see the two-pay offer or the lite version. You wouldn’t see the lite version unless you declined the first two offers. See how it works based on the potential buyer’s behavior? It also allowed me to learn more about the segments of my audience.

I go through a lot more the details of how to create your upsell (with ideas you’re welcome to steal!) and structure your offer in the podcast.  Also, there is ONE THING you do NOT want to do when creating an upsell.  I share the "don't do this" details in my podcast as well.  Click here to listen to it now!

For this week’s free download, I’ve included the actual upsell page I used in this promotion, so you can see exactly what I did and make it your own.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Upsell Offer for Webinars That Convert

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Oct 06, 2015
#77: 5 Video Marketing Mistakes Most Businesses Make with James Wedmore
49:57

I know it’s only October, but I’m already thinking about how to boost my business in 2016. And one of my biggest goals is to do more video.

Video is a complex issue for a lot of entrepreneurs. You know that it could help you make an amazing connection with your audience. But all the tinkering that goes into it--the lighting, the camera setup, the script--is a surefire way to fry your brain.

Now, you actually may be killing it with video right now. Maybe you have a natural eye for what looks good on camera, you’re a master of improvising quick, witty nuggets of wisdom on the fly, and talking into a lens brings out all the warmth and sparkle of your personality (instead of turning you into a cardboard cutout like…um…some people I know).

If that’s you, my hat is off to you. But if not, maybe you're more like me —you’ve made some videos, it went okay, you know you can do better…but it's easier to just save it for another day. (Or year.)

My good friend James Wedmore dropped by the other day, and we started chatting about video, and before long I had to ask him if we could turn the conversation into a podcast interview. He has so much great stuff to share about why video is important, and how to make it really practical for your business.

James says that learning to connect with his audience on video changed his business and his life.

Our interview was OUTSTANDING video tips and tricks. I want you to listen to the whole thing so you don't miss any of it. I also want you to make sure to access the three-part FREE series he put together just for you on how to make great videos for your business.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get James' Free Video Series About the Videos You Must Include in Your Business

LEARN MORE

Here’s just a tease of what we covered:

Five Video Marketing Mistakes

Shoddy camera work 

You don’t have to be Martin Scorsese or anything, but you do have to avoid those black bars on either side of your video—they’re a huge turnoff to your audience. (Easy fix: record video with your camera or phone held lengthwise, not up-and-down.) Other no-no’s include shaky camera action, bad framing, and fuzzy focus.

(If these no-no’s are already breaking you out in hives, relax. All of these are easy, one-step fixes that James spells out.)

Lighting

Newer cameras and phones can correct for this, but it’s worth it for everyone to learn how to set up quality lighting. The bedroom lamp is just not going to cut it. Nothing makes your video (and your brand) look instantly amateurish like bad DIY lighting. James gives the name of his favorite lighting kit that's cheap and reliable. Click to listen.

Audio

James says stop using your in-camera microphone. Doesn’t matter if you have the fanciest phone or DSLR out there…the onboard microphones will not pick up quality audio and your beautifully shot video will either sound like it’s coming from the bottom of a well OR sound like your grandmother shouting over a long-distance call.

Again, just a little bit of cash outlay will get you a great-quality lapel microphone that connects into your camera or phone. Your audio will get instantly synched, and you’ll be able to talk in your normal tone of voice without worrying that the mic isn’t picking you up.

Don’t Be Boring

A lot of people protest that they can’t do video because they aren’t funny, they aren’t loud, they can’t talk fast, they aren’t an extrovert.

Well, guess what? You don’t have to be any of those things to have an engaging video. As James puts it,

"The opposite of boring doesn’t mean funny."

What you do have to be, James says, is passionate. And…well, just listen to what else he says. You’ll have no reason to doubt your “interestingness” ever again.

Not Doing Video

It’s not a rule that “he or she who has the most video wins.” (In fact, it’s definitely possible to do too much video, especially if you have no strategy.) That said, there are five types of video everyone should be doing in their business.

Learn more about what each of these videos accomplishes, and how you can pull them off seamlessly by signing up to get the free three-part video series James created on how to do videos.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get James' Free Video Series About the Videos You Must Include in Your Business

LEARN MORE

 

Sep 28, 2015
#76: How to Be Happier (and More Profitable) with Gretchen Rubin
57:30

My guest today is a New York Times bestselling author, as well as a speaker, blogger, and recognized expert on the topic of happiness.

A happiness expert? Oh yes, there is such a thing. Gretchen Rubin takes the topic very, very seriously. She put her Yale education to work with the goal of finding out systematic ways that people can cultivate, achieve and maintain happiness in any facet of their lives.

The book that came out of her study, The Happiness Project, took the world by storm. Book clubs adopted it, college professors assigned it, psychiatrists recommended it to their clients. This topic really resonated with everyone who read it. It’s an amazing title and I strongly recommend you give it a read.

Not surprisingly, my talk with Gretchen turned out to be one of my favorite interviews ever. It went in some surprising directions, offered tremendous food for thought, and really hit home for me in terms of how to define success.

Honestly, this interview is so rich that I don’t want to summarize it too much here. You really should listen to the whole thing.

In the meantime, you can download our free giveaway for this week, which Gretchen herself designed. It’s a PDF guide called “Working Better Than Before,” and it’s meant to help you understand your work habits and gain insight into how you can maximize your creativity and productivity. (You can also use it to help your clients!)

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Gretchen's PDF "Working Better Than Before"

FREE DOWNLOAD

If you just can’t wait to find out what Gretchen and I talked about in the interview, I’ll give you a few teaser points of what we covered:

  • We live in a world of one-size-fits-all solutions…especially as entrepreneurs. “Do it for 30 days,” “Start small,” “Give yourself a cheat day,” and on and on. If you’ve tried the solution of someone you admire, only to be frustrated by not having it work for you…guess what? Not all strategies work for all people! Gretchen says her research led her to discover that the really important first step in changing our habits is to begin by figuring out what is true for us.

    “If we want to figure out how to change our habits, we have to figure out what’s going on with ourselves and the change has to come from a true understanding of who we are.”

  • If there is something you are struggling with, ask yourself if there was a time in the past where you did a better job with this. Was there a time when it came easily to you? What was different? Why was it easy then and it’s not easy now?

    "A lot of times people, due to pressure, feel like they are failing because what all of the experts say should work doesn’t work for them."

  • Gretchen points out one of the puzzling things about habits: it’s easy to understand why we find it hard to make a habit of something we don’t want to do, but it’s often just as hard to make a habit of something we love! (And yes, she gives an answer to why this is the case.)

    "The secret is to question all the ways you could think about setting it up so that it would work for you. You can find a way that will allow you to succeed and be the most productive and most creative, the healthiest."

  • According to Gretchen’s research, all people fall into one of four types when it comes to how you respond to expectation (your own or someone else’s). Those types are upholders, questioners, obligers, and rebels. Knowing which one you are makes it a lot easier to know what it takes for you to come through on a commitment. (You can take this quiz at Gretchen’s website to find out which type you are.)

    “The secret of adulthood is accepting yourself and expecting more from yourself.”

  • The “just accept yourself” message gets frustrating to people who are very progress-oriented. But the people in “grow, grow, grow” mode eventually feel dissatisfied that they can’t ever just be okay with themselves as they are. Gretchen talks about the mindset that allows all of us to strike a happy medium between these two.

    "Research suggests that about 40% of everyday life is shaped by our habits. If we have habits that work for us we are far more likely to happier, healthier, and more productive."

  • So how does understanding ourselves and how we form habits contribute to the growth of our business? Gretchen goes over this, too. (Hint: you know how great it is to generate sales on autopilot? It starts with getting your work habits on autopilot.)

    "One of the best ways to make yourself happy is to make other people happy. One of the best ways to make other people happy is to be happy yourself."

As soon as you can, click here to listen to the full episode. Gretchen’s insights will help you set a foundation that makes every aspect of your business stronger…and makes you a lot happier in it!

And don’t forget to download the freebie for this week, “Working Better Than Before". It helped me a ton (which I talk more about in the podcast) and I know it will do the same for you.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Gretchen's PDF "Working Better Than Before"

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Sep 24, 2015
#75: How to Launch -- The #1 Project Management Method I Can't Do Business Without
46:46

If you’ve been listening for a while, you've heard me mention the word Scrum. When you hear this word, you do one of two things:

  • Feel your heart surge with pride and joy because, as a fellow Scrummer, you know how amazing this approach is for running a small business.
  • Scratch your head / do a Google word search / roll your eyes because you have no idea what I’m talking about.

Listeners in both these camps are going to love today’s episode, because I’m going to talk about this amazing project management method and how it has revolutionized the way I get my business done.

To start off, Scrum is not my own made-up word—I got it from a book called Scrum: The Art of Doing Twice the Work in Half the Time. (Sounds pretty good, right?)

And basically, the concept of Scrum is just that: managing a team of employees and contractors in the smartest way possible.

I used Scrum throughout the process of creating my newest product, “Webinars That Convert.” Basically, I set up a checklist of every single thing that needed to get done on this product—from creation to promotion to sales to management—and my team and I “Scrummed” our way through it!

Not coincidentally, it’s the same checklist I used for promoting the Profit Lab last spring. That’s why I’m offering the same giveaway this week—the step-by-step project plan checklist that puts all the chaos of a new product launch into sanity-saving order.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get The Project Plan Checklist

FREE DOWNLOAD

This checklist goes hand-in-hand with today’s topic—download it and you’ll be well on your way to Scrumming your first project.

Why Scrum? 

There are the four main ways that Scrum really helps my business reach its productive sweet spot:

It increases your team’s speed to completion.

  • My team is able to get through projects so much faster now that we use Scrum.

It highlights performance. 

  • The Scrum approach really pays attention to the work people are getting done and gives them the ownership on that performance.

It creates cross-functional teams. 

  • People are empowered to make decisions.

It fosters consistent communication. 

  • This is probably my favorite part of Scrum—it allows us to make sure everything is working smoothly. When it’s not we fix it instantly.

Scrum for Small Businesses

The book about Scrum was written with big corporations in mind, so I had to do a little tweaking to make it work for my small business.

For instance, the Scrum team is made up of the product owner, the team, and the Scrum master.

The product owner (that’s me) takes the vision of the project and translates it into a backlog (that’s the project plan checklist I put together).

In a giant company, the product owner would handle the backlog all by herself. But I’m lucky enough to have a small team of awesome employees that can help me develop the backlog. They’re going to see things that I miss and have valuable input. And because it’s a small team, it’s a manageable number of voices contributing to the project vision.

Next, the team develops the product or completes the project envisioned by the product owner. For me, that means delegating tasks to a couple of part-time employees and a slew of awesome contractors.

Finally, there’s the scrum master. That is the project manager. It can be a designated employee on your team, it can be a contractor, or it can even be one of your team who serves as scrum master temporarily for a particular project.

Note: I do not think the project owner should be the scrum master. This is a surefire way to end up burned out. I definitely fell victim to burn-out in the past, whenever I tried to fill both of those roles.

Hiring the role out is going to be better for you and for your team. Yes, you won’t necessarily know what’s going on at every minute of the day with your project, but take it from me: that is a beautiful thing. Do yourself and everyone on your team a favor, and delegate the scrum master role to someone else.

(If the idea of delegating this role to someone else sounds too hard, too expensive, too time-consuming, I get it. Listen to the full episode—I’ll give you some ideas to creatively enlist a scrum master, no matter how big or small your business is.)

How Scrum Works

#1: The Project Backlog

The project owner creates a list of all the tasks you can think of that will go into the project you are putting together.

#2: The Sprint

You decide what you are going to focus on inside the backlog during a small sprint—a week or so of focused work. These small increments save people from getting lost in the weeds. They also keep the product owner on the pulse of what’s happening.

You work as a team on the sprint, with daily scrums—15-minute check-in calls with the team.

#3: The Sprint Review

Once the week is over, you do a sprint review. What worked? What didn’t work? What needs to be tweaked? And then you are off to your next sprint.

These small increments of focused work are the real beauty of scrum. Just look at that project plan checklist I gave you—it would have totally overwhelmed my team if we had looked at the backlog and said everyone should just dive in and get it done!

The Daily Scrum

This daily check-in is the most powerful part of the Scrum method.

It’s me, my VA and my project manager (or scrum master). We never go over 15 minutes (unless we get a little too chatty!).

We focus on three words during a daily scrum: doneplan, and problems. Basically it’s me asking “What have you gotten done, what are you planning to get done, and where are you having problems?” As the scrum master reports on this and my VA chimes in with her feedback, we all end up with a total understanding of where the sprint is at.

The same thing happens when we’re doing a sprint review, just in the past tense. And we take notes on every part of the process—what worked and what didn’t work—so that when the next project comes up, we can adjust the backlog as necessary.

What Scrum Reveals 

Along with helping you manage the potential chaos of a big project, Scrum is really helpful for bringing to light the patterns in your work that need…well, that need work.

One of the biggest things the Scrum approach has shown me is that I need to give myself more time in every project I do. More time to plan, more time to create content, more time to brief my team on their tasks…you get the idea.

To be honest, I kind of knew this already in my gut. (I mean, that’s why we feel stressed, right? Because we don’t have enough time to get everything done!) If I feel pressed for time, it’s going to trickle down to my team and they’re not going to have the time they need to do the work I’m assigning them. It’s that simple. But I didn’t realize it until I started implementing Scrum.

The bottom line is, if you don’t take the time to communicate well with your team, it will cost you money because they will do it wrong. And Scrum is an amazing way to keep that communication alive.

Best of all, the Scrum method gets easier and more efficient every time you use it! It’s kind of intense, it’s all-consuming, but when it’s over, it’s completely done and you’ve got a completed project.

Grab the free PDF project backlog (if you haven’t already) and start warming up to Scrum in your business. And let me know how it works for you!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get The Project Plan Checklist

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Sep 16, 2015
#74: Write Better Copy: Quick Tips for More Confident Communication
56:46

I know I have talked about copy many times. But can you blame me? It’s a hot topic!

Many of you that are growing your business online or have been growing your business for a while now still struggle with copy.

Believe me, I get it. I have definitely struggled for years with writing good copy for my business. And when I finally felt like I got that "copy mojo," things started to become easier in every aspect of my business.

That's why I'm so excited to bring you my guest today -- Nikki Elledge Brown. Along with being a proud military spouse, a mom, and a former park ranger, she's an amazing communicator and businesswoman. Nikki went from teaching communications at college-level to running a business that broke multiple six figures in under 18 months. (Wow, right?)

And the heart of her business is teaching entrepreneurs (like you and me) how to write their own copy, better than ever!

Nikki's approach to copy is putting it into "recipes." Sales pages, blog posts, video scripts, About pages...she breaks them all down into specific, doable steps that make copywriting easier than a "just add water" cake mix!

Today's show is packed with ridiculously simple recipes for every piece of copy you'll ever have to write, along with a few to help with your mindset around copywriting.

Stuff like...

  • How to write with purpose
  • The value of YOUR voice (+ how to use it in your copy)
  • Sales page tips (how to make it easy for people to buy from you)
  • Sample blog post recipe
  • Sample blog VIDEO recipe
  • How to write a great headline in under 10 minutes
  • What to do when you're not sure what to write about
  • How to avoid sharing TMI (too much information)
  • How to master your mindset around copywriting

Nikki also put together our freebie today, which is--you guessed it--a "recipe book" of copywriting formulas. Click here to get it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Nikki's "A Course About Copy Class Notes"

FREE DOWNLOAD

As I mentioned, Nikki has built a hugely successful business in an amazingly short amount of time on her way with words. She had over 90 new clients sign up with her in her first two months of business!

And in her words, the key to this kind of growth is not just being good at helping others communicate, but being able to communicate her own brand clearly to potential clients.

"You are losing money if you aren’t communicating effectively."

Find out Nikki's recipes for maximizing your revenue potential with easier-than-ever techniques for communicating with your audience. Her free PDF is about to become your copywriting "Joy of Cooking"--an indispensable guide to everything you'll ever need to write for your business. Click here to get it now!

Aug 30, 2015
#73: 3 Webinar Tweaks That Made a $62K Difference
32:11

What a difference a tweak makes!

If you've spent any time on this blog (or podcast) in recent weeks, you know how firmly I stake my belief in webinars. Webinars offer a platform that lets you connect with people on an entirely new, personal level you just don’t get with most marketing strategies.

And what other marketing strategy can offer the opportunity for consistent on-the-spot revenue?

If you’ve done successful webinars in the past and are looking to make even bigger revenue, OR if you’ve never done webinars before or maybe have just dabbled with them in the past, today is going to be quite a pleasant surprise.

Starting with this number: $62,000

As the title says, just three little webinar-related tweaks made a $62,000 difference in my bottom line. I knew they'd have an impact, but the size of that number surprised even me.

See, I knew there were aspects of my webinar strategy that could use a shot in the arm.

  • I wanted more sales generated from my webinars
  • I wanted more people to show up live during my webinars
  • I wanted to attract a new audience and grow my email list with the webinars.

Whenever you want to reach a new goal, you know some parts of your strategy are going to have to change.

So I set to work making adjustments, starting with:

Tweak #1: The Sales Page

This might surprise you, but I always do a sales page for any promotion I put together. Where some people might drive webinar attendees right to their product order form, my style is to give people extra information, especially if they are on the fence.

In the past we used to send people directly from the webinar to the sales page to read all about the product and then buy. But over time, we realized I wasn’t getting as many sales on the webinar as I had thought I should.

And that's how this simple tweak came about. I still use the sales page, but I'm using it smarter. That single change resulted in instant sales from the very next webinar, as well as a bigger boost of those instant sales.

(Click here to listen to the full episode and find out the simple tweak that boosted instant webinar sales!)

Tweak #2: More Webinars During Promotion

I want to give a shout-out to a member of the mastermind I used to be in. He's the one who suggested this tweak to me.

He said if webinars work really well for me, I should be capitalizing on that.

This idea--do more of what's already working for you--was so simple, it was revolutionary.

In the past, I'd do one webinar for each promotion. But at his suggestion, I stepped up my game.

It took a while for this tweak to hit its stride. But once it did, I saw amazing results.

Tweak #3: Facebook Ads

This is one I learned from my amazing coach, Todd Herman.

I found that when I'm running Facebook ads for a webinar promo to a cold audience that probably doesn’t know much about me, that ad needs to look a whole lot different than an ad to a warm audience (my fan base, my own email list, or a retargeting list).

Here are some examples:

The warm-audience ad

The warm-audience ad is more "talky" and personable. It has a lot more of my branding in it, in terms of colors and design. These people already know me and like me, so it plays on that familiarity we have.

Compare that to...

The cold-audience ad

The cold-audience doesn't have a lot of branding to it. The text is short, punchy and blatant: "This is what we have going on, sign up here." Because this audience doesn't know me, I keep it much more generic.

Find out more about how to tailor your Facebook ads to different audiences. Click here to listen to the whole episode.

One More Thing

One other huge change I made last year that has been a game-changer in terms of webinar attendance is an email series I call the Pre-Webinar Onboarding Sequence. This series of emails starts the minute you register for a webinar, and it's become an integral part of my brand.

You'll get a lot more info about this email sequence (and how to make it your own) if you sign up for my upcoming free Master Class! You'll also get stories, case studies, and a lot more knowledge about how to make webinars work for your business. Click here to register now!

EPISODE 73

Sign Up for Amy's Free Masterclass: How To Create A Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don't Have A List)

LEARN MORE

 

Aug 30, 2015
#72: The FIRST Action You Should Take Before Starting a New Project
33:27

I love these opportunities to answer your questions directly. And lately, the questions have swirled around a specific theme. (It seems we're all on a very similar wavelength right now!)

What's the theme, you ask?

How to grow your business to the next level. 

Whether you're just getting started or have been in business for years, the steps that take you from where you are to where you want to go remain pretty consistent.

In other words, we have a lot in common, you and I.

Question #1: What is the first thing you do before you start a brand new project?

The answer here may surprise you...unless, of course, you've participated in one of my programs in the past couple years. (I kind of can't shut up about it.) It's incredibly simple and incredibly effective cornerstone of every project that makes my process absolutely fly by. I can't live without it.

...and neither should you! Sign up for my free training to own this strategy for yourself!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get My Free Training Video: How I Organize My Dropbox Folders for Ultimate Success

FREE DOWNLOAD

Question #2: What is the biggest struggle in your business right now?

Glad you asked. This is something I've been thinking a lot about. It feels like I'm missing something important in my team--some vital role isn't being filled. As a result, it feels like there's a "chokehold" in my business.  After much deliberation, I think I've figured out what it is.

Question #3: What’s one challenge you have overcome this year?

I am really proud of this answer. (And guess what? It involves you.) And in overcoming this challenge, I've learned that it's not always a matter of changing something in order to make the challenge go away. Sometimes it's a matter of changing the way you look at the challenge.

Question #4: I've noticed you haven’t been traveling much lately. Why the change?

Aren't you observant? It's true--I've scaled way back on the travel commitments. And no, I didn't develop a fear of flying or lose my interest in participating in big events. Instead, it was a shift in my focus, and a commitment to doing even better at the things I do best.

Question #5: When you were first starting out did you feel a bit alone in your business?

Not at first--I was so relieved to be out of the busy corporate environment, a little isolation was fine. But over time, yes, I felt the need for more company in my solo-preneurship. Feeling alone squashes your creativity...so don't go there! (Click here to listen to the full episode, where I break down my strategy for keeping good company.)

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get My Free Training Video: How I Organize My Dropbox Folders for Ultimate Success

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Aug 15, 2015
#71: Masterminding Your Way to Success
49:33

Next time you're networking with a group of entrepreneurs, keep your ears peeled for a certain word floating above the conversation.

The word is "mastermind," and it's a concept that is trickling down from the multimillion-dollar start-up set to homegrown entrepreneurs like you and me.

If you're not familiar with the term, the term "mastermind" can have a very "Great and Powerful Oz" sound about it. Simply put, a mastermind is a small, very focused group of business owners who meet regularly to sharpen and strengthen their business strategies.

One of the biggest advocates around for mastermind groups is Jaime Tardy, founder of EventualMillionaire.com. Jaime is the kind of person anyone would want in their mastermind group--she has razor-sharp focus, unwavering commitment to her goals, an insatiable appetite to learn...and she's also a lot of fun to talk with!

Jaime joined me this week to talk all things mastermind, and the takeaway is hugely informative. If you've been thinking about creating or joining a mastermind, or even if this is the first time you've the term, this episode is going to spell out exactly what the benefits are, what kind of mastermind you should be looking for, and how to conduct operations once you get started.

Jaime also put together a worksheet for forming your own mastermind, complete with email scripts for contacting potential members. Click here to download it so you can get started right away!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the 6 Easy Steps for Forming a Mastermind

FREE DOWNLOAD

Should I Pay to Join a Mastermind?

There are lots of opportunities out there to join an existing mastermind for a subscription fee. I did this early in my business, and it was helpful...but Jaime says that the most valuable masterminds don't involve money changing hands.

"Peer masterminds," as they're sometimes called, have these advantages over paid groups:

  • You have equal say to everyone else in the group--no single person is controlling it.
  • They tend to last longer than paid subscription-based groups.
  • It's easier to form true friendships with others in the mastermind.

Should My Mastermind Only Have People from My Niche?

Definitely not! Jaime is in a mastermind with a financial advisor, an internet marketer, and a professional sword swallower! What they do have in common is a high regard for systems and processes, and a level of success that they're trying to reach.

"You have heard the quote, 'You are the average of the five people that surround you.' We want the level of just about everyone else in the group to be about the same, or at least have different niches of what they can talk about. You want to make sure that each person has an expertise that other people could use."

It's also a good idea to reach out to at least one or two people who are way more experienced or profitable than you currently are. These people will raise the bar on the meetings and bring insight that could take you months (or years!) to achieve. These people should be at the top of your list to invite to your mastermind...even if it's a little scary to reach out to them.

"If it scares you, that’s a good thing. You are going to be creating something that you can have for three to five years. This group could help your business make so much money. Yes, you might be super scared to email them once. But what’s the worst that will happen?"

What Happens in a Mastermind Meeting?

You can organize a mastermind meeting in any way that makes sense, but here is the rough outline that Jaime's mastermind uses:

First 15 minutes: The group goes around on the call and shares their wins from the previous week. Whether it's making a million dollars or cleaning off their desk, no victory is too small to share.

"We are always looking forward, and never realize the amazing stuff that we are already accomplishing. So being able to share that lets us all rejoice in each other’s wins. And it is really inspiring."

30-40 minutes: Each week, one member takes the hot seat with a specific issue they're facing in their business. They bring any collateral or examples that can help inform the members about the issue--they might even email everyone ahead of time. The rest of the group will weigh in on the issue and offer their unique expertise to solve the problem.

"You can bring whatever you want to the hot seat. You talk about it and at the end you usually have some sort of clarity or direction to go in whether it be a resource, something to try, being introduced to a person. That makes a huge difference."

Final 10-20 minutes: The group selects the next member to take the hot seat for the following week. With the others' help, the upcoming member reviews his/her goals for the quarter, so that the group can help them solve a problem that gets them closer to that goal.

"As entrepreneurs, we can get really distracted. We are trying to make sure that our actions actually align with what we want. That is when you see massive progress."

How Do I Know if My Mastermind Is Working?

The same way you know if any relationship is working--if you feel mostly positive effects from being involved with it.

There are definitely masterminds that are not a good fit for you, that just don't offer what you're looking to get out of it.

Or perhaps it's going great for you, but someone else in the mastermind is routinely late to meetings, participates minimally, or contributes negative energy.In either case, a few meetings is usually all it takes to know that something's not working right.

"The level of commitment matters. If it doesn’t, people are not going to feel like they are getting value from it, and they will start backing off or will quit. And then it starts to feel icky."

Get Jaime's insights for keeping your mastermind on track! Click here to listen to the full interview now.  

Commit to Your Own Success

It can take one or two tries to find the right group of people for your mastermind. But from my own experience, I can tell you that my entire business changed when I finally locked into the right group.

I want you to have the same experience, so if this is something you have been thinking about for a while, commit to yourself:

"In 30 days I will have created my own small mastermind of five people."

Best of all, forming your mastermind is so incredibly easy if you follow Jaime's step-by-step worksheet. Click here to download it now!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the 6 Easy Steps for Forming a Mastermind

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Aug 15, 2015
#70: 4 Webinar Myths and How to Avoid Them
42:20

If you’ve sought out training to help you build your business, or tracked the success of other entrepreneurs, you have firsthand experience of the power webinars have to not only engage and excite an audience, but to convert them to into paying clients.

Maybe you’ve even been one of those people who signed up for a webinar to get a little free education, and ended up making a purchasing decision that you were genuinely excited about!

So why does the idea of putting on your own webinar have you quaking in your boots?

Let me guess...

  • You don’t mind a little grunt work, but you doubt your ability to string together all that technology.
  • You love the idea of delivering content in a highly personal way to your audience, but you hate the idea of a sales pitch at the end.
  • You’ve got a foolproof concept in mind . . .  however, you’re not sure how you’ll pull together an audience since your email list and sales funnel are still a work in progress.

Busy entrepreneurs (like you and me) don’t have a SECOND to waste on activities that aren’t directly linked to profit. If you’ve ever tried creating a webinar before, you know that sinking feeling of waiting, as the seconds tick by, for your sales to pick up speed. (Ugh! It’s the worst, isn’t it?)

In my experience, I’ve found that four major myths are to blame for a poor conversion rate.

I’m going to debunk those myths for you, and show you how to replace them with truly effective practices that will not only reward all your hard work, but have you out of your chair with excitement.

Myth #1: Webinars are just a marketing strategy (and not a whole system).

What most entrepreneurs think of as “webinars” is really just a small fraction of what they really entail.

Most view webinars as just the presentation component. In fact, the presentation constitutes no more than 15% of an entire, well-integrated webinar STRATEGY.

A truly effective webinar strategy involves 5 Key Stages (planning, pre, live, post, automated), all of which MUST be executed in perfect harmony in order for cash to change hands at the end of your presentation.

In short, a webinar isn’t a single tactic, but an entire system with many moving parts, specific timelines, and delicate levers to pull.

My webinar system is so much more than just a set of slides pulled together in a presentation deck.

Specifically, my webinar system includes strategic content designed to be precisely aligned with my paid program.  It also includes a list building component, an email marketing plan, a technology strategy, a focus on scarcity and engagement, special Q&A sessions to eliminate objections and so much more.

And when everything lines up perfectly, your business grabs hold of an effective, efficient sales machine that acts as the backbone of your business and gives you the opportunity to grow, scale and automate at will.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Cheat Sheet: "5 Rookie Webinar Mistakes" (And How To Avoid Them)

FREE DOWNLOAD

Myth # 2: Webinars are a TON of effort and involve too much expensive technology.

True. Webinars AREN’T simple.

But that doesn’t mean they can’t be relatively easy when met with the right A-Z blueprint that leaves nothing to chance.

From pairing together the most affordable/reliable technology to knowing exactly how many email follow-ups to send to maximize conversions, a step-by-step blueprint can take an otherwise COMPLEX strategy and make it attainable for even the most time-starved solopreneur.

And for the business owner that possesses such a blueprint, the “complexity” of running a profitable webinar actually becomes a huge competitive advantage, giving them the unique chance to be the FIRST in their space to use webinars effectively.

Just to name a few, some of the best webinar platforms (for both live and automated webinars) include GoToWebinarGoogle HangoutsEasy WebinarWebinar JamStealth Seminar and Evergreen Business Systems. I want to engourage you to check a few out to see what might be a great fit for your webinar plans.

And on a final note, YES, executing a webinar strategy requires effort…but you’ve already proven that you’re willing to put in effort--you just need the reassurance of knowing that every bit of energy you put into your business will come back to you tenfold.

What you CAN’T afford to do is waste time and energy in perpetual “figure it out” mode.

Myth #3 - I’m fine; I learned about webinars a few years ago.

While it’s awesome that you got a head start on webinar marketing a few years back, the very same early mover advantage can EASILY become a major detriment to you and your biz if you fail to embrace the MANY factors of success that have changed over the years.

Audiences have changed…

Attention spans have changed… (Thanks, Netflix.)

Technology has changed…

Customer buying habits have changed…

Presentation practices have changed… (There were a few things you were taught to say on a call a few years ago that are now surefire ways to make your viewers hit self-eject.)

And how we go about GETTING people to show up on the call (and buy after the fact) has changed as well.

Hint: It’s not enough to just invite your audience to the webinar and hope they show up. There are very specific things you MUST do to not only make sure they show up, but show up in a highly focused and engaged state. (Click here to download my freebie and discover exactly what I do to ensure I always get a strong webinar turnout when I go live on my webinars.)

So when you add it all up, there’s very little you can bank on from the tactics of years past if you want to succeed in the shifting paradigm of webinar strategy.

Which quickly helps us dispel our next myth…

Myth #4 - It’s too late. I already missed the boat on webinars.

Sure, you missed the boat on webinars as a tactic…

…but there’s always another boat coming!

And that next boat is...wait for it...

Webinars as a COMPLETE sales funnel.

And if you’re reading this post RIGHT NOW, then you’re in a unique position to catch wind of this new strategic approach before anyone else in your niche does, and in doing so, claim your stake in the rich blue ocean ripe with sizeable and scalable profits.

So chances are that even if your competitors are already using webinars (the old way), you can gain a competitive advantage by being the FIRST to build a complete webinar funnel based on the proven frameworks, techniques, and strategies that I’m about to share with you.

Keep reading . . . now that you know the 4 webinar myths, I've created a DETAILED, free cheat sheet to help you with your first (or next!) webinar . . .

My wish for you is to sidestep the countless traps that make most webinars epic disasters, and instead learn how to create a masterpiece.

I’ve been doing webinars for over 5 years now and I’ve made MANY mistakes along the way. You don’t need to do the same! I’ve compiled a list of 5 of my biggest webinar mistakes over the years and how to avoid them before your first (or next!) webinar. Click here now to get that list!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Cheat Sheet: "5 Rookie Webinar Mistakes" (And How To Avoid Them)

FREE DOWNLOAD

Aug 11, 2015
#69: Blogging Essentials for Busy Entrepreneurs
42:39

When I say the word “blogging,” what’s the first emotion you feel?

If you’re like many entrepreneurs, it’s probably stress, mixed with a little bit of guilt.

Even if you truly love writing, keeping up a blog for your business can be one of the hardest things to get done…if you even get it done at all. Your business might be running full steam ahead, but your blog is lagging months behind!

Today’s episode is all about getting your blog back in gear, minus the stress. I’m talking to one of my favorite people in the online marketing world, Darren Rowse, the founder of ProBlogger.net and one of the first people to recognize the potential of blogging for entrepreneurs.

He’s going to walk us through the bare necessities of blogging, and show you how to streamline your process so that you gain traffic, convert leads and build community with every post you write.

Despite having written an encyclopedia's worth of information about blogging over the past few years, Darren is no stranger to the stress around blogging:

“It’s pretty easy to get to a stage where your blog is running you instead of you running your blog.”

So why keep blogging at all?

Simple—your blog is the cornerstone of your branding foundation. It's the best way to get your name out there, and to help people get to know you.

Just ask Darren:

“I have discovered over the years that when I go to a conference people come up to me and hug me and say, 'I love you!' I always wonder why because I have no idea who they are. But it’s the regular contact, the personal aspect of blogging, that really helps people to like you. Then over time they come to trust you.”

Darren says the key to writing an effective blog post is to focus on one of these three aspects--knowing, liking, and trusting--in each post that you write.

And he points out a few simple ways to get it done:

Helping people know you

Highly shareable content that gets your name out there where people haven’t heard of you yet. This could be humorous imagery, inspiring quotations or informative infographics.

Helping people like you

Personal stories, motivational content, anything that inspires empathy, emotion and a sense of belonging. This is also a great category to embed photos, audio or videos that helps you connect on a face-to-face level.

Helping people trust you

How-to guides, case studies, even sharing mistakes you made in the past and what you learned from them. This is where you show readers that you know what you’re talking about.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Free Download: "How To Boost Your Blog's Business Potential: ProBlogger's Top Ten Tips To Growing Your Email List and Selling More Online"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Reinvent the SWOT Test

Would you believe that when Darren started ProBlogger, he’d only been an actual pro blogger for less than a year? With so little experience under his belt, he was fearful of being called out for not being a seasoned expert. (I’m sure we can all relate to that!)

But rather than let his inexperience hold him back, Darren used this “weakness” to his advantage. He was transparent in his posts about aspects of blogging that he didn’t understand yet or was just learning about.

As it turned out, the transparency was a big hit with his audience, and earned him even more followers.

“To position myself as someone who was on the journey, maybe a few steps ahead of you but I still haven’t gotten it all together, really resonated well with my audience.”

Once you’ve run a SWOT test (strengths/weaknesses/opportunities/threats) on your blog, go back and reconsider the weaknesses and threats you found. They can actually be the ideal ways to differentiate yourself in your field. So many people out there position themselves as bulletproof experts, that your audience may find your “inexperience” very refreshing.

Become a Title Master

Darren leaves no uncertainty about the importance of titles:

"The title of your post changes the destiny of your post. …can be the difference between somebody reading it and sharing it and it just sitting in the archives and never being read again."

The simple fact is that people make decisions whether to read your blog post (or not) based on its title!

Lucky for us, Darren offered a few tips on creating irresistible titles, with examples pulled straight from some of his own top posts:

  • Communicate a benefit. “How to Take Sharp Images”
  • Ask or answer a question. “What the Numbers on Your Lens Mean”
  • Creating curiosity or intrigue. “Three Lenses Every Photographer Should Own”
  • Spark controversy or debate. “Nikon Versus Canon”
  • Get personal. “Are You Making These Blogging Mistakes?”
  • Use one powerful word. "Six Stunning Secrets to Help You Break Through Bloggers Block"
  • Make a big claim or promise. “21 Techniques All Camera Owners Should Know”

How to Find Readers (Without Google’s Help)

The constant changes in how Google ranking works mean that SEO tags and hyperlinks don’t work as well anymore for getting your blog to show up in a keyword search.

According to Darren, that doesn’t matter as much as knowing who you’re trying to reach with your blog, and showing up where those readers hang out online.

"I am a big believer in adding readers one by one. I don’t think you need to be attracting thousands of readers everyday to your blog. For me it’s really about building a presence in the places that my potential readers are and being useful in those places."

Try watching on Twitter for people who use your keywords and respond to them. Be helpful in forums. Join Facebook groups that are on your particular topic and add value to the conversation. What you’re looking for is the opportunity to bring a new reader on who will love your blog and bring their whole network along with them.

 

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the Free Download: "How To Boost Your Blog's Business Potential: ProBlogger's Top Ten Tips To Growing Your Email List and Selling More Online"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Jul 26, 2015
#68: Planning a Foolproof Live Event with Rich Brooks
55:38

A lot of you have asked me if it's a good idea for you to start planning live events. You see the entrepreneurs you admire staging weekend retreats where they get up and set their audience on fire with excitement, education and motivation. Maybe you've even been to one and thought "Hey, I could do that!"

The short answer is Yes! I started planning and participating in live events very early in my business, and while my inexperience made it a little terrifying at first, I couldn't deny the powerful boost it gave me--not just in terms of leads, but also in terms of confidence.

That's why I invited Rich Brooks to join me on the show today. Rich is a small business owner who just happens to be an event-planning powerhouse. I asked Rich to let me pick his brain for the fundamentals of planning a successful live event.

The Who and the Why

If you've ever attended Rich's amazing Agents of Change conference in Portland, Maine, it may surprise you to learn that his live event track record began with a simple lunch meeting.

The purpose of a live event isn't to wow everyone with your multimedia presentations and dynamic speeches. Those are great bells and whistles to add as you gain experience, but the real heart of a live event is to do four things:

  • Get your name out there and establish your credibility
  • Differentiate yourself from competitors
  • Generate leads for business
  • Turn a profit

The more you work on your online marketing, the more you start to notice how crowded it is out there. It's getting harder and harder to get noticed in people's social media feed, no matter how valuable your content is. So why not get the edge on your competitors and take your message directly to your audience, face to face?

Yes, it takes more time and effort to plan an event than to post something on Facebook. But, Rich says,

"A live event could be that thing that really separates you and raises you above all of the other people out there in your industry. If you are looking to kind of change up the way you engage with people, a live event may be the perfect thing for you."

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the "7 Mistakes to Avoid When Planning a Live Event"

FREE DOWNLOAD

3 Phases of a Live Event: Speakers, Sponsors and Seats

Rich says that all live event planning boils down to these three phases.

  • Speakers - Getting people to offer valuable content for your audience
  • Sponsors - Getting people to contribute to your audience's experience
  • Seats - Getting people to show up in your audience

First Things First - Who Is This For?

Before you start worrying about getting people to show up (we'll talk about that later), spend some time thinking about who you want to show up. The key thing here is quality over quantity. Here's what Rich has to say about it:

"The #1 is that you are putting on an event for people. Who is this audience? What do they look like? Who is your avatar? What kind of information do they want to consume? What are they looking to accomplish? What are they looking to do?"

As in all other forms of marketing, you need to narrow in on your ideal audience member, and design the perfect event for them. I know it's counterintuitive, but being super specific will actually help you attract more people.

Once you know who you're planning this event for, you'll have a firm foundation to build on with the three phases.

Phase 1: Speakers

There are three main ways of attracting speakers to help lead your event:

  • Get them to do it for free as a way to gain visibility.
  • Pay them.
  • Have them pay you.

If that last item made you do a double-take, considering that many potential sponsors are eager to be seen as thought leaders, and would love the chance to get up and present to your audience. (Too many of these type of speakers can kill an event, though, so limit it to one or two sponsors whose product or service would truly benefit your ideal audience.)

Obviously, if there's an ideal speaker that you can afford to pay, then do it!

But it's actually much easier than you might think to attract quality presenters to your event for free. Call on people you have an existing relationship with. Ask colleagues to recommend good candidates...then get them to introduce you! Look around for people who have just published a book, started a podcast, have something they're trying to promote.

Yes, it can be intimidating to reach out to people--even a natural networker like Rich isn't always entirely comfortable with this part of the planning process. But it never hurts to ask...or even nag a little! You'll often be surprised at who says yes.

Hear more of Rich's stories about scoring great speakers for live events. Click here to listen to the full episode.

Phase 2: Sponsors

The idea with sponsors is, of course, bringing in some money from your event. Enough, at least, so that you don't lose money. They can underwrite some of the costs of putting on the event, provide technology services, even supply coffee, snacks and meals for attendees. (This turns out to be one of the most expensive aspects of planning an event, Rich says).

The key to looping sponsors into your event is taking a "barter" approach. Think of it as them trading sponsorship for something your event can offer them.

For example, Rich approached the local news station where he often appears as the "Tech Guy" and told them he was having a panel of people from Maine appear during his conference. This was a perfect tie-in with the station's brand, and they agreed to sponsor the event.

Bottom line: give some thought to how your sponsors will benefit from association with your event, and you'll make it a whole lot easier for them to say "yes."

Click here to download this week's free giveaway.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the "7 Mistakes to Avoid When Planning a Live Event"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Phase 3: Seats

This one is the biggie--"How am I going to sell tickets?"

It's also the number one fear that keeps people from planning a live event--"What if nobody shows up?"

This is where your list comes in handy! Rich says that with every event, his team tries new tactics for reaching people, and every year finds that his opt-in lists have the best yield.

"I discovered over the years that nothing sells tickets like email. It really does make a difference."

Two more things to keep in mind:

  • People really like attending live events. They want something to get excited about with other people--by planning a live event, you're offering something they truly want.
  • There is nothing wrong with an event that has 12 people as long as it is the right 12 people and they are paying enough money to cover the expenses of your event.

Find out more ways to fill the seats at your live event! Listen to the full episode here.

...And Just One Two More Things

What do I charge?

You may struggle with charging money for your event, especially if it's your first one. When the purpose of the event is to generate leads for your business, it can feel a little wrong to ask for money on top of that.

But Rich says charging for your event is an important part of everyone getting value out of it, including the attendees.

"I found that if you have a free event people will be excited about it and then they don’t show. They don’t have any skin in the game. ... You have to charge something so people understand that there is a value to what they are getting."

How much should I promote?

In the excitement around planning your first event, it's easy to just bombard social media with reminders that it's happening and people should come. But it's important to carefully craft a sales message around your event, so that people don't get sick of hearing about it! For example, Rich will post a "10 Fun Things to Do in Portland, Maine" article on his blog, and end it with a simple pitch for his event.

Try to time your more obvious promotions around FOMO-inducing moments in the sales process. Announcing Early Bird discounts, One Day Only specials, "Seats Are Rapidly Selling Out!" messages, etc. are perfect opportunities to jog people's memories that they want to attend.

Jul 25, 2015
#67: Should You Narrow Your Niche?
41:01

Do you ever find yourself in the middle of a challenge with your business and wondering,

“How did I get here…again?!

Nothing feels worse than the suspicion that you’ve been spinning your wheels for the past month. (Or quarter. Or year.) The last thing we want is to get caught in a downward spiral, where we never get to overcome our struggles and rise past a certain level.

But what if that spiral was actually going up, not down?

I spoke with Nathalie Lussier, world-class digital strategist and email building expert, about this problem that confronts all of us: how to understand the recurring patterns in our business.

Not only does she give some sage advice on how to deal with these patterns, but she shows how embracing them can actually help you build your business by narrowing your niche.

We usually think of business strategy as being a line between Point A and Point B…and measure our success by how straight that line is.

But in real life, Nathalie says, the path is more like a spiral staircase. As we make our way up to the next level, we revisit the same issues, challenges and themes over and over again. 

When you come up against circumstances that make you think “How did I get here again?”, flip the way you’re looking at them. Even if it’s the same issue, you’re in a different place with it than you were six months (or even six weeks) ago.

What’s more, each time you revisit that same situation, you learn something a new and deeper lesson about it, which you can then pass on to your target audience. They’re all climbing spiral staircases of their own, and they need your story to help them keep going.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get Nathalie's "Spiral Staircase Exercise"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Three Things that Define Your Niche

Whether you say “nitch,” or pronounce it “neesh” like Nathalie (who is French),  you already know that digging deep into your niche is a cornerstone of your business’ success.

According to Nathalie, your niche is the sum of three things:

  • Your topic
  • Your story
  • Your audience

Each time you make another look on the spiral staircase, you go deeper into each aspect of your niche. Here’s how:

  • Your topic - Each “spiral” builds new expertise that narrows the focus of your business. It takes you from a broad category (“I help people achieve better health”) into a very specific component of that category (“I offer natural healing methods that cure migraines in ten seconds or less”).

  • Your story - Each “spiral” is a new chapter in your story, which creates new opportunities for connection with your audience.

  • Your audience - Each “spiral” lets you understand more about your own challenges and develops new strengths to overcome those challenges. As a result, you have renewed insight into who needs you the most.

Narrowing Your Niche Helps You Build Your Audience

It’s easy to assume that it’s better to go bigger in the beginning stages of your business, to collect as many people in your audience as possible, and then narrow your niche once you’ve got a solid email list going.

In fact, Nathalie recommends just the opposite: Go narrow in the beginning. Establish yourself as an authority in one very specific area, build a small but mighty email list, then unfold into new products and new ideas when you’ve built the relationship with those clients.

“[When] people already know you as an expert in one thing, it’s easier to add expertise in other topics."

Narrowing Your Niche Helps You Say “No”

Narrowing your niche also helps you save a lot of time (and headache) by giving you opportunities to say “no.”

When all you want is to build, network and grow, it can be terrifying to turn down opportunities. The problem is that every time you say “yes” to one opportunity, you have a little less energy to invest in all the other opportunities you’ve agreed to.

You have to decide ahead of time what the smart "yes-es" are, and then stick to your guns. Nathalie carries around an index card with her five goals for the quarter listed on it. When an opportunity comes up, she compares it against these five goals. If the opportunity actively promotes one of those goals, she gives it a yes. If it doesn’t promote those goals, no matter how great it sounds, she says no for right now.

It may be hard at first, especially if you’re someone who has a hard time turning people down.

But saying “no” in one place is what will give you time and energy to say “Yes!” down the road to unexpected windfalls. As Nathalie puts it,

“Saying no leaves margin for magic.”

Narrowing Your Niche Helps You Ask for What You Want

Think about some of your mini-goals for this quarter. Maybe you want to get published in a prominent magazine or website. Maybe you want to speak at someone’s live event, or host an event of your own. Maybe you want to join forces with another business.

These kinds of opportunities don’t usually come knocking—you have to ask for them. Chances are, you’re one of several people asking.

But when you have a clearly defined, highly specific niche, you’re bringing something to the table that will stand out. 

Your niche gives you leverage to show why what you have to say matters, who is going to listen, and how success in that opportunity can be measured. Those are win-wins for you and the person you’re asking.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get Nathalie's "Spiral Staircase Exercise"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Narrowing Your Niche Reconnects You with the Deeper Meaning of Your Business

Take a minute to really search your soul. What are you really passionate about changing in the world? Whom do you feel the most empathy for? Whose troubles do you burn to solve?

Your compassion is a powerful indicator of where your niche really lies. Identify the people whose struggles motivate you the most, and let them become co-creators of your business by defining your work around their needs.

“A lot of times, we get caught up in the logistics and the analytics, what’s the conversation rate, what’s the opt-in rate… Just remember that there’s a human being on the other side of that screen who has their own heartbeat, hopes, dreams and goals. When I’m sending an email, I’m not sending an email to my list—I’m sending an email to all these incredible human beings.”

Next time you find yourself in an all-too-familiar position in your business, don’t lose heart. Look for the opportunities it offers—opportunities that you’d never have seen last time you were in this place. There’s nothing wrong with a spiral if it’s leading you upward.

Jul 15, 2015
#66: How to Get Your Business Back on Track
50:11

I started out this year with a fully fleshed-out calendar. I knew exactly what I was going to do, when we were going to promote, when we were not going to promote, when I was going to take vacations, etc. Everything was planned.

Well, as you probably know, things change as the year gets going. As entrepreneurs, the challenge is to be flexible enough to seize good opportunities, but not so flexible that we lose all our momentum.

Now that it's July--where did the time go?--I decided to hit "pause" in the calendar flow and regroup.

I'm going to walk you through a simple, powerful exercise to evaluate where you are right now in your business, what’s working, what’s not working, and what needs to change.

I've also created a downloadable template that helps you chart your progress in this exercise. You can get it by clicking here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the "Back On Track" Action Assessment

FREE DOWNLOAD

Ready? Let's get started.

Step #1 - Review Your Week

Write down every single thing you can remember you’ve done in the last seven days. I mean everything--creating content, training, phone calls, reading emails, writing emails. It's crucial to know how you've been spending your time.

Step #2 - Perform a Brain Dump

Think ahead to the next six months, and write down all of the things you need to get done. People to contact, products to create, events to attend, blog posts to write . . . I mean everything. (Warning--don't use this as an opportunity to come up with new ideas! This is just for what you've got in the works right now.)

Step #3 - Identify the Revenue

Now that you've got your list of six months into the future, take a highlighter pen and highlight every item on that list that will produce revenue for you, either directly or indirectly.

Learn more about how you can successfully "regroup." Click here to listen to the full episode.

Step #4 - Identify Misspent Time

Now take another highlighter pen in a different color, go back to the list you made in Step #1, and highlight the tasks that were either a big waste of your time or that you could have delegated but didn't.

Now go back to the Six Month list, take a third highlighter pen, and highlight all of the things that you could either do farther into the future, or that can be leveraged or delegated.

Lots of highlighter action, I know. But this is all about identifying where you should and shouldn't be spending your time.

Step #5 - Color Code Your Calendar

I use Google calendar, which makes it very easy to highlight each entry in a certain color. The point is that to have different colors for different categories--planning a project, upcoming deadlines, content creation, podcasting, being interviewed with someone else, even time off or personal errands (like getting my hair cut).

Once you do this, you can step back and see the big picture of your schedule. Where are your biggest blocks of time being spent? Is that enough, given what you know about your work flow? Are you spending enough of your week doing the things you really love?

After all, isn't that a big part of why we start our own business?

Don't forget to download Amy's template that walks you through this whole exercise, step by step. Click here to get it.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get the "Back On Track" Action Assessment

FREE DOWNLOAD

At this point, it's time to pat yourself on the back, take a walk, breathe deeply.

That's the whole point of this exercise--giving yourself more room to breathe. You now have a bird's-eye view of what your schedule really looks like. You know where you need to focus your time. You know what things you can quit doing or delegate.

Without these moments to regroup, the day-to-day hustle can start to consume you. These regular check-ins with your schedule will put you back in charge of your business.

Jun 29, 2015
#65: Selling Yourself--The Art of a Winning 'About Page' with Melissa Cassera
56:05

For busy entrepreneurs, the About page of a website is one of the easiest to put off. You might throw a few vital details up there, like your name (always a good place to start) and your credentials, and promise yourself to fill it out later. Maybe you even go back and try adding some details that paint a fuller picture of you as a person.

But for many, no matter how hard they work on it, their About page just falls flat. It feels fake, like you’re pretending to be someone you’re not. And that makes sense—we’re all taught never to brag about ourselves…so it feels pretty strange to suddenly write a whole page about why your customers should think you’re so great!

That’s why I’m so happy to introduce you to Melissa Cassera. She’s a publicity expert (as well as a screenwriter and an actress), and if you read her own About page, you can see that she is an expert on how to write about yourself in a way that comes out warm, genuine and authentically irresistible.

Why Is An About Page Important?

Melissa compares the About page to the gown a Hollywood actress wears on the “red carpet.” It’s the way to show off both your importance and your individuality at once, impressing people and engaging them at the same time. The About page is where you give people just enough information about you to want to know more.

In other words, you don’t want to give away the whole story on your About page—it’s their intro to all the excitement that awaits if they choose to work with you. For the reader, it should feel like they’ve met you in person, looked you in the eye and shaken your hand.

So how do you convey that feeling in words?

Think About How You Serve the World

Rather than begin by talking about what you do, begin your About page with a line or two about why you do it. This should be the element that guides you through the writing process for your About page. If you get stuck or are wondering if you are including the right kinds of details, ask yourself if what you’ve written paints a picture of the world/society/lifestyle/change that you are trying to build with what you do.

Hear more of Melissa's tips on how to make your About page shine. Listen to the full interview here.  

Make Your Credentials Fun

It’s important to list the things that give your business credibility—an advanced degree, an impressive title or certification, a number of years in your field or successful working relationships with noteworthy people. But rather than just list them, Melissa advises having fun with them! Try translating your credentials into an analogy that helps your audience understand what that kind of cred means in your industry. (“I attended the Harvard of health coaching schools” is a good example.)

By listing your credentials this way, you can use your bragging rights to gain your readers’ trust and build engagement.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Melissa's Guide: "Craft A Crazy-Impressive About Page"

FREE DOWNLOAD

 Show Your Non-Professional Side

Would it surprise you to learn that the part of your About page that really sells you is the part where you talk about something besides work? This, Melissa says, is what really seals the emotional connection with people and allows them to get to know you on a more personal level. Not only that, but this section is what sets you apart from your competition. Nobody else has the same story, the same style, the same lovable quirks and personal motivations that you have.

As Melissa says in her "Better Bio Challenge" blog post,

"Personal details aren’t 'frivolous' — they anchor you in the reader’s mind and showcase the 'person' behind the 'business.' Try to include at least ONE little detail about your passions, guilty pleasures + personal life, in your bio — and you’ll sparkle off the page, every time."

Counterbalance Your Accomplishments

If your About page starts feeling a little self-indulgent, Melissa says an easy way to lighten it up is to “show your brushstrokes.” After mentioning the glowing review of your program on the Today Show, drop in a reference to that one time you tried to teach a college class and sat on a whoopee cushion. Details like this help keep you human to your readers, and show them that you’re the same as them—just a little farther along in the journey toward success.

Get Melissa's Mad Libs-style template for creating an irresistible About page. Click here to download it instantly!

Offer Fun Facts

Like the “non-professional life” part of your About page, this part is meant to connect with your ideal audience in a way that nothing else can. Tell a few “secrets” about yourself—that you cover your eyes during the scary parts of movies, that puppy videos make you cry, that your favorite place to work is in your kids’ treehouse.

Be forewarned—this will turn off some people. But they are the right people for you to turn off. At the end of the day, Melissa says, your About page is not meant to engage every single person out there.

“Your bio or About Page is only intended to turn on your ideal customers and it should be repelling the people that you want to turn off.”

Create an “Action Step”

By now, your audience has fallen head over heels in love with you…so what’s the next step? Where does the relationship go from here? Melissa says this is the moment to offer them a concrete action step. Offer a free opt-in gift, list links to your five most popular blog posts, tell them to contact you to set up a consultation. Whatever your specific action step is, make it simple and immediate for them to make the next move.

Get more of Melissa's suggestions for making your About page actionable. Click here to hear the full interview.

The Bottom Line: What Is Fame For? 

Melissa has a stellar blog post called “Four Questions to Help You Identify What's Not Working in Your Biz...And Make It Better.” In it, she offers this really thought-provoking quotation:

“Getting famous is not all it’s cracked up to be and getting featured in the media doesn’t always lead to sales, either.”

It’s not enough to have people think you’re “fabulous.” Better sales come from a real relationship with your clients, and the About page is all about relationship building. So while a clear action step is a great way to end your About page, leave the sales messages to your sales page and emails. Focus your About page on building trust and rapport with your target audience, and they will search for ways to work with you.

Jun 29, 2015
#64: A Backstage Pass to My Most Successful Launch Yet
01:08:35

Two weeks ago, in Episode #62, I reviewed the project plan I use for all of my promotions. And if you downloaded the free Project Plan Checklist that I offered, you might have had some questions about the bigger action items on that list.

I'm going to break down some of those bigger items in upcoming episodes. Today, though, I'm going to walk you through some of the details that led to the overwhelming success of this promotion.

This blog post is going to be just a tease for the podcast, for the simple reason we cover a lot of ground in the audio version! If you haven’t listened to this week’s episode yet, I really encourage you to download and enjoy the whole thing.

But for now, here are the basics:

Launch in Review

My recent launch of the Profit Lab was very different from past launches. I took some risks by changing things up and I’ll be honest—I was a little worried. But those risks paid off in a big way. It turned out to be the most successful launch I've ever done, with sales just under a million dollars, and some amazing new insights that will make future launches just as profitable.

Here's what really paid off this time:

Consistent Content

This launch came during the most consistent year I’ve had, in terms of offering free valuable content. Between my podcast, my blog, and the downloadable giveaways I offer each week, I was able to build a huge amount of affinity and trust with my audience. That really paid off when I started promoting my program for sale.

Surveying My Audience

A few months before the promotion began, I put a survey out to learn more about my audience. (I talk about that survey in Episode #55, if you haven’t checked it out yet.) That survey gave me immense insight into how my audience feels, what they need and, best of all, how they talk about those feelings and needs! When it came time to promote my program, I was able to speak their language better than ever.

A Targeted Giveaway

The Product Maximizer, which I gave away a few weeks before the launch, was more than just a free download. It was targeted at the exact people that I knew would benefit from my program. I had over 7,300 people opt-in for that free giveaway. When it came time to promote the program, I got to speak to those 7,000 people in a different way than anybody else on my list, because I knew they would be keenly interested in exactly what I was going to offer.

Educating My Target Market

Another pre-promotion I did was a live webinar series, where I taught on a topic related to the Profit Lab. The reason I did this was to help my target market understand what they truly needed for making more money online (i.e., a sales funnel). That gave me a perfect segue into selling my program, which is all about creating that sales funnel!

Rebranding

This year’s Profit Lab had a brand-new look and a brand-new name. The name change was a risk, but I went for it and it paid off. And I think the facelift had a lot to do with that! Everything from the ads to the imagery to the course materials was done by one great designer. As a result, the whole thing had a very distinctive look that appealed to people who had never heard of my program, and renewed interest from people who had heard of it.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's "Profit Lab Ad Creative Setup"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Retargeted Ads

This was the first time I’d ever done this. Retargeting means running ads specifically to people who showed interest in a product but then didn’t “pull the trigger.” In this case, it meant people who had visited a sign-up page for the free webinar I was offering, but then didn’t register for it. I created retargeted Facebook ads to reach those people and encourage them to go back and sign up. For those who did sign up, I retargeted them with an ad that sent them directly to the Profit Lab sales page.

There are so many more details of this launch that I want to share with you, including what worked and what didn’t work so well, especially when it came to running Facebook and Google ads. These details will be immensely helpful alongside this week’s free download.

Jun 25, 2015
#63: How Podcasting Can Complement and Grow Your Business with John Lee Dumas
41:58

Last year, one of my most popular podcasts was an interview with John Lee Dumas. But I invited him back this week because I wanted to talk about podcasting again, in a whole new way.

Today, I want to focus on about podcasting for somebody who already has a platform. Maybe you have a business with a blog. Maybe you have an online training program or course that you’re constantly perfecting and promoting from one year to the next. Maybe you are a coach or consultant.

Bottom line, you have something important to say. And maybe you’ve been thinking the podcast thing seems to be growing even bigger, and might be a good way to help your business get bigger, too.

Well, you’re right. It is.

No question, podcasting requires a fair amount of work, especially to get it all set up. But it can also be a huge boost to your business’ visibility, to establishing your brand as a leader, and  ultimately to your sales.

John is a podcasting superhero. His show Entrepreneur on Fire is consistently ranked among iTunes’ top business podcasts—he even got a Best of iTunes recognition within his first year! More impressively, though, he puts out a new episode every day! (As in seven days a week—no weekends off for this guy.) This makes him the perfect person to explain why podcasting is worth it, how he gets it done, and how he manages to stay fired up about it every single week.

Why Should You Podcast?

As entrepreneurs, we are always looking for other avenues to grow our audience. That’s why we use Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter, that’s why we blog and send emails to our list. The podcasting sphere is just another way to reach more people—a lot more people. iTunes has 525 million active subscribers, and SoundCloudStitcher and Spotify are catching up fast.

Podcasters are an obsessive crowd—they are constantly looking for new content to listen to during their commute, while walking their dog, while they’re waiting at the airport…you name it!

That’s the great thing about podcasting—it doesn’t require you to say “no” to something else, the way a lot of content does. In our multi-tasking culture, it’s the perfect way to get your message heard and deliver free, valuable and consistent content to your audience.

What Kind of Work Is Involved?

The great news is that you really don’t have to create that much more work to keep a podcast going. You just repurpose content that you’re already creating for one outlet into another outlet.

To get started, simply go back to your best blog posts (or videos, or images, or even social media posts), the ones that got the best engagement, and turn them into a bullet point flow. Then switch on the microphone and talk your way through them. Beef it up by talking about what led you to create that piece of content. Talk some of the comments you received. Talk about what you liked best about it. Talk about how you feel toward that content now.

By doing this, you’re getting the attention of people who may never find you on Facebook, or who always mean to read your blog and just don’t make the time to do it. You’re getting them in the midst of their busy day, and becoming a familiar voice in their  lives.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Sign Up for John's Free Podcast Workshop

SIGN UP

How Do You Get It Done?

First let me assure you that you don’t have to create a seven-day-a-week podcast for it to be a valuable tool in growing your business. But even recording once a week can feel daunting, especially when you’re just getting into the groove, or you get sidelined by a busy week and suddenly realize that you’re scheduled to post a new episode tomorrow.

The key to getting it done is batch processing. This approach is one that will save your sanity, if you stick to it. And it all depends on one big thing…

Scheduling

The key here, John says, is owning your schedule. He doesn’t ask guests what time works for them—he sends them his calendar and has them pick from the slots he has open. And then, each Tuesday from 9am-4pm, John has eight one-hour conversations with podcast guests. At the end of the day, he’s done with interviews for the week! (Plus an extra, just in case.)

It works the same even if you’re not doing interviews on your podcast. Schedule the time, block it out, and power through several recordings in a row. You’ll find yourself getting in a flow that makes each one better than the last.

Template

Having a pre-determined format is crucial when you’re just getting started podcasting. What you don’t want is a lot of awkward silences, information getting repeated, or rabbit trails because you just don’t know what to say.

You don’t need to write a full script—what you do need is some sort of structure to give your episodes consistency and help you find your voice. It will also help people understand who you are and what your podcast is about. (If it’s too free-flowy at first, people may stop listening because they don’t have a framework for understanding you.)

Over time, this structure will become second-nature to you, and your listeners will have a grasp on who you are and what you’re about. More and more, you’ll be able to just talk into the microphone.

Voice

It’s normal not to like the way your voice sounds on a recording.

But John says “Get over it.”

The thing is, consuming audio content makes people feel a personal connection in a way that other media just can’t reach. For one thing, listening is a very intimate act—even more than watching a video. For another thing, people bring podcasts with them into, let’s just say, very intimate parts of their lives. John says people have told him they listen to his show while they’re in the shower! It sounds crazy, but having someone’s voice with you all through the day, even when you don’t know what they look like, makes you feel a real connection to them.

So don’t be afraid of how you sound. Keep your focus on your content and the people out there that you’re trying to reach.

But Wait...There's More!

John has some incredible free content for you. If you want to learn about how to find your ideal podcast topic, your ideal podcast listener, how to get your show noticed in the ever-growing podcast arena, and so much more, click here to get into his free podcasting workshop.

Jun 19, 2015
#62: How to Create a Project Plan for Your Next Promotion
01:05:08

You know me--I teach what I know best. And what I know by now, more than anything, is that the key to making a sales plan work is having a proven, foolproof system. 

So today, I'm going to walk you through my project management system, line by line. This is one I've spent hours mapping out with my team. Some of it will be familiar to you, but it's in the little details that you'll find the most value--the tiny things that make your promotion polished, professional and, most importantly, effective.

Another great thing about putting together a promotion with this system is that it sets up your content to be "evergreen"--meaning you can use it over and over again to sell your product and build your business.

There's a lot of content in this post and in the podcast. But don't worry. I've put together a special checklist for you, so that you can put all this information into action right off the bat. No matter what kind of promotion you're planning, this checklist has all the basic steps you need to make sure it launches successfully.

Click here to download it instantly.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get "The Project Plan Checklist"

FREE DOWNLOAD

I divide all my promotional planning into three categories:

  • The Pre category is everything you do before the cart opens (i.e., your product becomes available for sale).
  • The Live category is everything you do when the cart is open.
  • The Post category is everything you do after the cart closes.

I've launched promotions in the past that I've had just a few weeks to pull together. As my business has grown, I've had more time to plan and prepare. But here's the thing: it's never enough time! Let me encourage you to always get started on this system earlier than you think. There will always be last-minute tasks that have you scrambling. That scramble will be a lot less stressful, the sooner you get started. (Right now, I'm already starting on this system for a promo set to launch in October!)

Category #1: Pre-Promotion

As you might guess, 80% of the work happens in the Pre phase. I’ve broken them down into smaller categories, starting with…

Admin

The cornerstone of Admin is making all your decisions in advance, getting organized and scheduled, so that when you “hit the red button” for your launch, you can enjoy (mostly) smooth sailing through your promotion.

Organization

The first thing we do might surprise you: we organize our Dropbox. We have a folder for everything…no file floats alone. But  I’ll admit to being a little crazy about this, but let me tell you—it saves you from going a lot crazier in the long run, wondering where those files are that you need to send to your designer so you can launch in two hours!

Confirm and Document All Promo Dates

Before getting started, I put each stage of the promotion down on the calendar. For example, in my recent Profit Lab promotion, I had to nail down when I’d start running various Facebook ads, when I’d release each promotional webinar, when the early bird pricing began and ended…all of those little pieces are determined before anything gets started.

Schedule Promotion Phases

I have different phases in each of my promos. Phase 1 includes offering free content that warms up my target audience by offering value before I promote anything for sale. Remember the Product Maximizer from a few weeks back? That was a pre-promo content piece, scheduled for Phase 1. Phase 2 included free webinars that ended with a product pitch. Phase 3 was when the cart opened, so it includes lots of timely bonuses and heavy ad running to people who have shown interest. And the final phases are all about “Take Action Now! Cart Closing Soon!”

These are my phases—you’ll have your own. But the point is scheduling them in advance, to save playing catch-up with yourself later.

Determine Price Points/Membership Levels, Hire Designer/Programmer/Copywriter

This is where you're setting your ground rules for sales and assembling your team to make those sales happen!

Set Up All Campaigns in InfusionSoft

Decide in advance which emails you’re going to want to send, and queue them up for sending. You won’t have them all written yet, of course, because you don’t have all the links, downloads, maybe even some product language. But setting up the campaigns in advance will let know where there are holes you need to fill.

Content Creation

This is where I spend the most time...and the most worry...and the most creativity. I love this phase, even in its stressful moments, because it's when I get to spend quality time with my product, making it perfect for my audience.

I always start this phase by creating a content grid--a spreadsheet that helps me keep track of each component of the content I'm creating. Here's a snapshot of what mine looks like:

Program/Product Content Creation

This includes everything from creating the product name, brainstorming a logo, getting into all the nuts and bolts of the product. (For me, that means deciding on modules, creating outlines, determining what should be core content vs. bonuses.)

As part of this, I always include a “Stick Strategy”—a juicy bonus I send to people after they purchase, to keep them excited and engaged, and let them know they’re being taken care of.

Promo Content Creation

Same as above, except just for the promotion part. I use my free content—my blog, my podcast, social media posts, webinars and related giveaways—to offer valuable giveaways

Members’ Area

This is where people log in after they buy, and get all your product content. For the Profit Lab, I create a very specific outline for members to see how the course is going to run—I list all the modules, links for downloads, and bonuses they’ll get along the way. I also include a welcome video to let them know what I’m going to let them know.

Setting this up in advance is especially important so that you can test it before releasing it! There will always be bugs—the important thing is to catch them before your audience does.

Sales Page + Order Form Creation

As a team, we lay out the way we want these pages to look, write the sales copy (including testimonials), set up your countdown timer, and collect the images we need for it, and send it on over to the designer and the coder.

Again, you need to test it out! This includes double-checking the sales disclaimer, the privacy policy, the refund policy, all the little details that get overlooked in the stress of actual launch. Also, have someone do a test sale, to make sure that everything happens the way it’s supposed to when real customers show up.

Create Email Grid

This outlines every email we’re planning to send in InfusionSoft, and when we’re going to send it. Note the subject line, when they’re going to be sent, and who is going to receive it.

Wondering what kinds of emails you should send? Listen to the full podcast episode to get Amy's detailed list of what to send and when. 

Customer Support

Determine the language around your refund and discount policies, automatic responses, and answers to FAQs that your customer support team can be ready with. This could also include a pre-recorded voicemail if you have a customer support phone line.

Determine Graphics

In the past, we’d be frantically creating images at the last minute. But in my last Profit Lab launch, I had a complete list of every graphic I'd need for anything related to the promotion--imagery for emails, social media, website, the works. As a result, I was able get it all designed in advance by one designer, so it was ready early and it all looked consistent.

I've included that list in the free downloadable checklist for this week--get it here!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get "The Project Plan Checklist"

FREE DOWNLOAD

Ad Grid

Facebook ads, Google ads…we have them all mapped out in advance, with imagery, copy and dates for when to run them in each phase.

Social Media

Creating a posting schedule has really saved me a few headache! We determine ahead of time what we want to post on social media about the promotion, set it up in Edgar (my favorite queuing tool), and have one less thing to worry about when the launch goes live. (Just make sure to glance at your social media from time to time throughout the launch, to make sure that your links and images are showing up correctly.)

“Mastery” Level

I don’t always do this for promotions, but sometimes I include a special “VIP” membership tier that includes extra bells and whistles—a Facebook group, live Q&A calls, all that good stuff. If you’re doing different levels, make sure you list in advance all the extras you’ll be doing, including times/dates, setup you’ll need to do, and whatever material that you’ll be offering.

Waitlist Page

It’s important for your integrity to close the cart right when you said you were going to. Right after the cart closes, I redirect all the purchase links to the waitlist page. This is super important to set up in advance—believe me, you don’t want to be setting up your waitlist page in the minutes right after your cart closes!

Tracking Document

Daily sales, units sold, whatever you want to track, get this tracking document set up in advance and designate the person who will be tracking it. One thing you don't during your launch is to be constantly adding up your numbers to see how you're doing!

Get more of Amy's insights on this step-by-step promotion plan. Listen to the full podcast episode here.

Whew! The PRE phase is done…which means most of your work is done. The next two phases are really short and sweet.

Category #2: Live Promotion

Maintain the New Customers Area

As you start to sell, make sure everything’s working for your new customers, and that they’re having a smooth experience.

Price Change

If you did an Early Bird pricing, like I often do, you’re going to be increasing your price at some point while the cart is open. So you’re going to be switching out order forms and change your sales page in the midst of your launch.

Social Media Upkeep

Having this in your project plan is huge—you (or your team member) will know exactly when to change out any social media imagery from Pre phase to Live phase.

Category #3: Post Promotion

Shut Down Ads

Redirect Promo Pages to Your Waitlist

Remove Promotional Imagery from Website/Social Media

Celebrate! 

I’m always ready for a virtual champagne toast by the end of the process. I also send out thank-you notes to everyone who has helped: team members, affiliates, experts, etc.

Jun 18, 2015
#61: How to Use Visual Content to Drive Traffic, Shares and Sales with Donna Moritz
44:24

As humans, we are hardwired to connect emotionally with visual content. Pictures in particular--we process them very quickly--faster than text, video, or audio. Pictures allow us to make a really quick decision about whether we are going to engage with something.

It's no secret that some of the most successful brands in the world owe their popularity to their visual content strategy. Notice I said strategy--in other words, not just any visual content will do.

Fortunately, one of the world's biggest experts in visual social media and content strategy is also a good friend of mine.

You probably know Donna Moritz already as the power behind Socially Sorted, the award-winning blog about using visual content on social media. I know her as my #1 student from the very first Profit Lab course I ever launched. She's also shown up on this site more than once.

But today, Donna is here to school me--and you--in how to set up a visual content strategy that supports your sales and sends your message.

She's also put together an amazing freebie for us--a three-part video series that walks you through the process of creating polished imagery. This is where you'll learn how to use all the tools mentioned in this episode. Trust me--it's a must-have.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Donna Moritz's Free Guide To Creating Visual Content

FREE DOWNLOAD

Before she became the renowned expert she is today, Donna learned all the ins and outs of visual content strategy through simple practice. After working in several different businesses--sometimes for others, sometimes for herself--she saw how visual content really created that initial resonance with a target audience that makes them want to learn more.

The main thing with your visual content is to "stop the scroll"--in other words, arrest your audience's attention so that their finger pauses above their mouse or smartphone screen, and they take the time to engage with your message.

The more Donna learned, the more excited she got about the potential of various kinds of visual content. If you've ever felt overwhelmed by the sheer variety of visual content styles out there, don't worry--Donna is here to break it into three basic levels.

These are the really easy-to-create, easy-to-share individual images that would be on Facebook, Pinterest and Instagram. Think funny photos, behind-the-scenes shots, images that incorporate quotes, tips or other short bits of text. They are really a good jumping-off point to lead into a longer message.

Here is a sample batch of quote images, observational humor, business tips, questions and motivational images ready to go (and all created on Canva and WordSwag).

These types of images are designed to increase reach and engagement.

Shareable images get their strength from their simplicity. But that doesn't mean you can only use them for short, simple concepts. By attaching an image with a call to action or link, you can increase shares (such as retweets on Twitter) and generate more visits to your blog or other "landing content."

Also, remember that tweets with images get retweeted twice as often...so post images!

Remember, on all platforms, it is important to keep a balance of your own helpful and entertaining content, and curated content from other pages or businesses. This earns you the right to post some promotional images with calls to action.

You can also work with your designer if you want to save time (and money) or can't design the images yourself. Ask your designer to create a template which you can then add text to.